health sciences
Transcription
health sciences
Bachelor of HEALTH SCIENCES (Audiology/Biomedicine/Dietetics/ Environmental and Occupational Health/Exercise and Sports Science/ Medical Radiation/ Nursing/ Nutrition/Speech Pathology) SCIENCE (Forensic Science) Diploma in Nursing Academic Session 2012/2013 USM Vision Transforming Higher Education for a Sustainable Tomorrow USM Mission USM is a pioneering, transdisciplinary research intensive university that empowers future talent and enables the bottom billions to transform their socio-economic well being i STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION Full Name Identity Card (IC)/Passport No. Current Address Permanent Address E-mail Address Telephone No. (Residence) Mobile Phone No. (if applicable) School Programme of Study ii CONTENT PAGE I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VISION AND MISSION STUDENT'S PERSONAL INFORMATION CONTENT ACADEMIC CALENDAR SCHOOL MAIN ADMINISTRATIVES SCHOOL STAFF LIST 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 9.0 INTRODUCTION ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS MAJOR PROGRAMMES 4.1. Biomedicine …………………………………………… 4.2. Dietetics …………………………………………….… 4.3. Nursing ………………………………………………… 4.4. Forensic Science ……………………………………… 4.5. Medical Radiation ……………………………………… 4.6. Audiology……………………………………………… 4.7. Speech Pathology……………………………………… 4.8. Exercise and Sports Science…………………………… 4.9. Nutrition………………………………………………. 4.10. Environmental and Occupational Health….……….... COURSES SYNOPSIS 5.1. Core Courses Level 100.............……………….……… 5.2. Core Courses Level 200 …………...................………. 5.3. Core Courses Level 300 ………………….................... 5.4. Core Courses Level 400 ……………………………… ELECTIVE COURSES FACILITIES GENERAL INFORMATION 8.1. Career Guidance ……………………………………… 8.2. Prizes, Awards and Dean's List ………….…………… 8.3. Society …………….….………………………………… 8.4. Postgraduate Programmes…………………….………… 8.5. Overseas Training Scheme …………………………… DIPLOMA OF NURSING 1-2 3 - 27 28 - 45 45 - 91 45 - 49 50 - 53 54 - 58 59 - 62 63 - 66 67 - 72 73- 78 79 - 82 83 - 86 87 - 91 92 - 194 93 - 106 107 - 135 136 - 170 171 - 194 195 - 205 206 207 - 212 207 - 211 211 212 212 212 213 - 252 10.0 11.0 INDEX.......................................................................................... STUDENT’S FEEDBACK........................................................... 253 - 264 265 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 iii i ii iii iv - v vi vii - xiv ACADEMIC CALENDAR 2012/2013 [09 SEPTEMBER 2012 - 07 SEPTEMBER 2013 (52 WEEKS)] * Registration for New Students, 1 - 2 September 2012 * Orientation Week/Minggu Haluan Diri Siswa, 3 - 9 September 2012 WEEK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 SEMESTER I Teaching & Learning Period MID-SEMESTER BREAK I 16 17 18 19 ACTIVITIES Teaching & Learning Period Revision Week I Examinations DATE Sunday, 09/09/12 - Thursday, 13/09/12 Sunday, 16/09/12 - Thursday, 20/09/12 Sunday, 23/09/12 - Thursday, 27/09/12 Sunday, 30/09/12 - Thursday, 04/10/12 Sunday, 07/10/12 - Thursday, 11/10/12 Sunday, 14/10/12 - Thursday, 18/10/12 Sunday, 21/10/12 - Thursday, 25/10/12 Monday, 29/10/12-Thursday, 01/11/12 Sunday, 04/11/12-Thursday, 08/11/12 Friday, 09/11/12 - Saturday, 17/11/12 Sunday, 18/11/12 - Thursday, 22/11/12 Sunday, 25/11/12 - Thursday, 29/11/12 Sunday, 02/12/12 - Thursday, 06/12/12 Sunday, 09/12/12 - Thursday, 13/12/12 Sunday, 16/12/12 - Thursday, 20/12/12 Friday, 21/12/12 - Saturday, 29/12/12 REMARKS Malaysia Day Sunday, 16/9/12 Hari Raya Qurban Sunday, 26/10/12-28/10/12 Hari Keputeraan Sultan Kelantan Sunday & Monday, 11 & 12/11/12 Deepavali Tuesday, 13/11/12 Maal Hijrah Thursday, 15/11/12 Christmas, Tuesday, 25/12/12 Sunday, 30/12/12 - Thursday, 03/01/13 Sunday, 06/01/13 - Thursday, 10/01/13 Sunday, 13/01/13 - Thursday, 17/01/13 Maulidul Rasul Thursday, 24/01/13 20 - 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 INTER- SEMESTER BREAK (4 Weeks) II Teaching & Learning Period MID-SEMESTER BREAK II Teaching & Learning Period Friday, 18/01/13 - Saturday, 16/02/13 Sunday, 17/02/13 - Thursday, 21/02/13 Sunday, 24/02/13 - Thursday, 28/02/13 Sunday, 03/03/13 - Thursday, 07/03/13 Sunday, 10/03/13 - Thursday, 14/03/13 Sunday, 17/03/13 - Thursday, 21/03/13 Sunday, 24/03/13 - Thursday, 28/03/13 Sunday, 31/03/13 - Thursday, 04/04/13 Friday, 05/04/13- Saturday, 13/04/13 Sunday, 14/04/13 - Thursday, 18/04/13 Sunday, 21/04/13 - Thursday, 25/04/13 Sunday, 28/04/13 - Thursday, 02/05/13 Sunday, 05/05/13 - Thursday, 09/05/13 Sunday, 12/05/13 - Thursday, 16/05/13 Sunday, 19/05/13 - Thursday, 23/05/13 Sunday, 26/05/13 - Thursday, 30/05/13 iv Chinese New Year Sunday, 10/02/13 Labour Day Wednesday, 01/05/13 Wesak Day May 2013 39 40 41 42 43 - 52 Friday, 31/05/13 - Saturday, 08/06/13 Revision Week Examinations Long Vacation/Industrial Training/ KSCP (10 Weeks) Sunday, 09/06/13 - Thursday, 13/06/13 Sunday, 16/06/13 - Thursday, 20/06/13 Sunday, 23/06/13 - Thursday, 27/06/13 Friday, 28/06/13 - Saturday, 07/09/13 Hari Raya Puasa 29/06/13 - 08/09/13 Independant Day 31/08/13 STRUCTURE PERIOD OF LONG VACATION COURSES (KSCP) 43 - 45 46 - 47 48 49 - 52 3 weeks 2 weeks 1 week 4 weeks Holiday Teaching Period Examination Holiday v Friday, 28/06/13 - Saturday, 20/07/13 Sunday, 21/07/13 - Thursday, 25/07/13 Sunday, 28/07/13 - Thursday, 01/08/13 Friday, 02/08/13 - Saturday, 07/09/13 SCHOOL MAIN ADMINISTRATIVES vii SCHOOL STAFF LIST Tel: 609-764 7880/609 7677509/7510/7518 Fax: 609-7677515 NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. NAME Professor Ahmad Haji Zakaria Associate Professor Pim Chau Dam POSITION Dean Deputy Dean Academic & Student Development /Quality Management Representative 7783 Associate Professor Dr. Zafarina Zainuddin Associate Professor Dr. Shaharum Shamsuddin Deputy Dean Research & Graduate Studies 7616 / 7779 [email protected] Deputy Dean Division of Industry & Community Network 7782 [email protected] NAME Professor Dinsuhaimi Sidek Dr. Mohd Normani Zakaria Dr. Zuraida Zainun Dr. Nik Adilah Nik Othman Ms. Aw Cheu Lih TELEPHONE 7777 / 7784 AUDIOLOGY PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Programme 6410/6428 Chairman/Lecturer Lecturer 7646 Lecturer Lecturer 7559 7571 Lecturer 7786 BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME Dr. Lim Boon Huat Programme 7619 Chairman/Lecturer Professor Dr. Norazmi Lecturer 7605 EMAIL [email protected] [email protected] EMAIL [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Mohd. Nor 8. Professor Dr. Zainul Fadziruddin Zainuddin Seconded to MOSTI 9. Professor Dr. Zalina Ismail Coordinator, Centre for 7766 Neurocognitive Science, (Brain Network) BRAINetwork/ Lecturer [email protected] 10. Associate Professor Farid Che Ghazali Associate Professor Pim Chau Dam Lecturer 7539 [email protected] Deputy Dean Academic and Student Development /Quality Management Representative/Lecturer 7783 [email protected] 11. viii 04-6533091 [email protected] NO. 12. NAME Associate Professor Dr. Shaharum Shamsuddin 13. Associate Professor Dr. Sharifah Mastura Syed Mohamad 14. 15. Dr. Few Ling Ling Dr. Hasmah Abdullah Dr. Hermizi Hapidin Dr. Mohd Dasuki Haji Sul’ain Dr. Nik Norliza Nik Hassan Dr. Noor Izani Noor Jamil 20. 21. 22. Mr. Nor Azmi Zainal 23. Dr. Shyamoli Mustafa Dr. Tee Get Bee @ Yvonne Dr. Wan Amir Nizam Wan Ahmad Dr. Wan Ezumi Mohd Puad @ Mohd Fuad Dr. Wan Nor Azilah @ Wan Nor Amilah Wan Abdul Wahab Dr. Yusmazura Zakaria Mr. Zamri Ibrahim Dr. Zefarina Zulkafli Dr. Idris Long 16. 17. 18. 19. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. Dr. Rapeah Suppian Dr. See Too Wei Cun Ms. Nurhidanatasha Abu Bakar BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Deputy Dean 7615/7504 Division of Industry & Community Network/ Quality Coordinator/ Lecturer Coordinator, Health Informatic/Lecturer EMAIL [email protected] (BJIM) 7782 (Dean Office) 7568 [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer 7536 7534 [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer 7634 7581 [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer 7532 [email protected] Lecturer 7604 [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer 7547 7613 7537 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer 7565 [email protected] Lecturer 7597 [email protected] Lecturer 7652 [email protected] Lecturer 7626 [email protected] Lecturer 7552 [email protected] Lecturer 7781 [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer 7543 7799 [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer 7778 7814 [email protected] [email protected] Coordinator, Science Laboratory Management Unit /Lecturer ix NO. 33. 34. NAME Dr. Nor Fazila Che Mat Dr. Tan Suat Cheng 35. Associate Professor Dr. Shariza Abdul Razak Mr. S. Daniel Robert Dr. Sakinah Harith Dr. Marina Abdul Manaf 36. 37. 38. 39. Associate Professor Siti Hawa Ali 40. Associate Professor Mohd Isa Haji Bakar Dr. Mujahid Bakar Ms. Rehanah Mohd. Zain Dr. Rohani Ismail Dr. Rosminah Mohamed Dr. Rohasliney Hashim Dr. Wan Faizah Wan Yusof Ms. Hjh. Wan Aminah Haji Hasbullah 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. BIOMEDICINE PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Lecturer 7768 Lecturer 7776 DIETETICS PROGRAMME Programme 7638 Chairman/ Lecturer Lecturer 7635 Lecturer 7637 Lecturer 7617 ELECTIVE PROGRAMME Programme 7570 Chairman/ Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7555 EMAIL [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7788 7564 [email protected] [email protected] Senior Lecturer Senior Lecturer 7789 7586 [email protected] [email protected] Senior Lecturer Lecturer 7598 7540 [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer 7566 [email protected] (Study Leave) 48. Dr. Che Rabiaah Mohamed 49. Ms. Radziah Mohd Fauzi Ms. Jayah K. Pubalan Ms. Kasmah Wati Pardi Ms. Rahimah Mohd Anshari Ms. Sabarishah Hashim 50. 51. 52. 53. NURSING PROGRAMME Programme 7577 Chairman /Lecturer Lecturer 7588 [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer Lecturer 7550 7533 7558 [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Lecturer 7551 [email protected] Lecturer 7807 [email protected] Lecturer 7557 [email protected] (Study Leave) 54. 55. Dr. Dariah Mohd Yusoff Ms. Norazliah Hj Samsudin x NO. 56. 57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73. 74. 75. 76. 77. NURSING PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Ms. Rosmawati Lecturer 7611 [email protected] Mohamed Dr. Soon Lean Keng Lecturer 7546 [email protected] Ms. Intan Idiana Hassan Lecturer 7636 [email protected] Ms. Zakira Mamat @ Lecturer 7554 [email protected] Mohamed (Study Leave) Ms. Hartini Muhamad Nursing Tutor 7735 [email protected] Ms. Nik Asiah Nik Lah Nursing Tutor 7735 [email protected] Ms. Nik Nor Azlina Abd. Nursing Tutor 7738 [email protected] Kadir Ms. Siti Aishah Haji Nursing Tutor 7737 [email protected] Ghazali Ms. Zahniyah Che Ishak Nursing Tutor 7736 [email protected] Ms. Salwismawati Nursing Tutor 7738 [email protected] Badrin ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH PROGRAMME Dr. Hj. Mohd Nazhari Programme 7650 [email protected] Hj. Mohd Nawi Chairman/ Medical Lecturer Associate Professor Lecturer 7535 [email protected] Dr. Haliza Abdul Rahman Dr. Maliki Hapani Lecturer 7625 [email protected] Mr. Mohd Nasrom Hj. Lecturer 7800 [email protected] Mohd Nawi Ms. Faridah Naim Lecturer 7804 [email protected] Dr. Nurulilyana Lecturer 7810 [email protected] Sansuddin SPEECH PATHOLOGY PROGRAMME Ms. Azlinda Abd. Ghani Programme 7592 [email protected] Chairman/ Lecturer Mr. Khairy Anuar Mohd Lecturer 7614 [email protected] Khairuddin Ms. Nurul Hidayah Dean Lecturer 7809 [email protected] Kamarudin Dr. Nik Fariza Husna Medical 7805 [email protected] Nik Hassan Lecturer NUTRITION PROGRAMME Professor Wan Abdul Programme 7648 [email protected] Manan Wan Muda Chairman/ Lecturer Dr. Foo Leng Huat Lecturer 7548 [email protected] xi NO. 78. 79. 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. 85. 86. NUTRITION PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Dr. Hamid Jan Jan Lecturer 7618 [email protected] Mohamad Associate Professor Lecturer 7649 [email protected] Dr. Wan Rosli Wan Ishak @ Wan Ahmad Dr. Soo Kah Leng Lecturer 7631 [email protected] Dr. Norfarizan Hanoon Lecturer 7633 [email protected] Noor Azmi Dr. Sharifah Zahhura Lecturer 7767 [email protected] Syed Abdulalh EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE PROGRAMME Associate Professor Dr. Programme 7602 [email protected] Mohamed Saat Ismail Chairman/ Lecturer Mr. Erie Zuraidee Lecturer [email protected] Zulkifli (Study Leave) Mr. Nurul Azuar Lecturer 7641 [email protected] Hamzah Ms. Vina Tan Phei Sean Lecturer [email protected] (Study Leave) 87. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. 97. Associate Professor Dr. Lecturer 7585 Oleksandr Krasilshchikov Dr. Soumendra Saha Lecturer 7599 Associate Professor Dr. Lecturer 7765 Wan Aasim Wan Adnan Dr. Srilekha Saha Lecturer 7605 Dr. Mohd Zulkifli Abd. Lecturer 7620 Rahim Dr. Rosniwati Ghafar Lecturer 7816 MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME Ms. Chen Suk Chiang Programme 7639 Chairman/ Lecturer Professor Ahmad Haji Dean/ 7777 / 7784 Zakaria Lecturer Associate Professor Dr. Lecturer 7556 Mohamad Jamel Basha Adlan Dr. Arefuddin Ahmed Lecturer 7567 Dr. Wan Nordiana Lecturer 7811 W. Abd. Rahman xii [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] NO. 98. 99. 100. 101. MEDICAL RADIATION PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE Mr. Mohd Fahmi Mohd Lecturer 7576 Yusof Ms. Siti Aishah Abdul Lecturer 7623 Aziz FORENSIC SCIENCE PROGRAMME Dr. Mohamad Hadzri Programme 7553 Yaacob Chairman/ Lecturer Associate Professor Lecturer 7583 EMAIL [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] Dr. R. Kuppuswamy 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 109. 110. 111. 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118. 119. Associate Professor Dr. Sayed Waliullah Shah Associate Professor Dr. P.T. Jayaprakash Dr. Nik Fakhuruddin Nik Hassan Mr. S. Panneerchelvam Mr. T. Nataraja Moorthy Associate Professor Dr. Zafarina Zainuddin Lecturer 7582 [email protected] Lecturer 7601 [email protected] Lecturer 7621 [email protected] Lecturer Lecturer 7587 7589 [email protected] [email protected] 7616 / 7779 [email protected] Deputy Dean Research & Graduate Studies/ Lecturer Dr. Affizal Ahmad Lecturer 7595 [email protected] Dr. Ahmad Fahmi Lim Lecturer 7596 [email protected] Abdullah Dr. Noor Zuhartini Md. Lecturer 7785 [email protected] Muslim Dr. Naji Arafat Mahat Lecturer 7808 [email protected] Dr. Geshina Ayu Mat Lecturer 7773 [email protected] Saat DIPLOMA OF NURSING PROGRAMME Ms. Noor Aini Hussain Programme 7531 [email protected] Ms. Anisah Mat Desa Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir Ms. Fazdillah Husin Ms. Hasni Embong Ms. Low Kim Lian Ms. Mas Nor Saloni Chairman/ Lecturer Tutor Tutor Tutor Tutor Tutor Tutor 7744 7733 7743 7741 7747 7732 Ibrahim xiii [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] [email protected] NO. 120. 121. 122. NAME DIPLOMA OF NURSING PROGRAMME POSITION TELEPHONE Ms. Noor Jasmani Hassan Ms. Nor Rahan Mohamad Ms. Norizam Muhammad Yusof EMAIL Tutor 7746 [email protected] Tutor 7780 [email protected] Tutor 7734 [email protected] Tutor Tutor 7745 7742 [email protected] [email protected] Tutor 7750 [email protected] Tutor 7749 [email protected] Tutor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor Clinical Instructor 7748 6672 [email protected] [email protected] 6672 [email protected] 6672 [email protected] 6672 [email protected] Clinical Instructor 6672 [email protected] (Study Leave) 123. 124. Ms. Norliza Hussin Ms. Nurhayati 127. 128. Mohamad Nor Ms.Tuan Ruasmani Tuan Daud Ms. Zaihan Abd. Rahman Ms. Zuraida Yusoff Ms. Chu Be Lai 129. Ms. Halizan Yusoff 125. 126. (Study Leave) 130. Ms. Masturah Hamzah 131. Ms. Norizan Che Mohd Yusoff (Study Leave) 132. Ms. Zaharah Muhamad The School of Health Sciences is also supported by academic staff from the School of Medical Sciences, School of Dental Sciences, School of Physics, School of Social Science, School of Mathematics, School of Distance Education and external lecturers from Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Universiti Putra Malaysia, Royal Malaysia Police, Department of Chemistry Malaysia and the Fire and Rescue Department of Malaysia. xiv NO. 1. 2. 3. NAME Mr. Md. Lukmi Ismail Mr. Hera Jauhar Lal Singh a/l Kishen Singh Ms. Wan Suriati Wan Nik 4. Ms. Syuhazlina Marini Awg. Mat 5. Ms. Mirawaty Mat Ghani 6. Mr. Rohasreyn Hashim ADMINISTRATION POSITION TELEPHONE Chief Science 7541 Officer Senior Science 7629 Officer EMAIL [email protected] [email protected] Research & Graduate Studies (Research) / Senior Science Officer 7545 [email protected] Senior Assistant Registrar (Administrative) Assistant Registrar (Academic) Assistant Registrar 7507 [email protected] 7516 [email protected] 7522 [email protected] (Research & Graduate Studies) xv 1.0 INTRODUCTION Background The treatment and prevention of diseases have long been the foundation of conventional thoughts in matters of health. These thoughts have undergone changes, albeit slowly, towards the concept of a more holistic management of health, based not only on the biology of diseases but also incorporating aspects of sociological sciences, behavior and the environment. This concept of health gives cognizance not only to patients but to the healthy individual as well. Rapid advancement in technology has helped to hasten these changes in concepts, methodologies and the way health services are disbursed. These facts are taken into account during the development of programmes at the School of Health Sciences with the expressed intention of producing graduates who would be able to compete in the job market both locally and at the international level. With these principles as its foundations, the School of Health Sciences USM was established at the Health Campus in Kelantan on the 1st of November 1999. The School's main objective is to holistically expand the Health Sciences disciplines. Within the ambit of Health Sciences are included areas of specialties like Biomedicine, Dietetics, Nursing, Forensic Science, Medical Radiation, Exercise and Sports Science, Audiology, Speech Pathology, Nutrition and Environmental Health. In addition, several other potential health related subjects will also be offered in due course. Thus the establishment of the School of Health Sciences is a direct effort by USM to help fulfill the national requirement for manpower in the areas of health and paramedical disciplines which is currently experiencing a severe shortage of trained personnels. The 2012/2013 academic session is the thirteenth for the School. Since the academic session 2002/2003, eight, batches of students have graduated from various programmes. In the academic session 2007/2008, the School of Health Sciences saw another milestone with the reintroduction of Diploma in Nursing which was previously offered under the School of Medical Sciences. All programmes offered at the School of Health Sciences will be of four (4) years duration (eight semesters). At the end of the programmes, graduates will be conferred the Bachelor of Health Science (BHSc) (Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains Kesihatan) for their respective disciplines with the exception of the Forensic Science programme which will be conferred the Bachelor of Science (Forensic Science) [Ijazah Sarjana Muda Sains (Sains Forensik)] degree. Meanwhile, graduates from the Diploma in Nursing Programme will be conferred a Diploma in Nursing. 1 Philosophy The School of Health Sciences has a philosophy that values education as the driving force behind the progress and development of mankind. We are committed to producing graduates who are able to pursue their own goals and direction while contributing to the development of an industrialised and civilised Malaysia. To fulfil the above aspiration, the School provides an education that is sustainable, futures-oriented and globally focused. The School adopts a diverse and comprehensive interdisciplinary wellness-based programme for educational, scientific and human capital development. The curriculum provides the foundation for intellectual inquiry as well as a pragmatic contribution focused on the wellness of individuals and communities. As a consequence, the teachinglearning methods are focused on integrative problem-solving where students are encouraged to make group decisions that have a local emphasis with globalised consequences. Thus, the School of Health Sciences is committed to the promotion of scholarship that has a foundation in scientific thinking, and professional interdisciplinary education supported by a strong research culture. This will enable our graduates to respond to the challenges of the 21st century with a sense of social consciousness and accountability. This effort is expected to uplift the nation status towards attainment of being an advanced nation by the year 2020. Excellence is regarded as the foundation of this noble effort. Mission To achieve and maintain excellence in health sciences by: • • • Producing graduates with a high level of intellectual inquiry and professionalism. Developing graduates with a strong sense of ethics and commitment to humanity. Transforming knowledge into an instrument for sustainable development and wellness of society. Vision We are committed to be a centre of excellence in health sciences towards the wellness of society through intellectual inquiry, creativity, innovation and dissemination of knowledge. 2 2.0 ACADEMIC SYSTEM AND GENERAL INFORMATION 2.1 Course Registration Registration is an important activity during the period of study at the University. It is the first step for the students to sit for the examination at the end of each semester. Sign up for the right courses each semester will help to facilitate the graduation of each student from the first semester till the final semester. 2.1.1 Course Registration Secretariat for the Bachelor Degree and University’s Diploma Student Student Data & Records Section (SDRP) Academic Management Division Registry (Level 1, Chancellory Building) Tel. No. : 04-6532925/3169/4195 Fax No. : 04-6574641 Website : registry.usm.my/updr/ SDRP office is the secretariat / manager / coordinator of course registration for the Bachelor Degree and Diploma of the University. Further enquiries about course registration activities for the first degree and diploma can be made at any time at the office of the Student Data & Records Section. 2.1.2 Course Registration Platform i) E-Daftar (E-Registration) E-Daftar is a platform for course registration through website.The registration is done directly through Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my). Only students with active account are allowed to register for courses in the E-Daftar. Registration under E-Daftar for Semester 1 usually starts 1-2 days after the release of 'Official' examination result of the Semester 2 from the previous academic year. The system closes a day before Semester 1 begins (usually in September). E-Daftar registration for Semester 2 usually starts 1-2 days after Semester 1 ‘Provisional’ examination result is released until a day before Semester 2 begins (normally in February). The actual timing of registration under E-Daftar will be announced by the Student Data & Records Section usually during the Revision Week of every semester and will be displayed on the 3 schools/centres/hostels’ bulletin board and in the USM’s official website. Under E-Daftar, students can register any courses offered by USM, except co-curriculum courses. Registration of Cocurriculum courses is still placed under the administration of the Director of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme at the Main Campus or the Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Engineering Campus and the Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme at the Health Campus. Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students’ course registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their preregistration application successful. ii) Access to E-Daftar System a) b) c) d) e) f) g) iii) E-Daftar System can be accessed through Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my). Students need to register in this portal to be a member. Each member will be given an ID and password. Students need to use the ID and password to access to their profile page, which includes the E-Daftar menu. Students need to click at the E-Daftar menu to access and register for the relevant courses. Students are advised to print the course registration confirmation slip upon completion of the registration process or after updating the course registration list (add/drop) within the E-Daftar period. E-Daftar system can only be accessed for a certain period of time. Guidelines to register/access to E-Daftar portal are available at the Campus Online portal’s main page. Online Course Registration (OCR) OCR activities are conducted in the Schools/Centres and are applicable to students who are academically active and under Probation (P1/P2) status. Students, who face difficulties to register their courses in the E-Daftar can register their courses during the official period of OCR alternatively. Each school is responsible for scheduling this activity. Students must refer to the schedule at the notice board of their respective schools. 4 Official period for OCR normally starts on the first day of the semester (without the penalty charge of RM50.00). After this official period, the registration will be considered late. (The penalty of RM50.00 will be imposed if no reasonable excuse is given.) During the non-penalty period, OCR will be conducted at each school. After Week Six, all registration, including adding and dropping courses will be administered by the Examination & Graduation Section Office (Academic Management Division, Registry). 2.1.3 2.1.4 The Frequency of Course Registration in One Academic Session i) Normal Study Semester - 2 times per year (beginning of Semester 1 & Semester 2) ii) Long semester break (about one month after the final examination of Semester 2) - Once per year - Applicable for relevant students only General Guidelines Before Students Register for Courses i) Matters / Information / Documents Required to be noted / considered / referred by students before course registration: - ii) Refer to the respective school’s website to get updated information for courses offered or course registration. Decide courses to be registered according to the semester as stipulated in the Study Program Guide Book. List courses to be registered and number of units (unit value) for each course. Provide Cumulative Statement of Grades (Cangred). Construct Teaching and Learning Timetable for the registered courses (to avoid overlapping in timetable). Read and comprehend the reminders regarding policies/general requirements for the course registration. The number of maximum and minimum units that can be registered in every semester are stated as below: Academic Status Active P1 P2 Minimum Unit 9 9 9 5 Maximum Unit 21 12 10 - Determination for an academic status in a semester is based on the academic performance of the students in the previous semester (Grade Point Average, GPA):o GPA 2.00 & above = Active Academic Status o GPA 1.99 & below = Probation Academic Status (P1/P2) - iii) Students who meet the minimum period of residency (6 semesters for 3 years programme, 7 semesters for 3.5 years programme or 8 semesters for 4 years programme) are allowed to register courses with total units below 9. The semester in which the student is on leave is not considered for the residency period. Type of course codes during registration:T E M U = = = = Core courses Elective courses Minor courses University courses Grade and number of units obtain from these courses are considered for graduation Two (2) other course codes are:Y = Z = audit courses prerequisite courses Grade and number of units obtain from these courses are not considered for graduation iv) v) Advice and approval of the Academic Advisor. - Approval from the Academic Advisor is required for the students under Probation status before being allowed to register during the OCR period. Probation students cannot assess E-Daftar for registration. - Approval from the Academic Advisor is not required for the students under Active Status to register courses through EDaftar. Students are not allowed to register and to repeat any course that has achieved a grade 'C' and above. 6 2.1.5 Information/Document Given To All Students Through Campus Online Portal (www.campusonline.com.my) i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) 2.1.6 The information of Academic Advisor. Academic information such as academic status, GPA value, CGPA value and year of study. Cangred and Course Registration Form. List of courses offered from all schools/centres. Teaching and Learning Timetable for all schools/centres/units from the three campuses. List of pre-registered courses which have been added into the students’ course registration record (if any). Reminders about the University course registration policies/general requisites. Registration of Language and Co-Curriculum Courses a) Registration for Language courses through E-Daftar is allowed. • However, if any problem occurs, registration for language courses can still be carried out / updated during the official period of OCR at the office of the School of Language, Literacies & Translation. • All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the language courses are under the responsibility and administration of the School of Language, Literacies & Translation. • Any problems related to the registration of language courses can be made to the School of Language, Literacies & Translation. The contact details are as follow: General Office Malay Language Programme Chairperson English Language Programme Chairperson Foreign Language Programme Chairperson : 04-6534542 : 04-6533974 : 04-6533406 : 04-6533396 Engineering Campus Programme Chairperson : 04-5995407 Health Campus Programme Chairperson : 09-7671252 7 for Main Campus students b) c) 2.1.7 Registration for Co-Curriculum courses through E-Daftar is not allowed. • Registration for Co-Curriculum courses is either done through pre-registration before the semester begins or during the first/second week of the semester. Co-Curriculum courses will be included in the students’ course registration account prior to the E-Daftar activity, if their preregistration application successful. • All approval / registration / dropping / adding of the CoCurriculum courses are under the responsibility and administration of the Director of the Centre for CoCurriculum Programme for Main Campus (046535243/45/48), Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme for Engineering Campus (04-5995091), Coordinator of the Co-Curriculum Programme for Health Campus (09-7677547). Dropping of Language and Co-Curriculum courses, if necessary, must be made within the first week. After the first week, a fine of RM50.00 will be charged. Registration of ‘Audit’ Course (Y code) Registration for the ‘Audit’ course (Y code) is not allowed in the EDaftar. It can only be made during the official period of OCR in the School or Centre involved. Students who are interested must complete the course registration form which can be printed from the Campus Online Portal or obtained it directly from the School. Approval from the lecturers of the course to be audited and the Dean / Deputy Dean (Academic) [signed and stamped] in the course registration form are required. Registration on ‘Audit’ courses (Y code) is not included in the calculation of the total registered workload units. Grades obtained from ‘Audit’ course are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and total units for graduation. 2.1.8 Registration of Prerequisite Course (Z code) Registration of the Prerequisite courses (Z code) is included in the total registered workload (unit). Grades obtained from the Prerequisite courses are not considered in the calculation of CGPA and units for graduation. 8 2.1.9 Late Course Registration / Late Course Addition Late course registration or addition is not allowed after the official period of the OCR ends without any reasonable excuses. General information on this matter is as follows: i) Late course registration and addition are only allowed in the first to the third week with the approval of the Dean. Students will be fined RM50.00 if the reasons given are not reasonable. ii) Application to add a course after the third week will not be considered, except for the special cases approved by the University. 2.1.10 Dropping Courses Dropping the course is allowed until the end of the sixth week. For this purpose, students must meet the requirements set by the University as follows: i) Dropping Course Form must be completed by the student and signed by the lecturer of the course involved and the Dean / Deputy Dean of their respective schools and submit it to the general office of the School/Centre which is responsible of offering the courses involved. ii) Students who wish to drop a language course must obtain the signature and stamp of the Dean of the School of Language, Literacies and Translation, as well as the signature and stamp of the Dean of their respective schools. iii) Students who wish to drop the Co-Curriculum courses must obtain the approval of the Centre for Co-Curriculum Programme and the signature and stamp of the Dean of their respective schools. iv) The option for dropping courses cannot be misused. Lecturers have the right not to certify the course that the student wish to drop if the student is not serious, such as the record of attendance at lectures, tutorials and practical is unsatisfactory, as well as poor performance in course work. The student will be denied to sit for the examination and will be given grade 'X' and is not allowed to repeat the course during the period of Courses during the Long Vacation (KSCP). 9 2.1.11 Course Registration Confirmation Slip Course registration confirmation slip that has been printed / obtained after registering the course should be checked carefully to ensure no errors, especially the code type of the registered course codes. Any data errors for course registration must be corrected immediately whether during the period of E-Daftar (for student with active status only) or during the period of OCR at the Schools. 2.1.12 Revising and Updating Data / Information / Students Personal and Academic Records Personal and academic information for each student can be checked through the Campus Online portal (campusonline.usm.my). Students are advised to always check all the information displayed on this website. 2.1.13 - Any application/notification for correction / updating of personal data such as the spelling of names (names must be spelled as shown on the Identification Card), Identification Card number and address (permanent address and correspondence address) must be notified to the office of the Student Data & Records Section. - Any application / notification for correction of academic data such as information on Major, Minor, MUET result and the course code should be reported to the office of the Student Data & Records Section. - Application / notification for correction of the examination/results data should be reported to the office of the Examination and Graduation Section. Academic Advisor Each School will appoint an Academic Advisor for each student. Academic Advisors are comprised of academic staff (lecturers). Normally, confirmation from Academic Advisors will be made known to every student during the first semester in the first year of their studies. Academic Advisors will advice the students under their responsibility on the academic-related matters. Among the important advice for the student is the registration planning for certain courses in each semester during the study period. Before registering the course, students are advised to consult and discuss with their Academic Advisor to determine the courses to be registered in a semester. 10 Final year students are advised to consult their respective academic advisors before registering via E-Daftar to ensure they fulfil the graduation requirements. Students under the Probation status (P1/P2) should obtain the approval from the Academic Advisor before they register for courses in a semester through OCR at the School and they are not allowed to register through E-Daftar. 2.2 Interpretation of Unit/Credit a) Unit Each course is given a value, which is called a UNIT. The unit is determined by the scope of its syllabus and the workload for the students. In general, a unit is defined as follows: Type of Course Definition of Unit Theory 1 unit is equivalent to 1 contact hour per week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester. Practical/Laboratory 1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per week for 13 - 14 hours in one semester Language Proficiency 1 unit is equivalent to 1.5 contact hours per week for 13 - 14 weeks in one semester. Industrial Training/ Teaching Practice 1 unit is equivalent to 2 weeks of training. b) Contact Contact is defined as formal face-to-face meeting between an academic staff and his/her students and it may take the form of lectures, tutorials, seminar, laboratory and field work. c) Accumulated Credit Unit Units registered and passed are known as credits. To graduate, students must accumulate the total number of credits stipulated for the program concerned. 2.3 Examination System Examination would be held at the end of every semester. Students have to sit for the examination of the courses they have registered. Students are required to settle all due fees and fulfil the standing requirements for lectures/tutorials/practical and other requirements before being allowed to sit for the examination of courses they registered. Course evaluation 11 will be based on the two components of coursework and final examinations. Coursework evaluation includes tests, essays, projects, assignments and participation in tutorials. Duration of Examination Evaluated Courses Examination Duration 2 units 1 hour for coursework of more than 40% 2 units 2 hours for coursework of 40% and below 3 units or more 2 hours for coursework of more than 40% 3 units or more 3 hours for coursework of 40% and below Barring from Examination Students will be barred from sitting the final examination if they do not satisfy the course requirements, such as absence from lectures and tutorials for at least 70%, and have not completed/fulfilled the required components of coursework. Students will also be barred from sitting the final examination if they have not settled the academic fees. A grade 'X' would be awarded for a course in which a student is barred. Students will not be allowed repeating the course during Course during the Long Vacation (KSCP). Grade Point Average System Student academic achievement for registered courses will be graded as follows: Alphabetic Grade Grade Points A A- 4.00 3.67 B+ B 3.33 3.00 B- C+ C C- D+ D 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 D- F 0.67 0 Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would be given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP (See below) or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and above for a particular course will not be allowed to repeat the course whether during KSCP or normal semester. The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of students in any semester. 12 CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from one semester to another during the years of study. The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows: Grade Point Average = n ∑ Ui Mi i=1 ________ n ∑ Ui i=1 where n = Number of courses taken Ui = Course units for course i Mi = Grade point for course i Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA: Course Semester I Unit Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP ABC XX1 ABC XX2 4 4 3.00 2.33 B C+ 12.00 9.32 BCDXX3 3 1.67 C- 5.01 CDEXX4 4 2.00 C 8.00 EFGXX5 3 1.33 D+ 3.99 EFGXX6 2 20 2.67 B- 5.34 43.66 GPA = 43.66 = 2.18 20 Course Semester II ABCXX7 Unit 3 Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP 1.00 D 3.00 ABBXX8 4 2.33 C+ 9.32 BBCXX9 4 2.00 C 8.00 BCBX10 YZXX1 4 3 18 2.67 3.33 BB+ 10.68 9.99 40.99 GPA = 40.99 = 2.28 18 CGPA = Total Accumulated GP 43.66 + 40.99 84.65 Total Accumulated Unit = 20 + 18 = 38 = 2.23 13 From the above examples, the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point accumulated for all the registered courses and divided by the total number of the registered units. Courses During the Long Vacation (Kursus Semasa Cuti Panjang) (KSCP) KSCP is offered to students who have taken a course earlier and obtained a grade of 'C-', 'D+', 'D', 'D-', 'F' and 'DK' only. Students who have obtained 'X' or 'F*' grade are not allowed to take the course during KSCP. The purpose of KSCP is to: i) Give an opportunity to students who are facing time constraints for graduation. ii) Assist students who need to accumulate a few more credits for graduation. iii) Assist "probationary" students to enhance their academic status. iv) Assist students who need to repeat a prerequisite course, which is not offered in the following semester. However, this opportunity is only given to students who are taking courses that they have attempted before and achieved a grade as stipulated above, provided that the course is being offered. Priority is given to the final year students. Usually, formal lectures are not held, and teaching is via tutorials. The duration of KSCP is 3 weeks, i.e. 2 weeks of tutorial and 1 week of examination, all held during the long vacation. The KSCP schedule is available in the University's Academic Calendar. The Implementation KSCP a) Students are allowed to register a maximum of 3 courses and the total number of units registered must not exceed 10. b) Marks/grades for coursework are taken from the highest marks/the best grades obtained in a particular course in the normal semester before KSCP. The final overall grade is determined as follows: Final Grade = The best coursework marks or grade + Marks or grade for KSCP examination 14 c) GPA calculation involves the LATEST grades (obtained in KSCP) and also involves courses taken in the second semester and those repeated in KSCP. If the GPA during KSCP as calculated above is 2.00 or better, the academic status will be active, even though the academic status for the second semester was on probation status. However, if the GPA for KSCP (as calculated above) is 1.99 or below, the academic status will remain as probation status for the second semester. d) Graduating students (those who have fulfilled the graduation requirements) in the second semester are not allowed to register for KSCP. Academic Status Active Status: Any student who achieves a GPA of 2.00 and above for any examination in a semester will be recognised as ACTIVE and be allowed to pursue his/her studies for the following semester. Probation Status: A probation status is given to any student who achieves a GPA of 1.99 and below. A student who is under probation status for three consecutive semesters (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to pursue his/her studies at the university. On the other hand, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student concerned will be allowed to pursue his/her studies and will be maintained at P2 status. Without any prejudice to the above regulations, the University Examination Council has the absolute right to terminate any student's studies if his/her academic achievement do not satisfy and fulfil the accumulated minimum credit in line with the number of semesters completed by the student as given in the table below. Total Accumulated Minimum Credit Units Number of Semesters Pure Applied Professional nd 15 15 16 th End of 4 semester 35 35 38 th End of 6 semester 55 55 60 th 75 75 80 End of 2 semester End of 8 semester The University Examination Council has the right to terminate any student's studies due to certain reasons (a student who has not registered for the courses, has not attended examination without valid reasons), as well as medical reasons can be disqualified from pursuing his/her studies. 15 Examination Result A provisional result (pass/fail) through the Tele-academic line: (60083-7899), Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will usually be released and announced after the School Examination Council meeting and presumably one month after final examination. Full result (grade) can be enquired through the Tele-academic line: (600-83-7899), Campus Online Portal and short message service (SMS) will be released and announced after the University Examination Council meeting and is usually two weeks after the provisional results are released. The official semester results (SEMGRED) will be issued to students during the second week of the following semester. 2.4 Unit Exemption/Credit Transfer Definition of Unit Exemption Unit exemption is defined as the total number of units given to students who are pursuing their studies in USM that are exempted from the graduation requirements. Students only need to accumulate the remaining units for graduating purpose. Only passes or course grades accumulated or acquired in USM will be included in the calculation of the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) for graduation purpose. Regulations and Implementation of Unit Exemption a) Diploma holders from recognised Public and Private Institutions of Higher Learning: i) Unit exemption can only be given to courses taken at diploma level. ii) Courses for unit exemption may be combined (in two or more combinations) in order to obtain exemption of one course at degree level. However if the School would like to approve only one course at the diploma level for unit exemption of one course at degree level, the course at diploma level must be equivalent to the degree course and has the same or more units. iii) Courses taken during employment (in service) for diploma holders cannot be considered for unit exemption. 16 iv) The minimum achievement at diploma level that can be considered for unit exemption is at least 'C' grade or 2.0 or equivalent. v) The total number of semesters exempted should not exceed two semesters. vi) In order to obtain unit exemption for industrial training, a student must have work experience continuously for at least two years in the area. If the student has undergone industrial training during the diploma level study, a student must have work experience for at least one year. The students are also required to produce the report on the level and type of work performed. Industrial training unit exemption cannot be considered for semester exemption as the industrial training is carried out during the long vacation in USM. vii) Unit exemption for university and option courses can only be given for courses such as Bahasa Malaysia (LKM400), English Language, Islamic and Asian Civilisations and as well as co-curriculum. b) IPTS (Private Institution of Higher Supervised/External Diploma Graduates i) c) Learning) USM Students who are IPTS USM supervised/external diploma graduates are given unit exemption as stipulated by the specific programme of study. Normally, unit exemption in this category is given as a block according to the agreement between USM (through School that offers the programme) with the IPTS. Students from recognised local or foreign IPTA (Public Institution of Higher Learning)/IPTS who are studying at the Bachelor Degree level may apply to study in this university and if successful, can be considered for unit exemptions subject to the following conditions: i) Courses taken in the previous IPT are equivalent (at least 50% of the course must be the same) with courses offered in USM. ii) Students taking courses at advanced diploma level in IPT that is recognised to be equivalent to the Bachelor Degree course at USM may be considered for unit exemption as in c) i). 17 iii) The total maximum unit exemption allowed should not exceed one third of the total unit requirement for graduation. Total Number of Exempted Semesters Semester exemption is based on the total unit exempted as below:Total Unit Exempted <9 9-32 >32 Total Semester Exempted 1 2 Application Procedure for Unit Exemption Any student who would like to apply for exemption unit is required to complete the Unit Exemption Form which can be obtained at the counter of Admission and Enrolments Unit or the respective schools. The form must to be approved by the Dean/Deputy Dean of the School prior to the submission to the Admission and Enrolments Unit for consideration. Definition of Credit Transfer Credit transfer is defined as the recognition of a total number of credits obtained by USM students taking courses in other IPTA (Public Institution of Higher Learning) within the period of study at USM, and is combined with credits obtained at USM to fulfil units requirement for his/her programme of study. The transferred examination result or grades obtained in courses taken at other IPTA will be combined in the Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) calculation. Category of Students Who Can Be Considered for Credit Transfer USM full-time Bachelor Degree level students who would like to attend specific Bachelor Degree level courses at other IPTA. USM full-time diploma level students who would like to attend specific diploma level courses at other IPTA. 18 Conditions a) Basic and Core Courses i) Credit transfer can only be considered for credits obtained from other courses in other IPTA that are equivalent (at least 50% of the content are the same) with the courses offered by the programme. ii) Courses that can be transferred are only courses that have the same number of units or more. For equivalent courses but with less number of units, credit transfers can be approved by combining a few courses. Credits transferred are the same as the course units as offered in USM. Average grade of the combined course will be taken into account in CGPA calculation. b) Elective or Option Courses i) Students may attend any appropriate courses in other IPTA subject to permission from the School as well as the approval of other IPTA. ii) The transferred credits are credits obtained from courses at other IPTA. No course equivalence condition is required. c) Minor Courses i) For credit transfer of minor courses, the School should adhere to either conditions (a) or (b), and take into account of the programme requirement. d) The total maximum units transferred should not exceed one third of the total number of units for the programme. e) Credit exemption from other IPTA can be considered only once for each IPTA. f) The examination results obtained by a student taken at other IPTA will be taken into account for graduation purpose. Grade obtained for each course will be combined with the grades obtained at USM for CGPA calculation. g) Students who have applied and approved for credit transfer are not allowed to cancel the approval after the examination result is obtained. 19 h) Students are required to register courses at other IPTA with not less than the total minimum units as well as not exceeding the maximum units as stipulated in their programme of study. However, for specific cases (e.g. students on extended semester and only require a few units for graduation), the Dean may approve such students to register less than the minimum and the semester will not be counted in the residential requirement. In this case, the CGPA calculation will be carried out as in KSCP. i) USM students attending courses at other IPTA and if failed in any courses are allowed to resit the examination if there is such provision in that IPTA. j) If the method of calculation of examination marks in the other IPTA is not the same as in USM, a grade conversion method will be carried out according to the existing scales. k) USM students who have registered courses at other IPTA and decided to return to study in USM, must adhere to the existing course registration conditions in USM. Application Procedure for Attending Courses/Credit Transfer USM students who would like to attend courses/credit transfer at other IPTAs should apply using Unit Exemption Form. The application form should be submitted for the Dean's approval for the programme of study within three months before the application is submitted to other IPTA for consideration. 2.5 Academic Integrity "Integrity without knowledge is weak and useless. Knowledge without integrity is dangerous and weak" – Samuel Johnson Being a student of the University Sains Malaysia requires a firm adherence to the basic values, integrity, purpose and meaning of a university education. The most essential values in academia are rooted on the principles of truth seeking in knowledge and honesty with regards to the intellectual property of oneself and of others. Thus, students must bear the responsibility of maintaining these principles in all work done in their academic endeavour. 20 Academic dishonesty violates the fundamental purpose of preserving and maintaining the integrity of university education and will not be tolerated. The following, although not exhaustive, are examples of practices or actions that are considered dishonest acts in academic pursuit. (a) Cheating Cheating is the unauthorised use of information or other aids in any academic exercise. There are numerous "infamous" ways and methods of cheating including: • • • • • • • Copying from others during a test or an exam. Using unauthorised materials or devices (calculator, PDA, mobile phone, pager, etc.) during a test or an exam. Asking or allowing another student to take a test or an exam for you and vice-versa. Sharing answers or programmes for an assignment or project. Tampering with marked/graded work after it has been returned, then resubmitting it for remarking/regrading. Allowing others to do the research, writing, programming, or other types of assignment. Submitting identical or similar work in more than one course without consulting or prior permission from the lecturers involved. Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding conduct during examination (Part II, Provision 8): Conduct during examination 8. No student can(a) take any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials, other than those authorised by the examiner, into or out of any examination room, or receive any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials from outsiders when in examination room. Students can receive any form of books, worksheets, documents, pictures or any other materials recommended by the examiner or the Board of Examiners, and authorized by the Vice-Chancellor (b) write, or have somebody else to write, any information or to draw diagrams which can be related to the examination taken by the student, on any parts of the body, or on the clothing’s worn by the student. (c) contact with other students during an examination through any form of communication, or (d) cheat or try to cheat or act in any way that can be interpreted as cheating. 21 (b) Plagiarism Plagiarism is "academic theft". It violates the intellectual property rights of the author. Simply put, it is the use, in part or whole, of other's words or ideas and claiming it as yours without proper attribution to the original author. It includes: • • • • • • Copying and pasting information, graphics or media from the Internet into your work without citing the source. Paraphrasing or summarising other's written or spoken words that are not common knowledge, without referencing the source. Not putting quote marks around parts of the source that you copy exactly. Using someone else's work or acquiring papers, assignment, project or research you did not do and turning it in as if you had done the work yourself. Giving incorrect information about the source of reference. Not acknowledging collaborators in an assignment, paper, project or research. Plagiarism is, however, often misunderstood. There are numerous sources in the Internet that describe plagiarism and explain acceptable ways for using borrowed words. Students should explore the relevant materials. 22 Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding prohibition against plagiarism (Part II, Provision 6): Prohibitions against plagiarism 6. (1) A student shall not plagiarise any idea, writing, data or invention belonging to another person. (2) For the purpose of this rule, plagiarism includes: (a) the act of taking an idea, writing, data or invention of another person and claiming that the idea, writing, data or invention is the result of one's own findings or creation; or (b) an attempt to make out or the act of making out, in such a way, that one is the original source or the creator of an idea, writing, data or invention which has actually been taken from some other source. (3) Without prejudice to the generality of sub rule (2), a student plagiarises when he/she: (a) publishes, with himself/herself as the author, an abstract, article, scientific or academic paper, or book which is wholly or partly written by some other person; (b) incorporates himself/herself or allows himself/herself to be incorporated as a co-author of an abstract, article, scientific or academic paper, or book, when he/she has not at all made any written contribution to the abstract, article, scientific or academic paper, or book; (c) forces another person to include his/her name in the list of coresearchers for a particular research project or in the list of co-authors for a publication when he/she has not made any contribution which may qualify him/her as a co-researcher or co-author; (d) extract academic data which are the result of research undertaken by some other person, such as laboratory findings or field work findings or data obtained through library research, whether published or unpublished, and incorporate those data as part of his/her academic research without giving due acknowledgement to the actual source; (e) uses research data obtained through collaborative work with some other person, whether or not that other person is a staff member or a student of the University, as part of another distinct personal academic research of his/her, or for a publication In his/her own name as sole author, without obtaining the consent of his/her co-researchers prior to embarking on his/her personal research or prior to publishing the data; 23 (f) transcribes the ideas or creations of others kept in whatever form, whether written, printed or available in electronic form, or in slide form, or in whatever form of teaching or research apparatus, or in any other form, and claims whether directly or indirectly that he/she is the creator of that idea or creation; (g) translates the writing or creation of another person from one language to another whether or not wholly or partly, and subsequently presents the translation in whatever form or manner as his/her own writing or creation; or (h) extracts ideas from another person's writing or creation and makes certain modifications without due reference to the original source and rearranges them in such a way that it appears as if he/she is the creator of those ideas. (c) Fabrication Unauthorised invention, alteration, falsification or misleading use of data, information or citation in any academic work constitutes fabrication. Fabricated information neither represent the student's own effort nor the truth concerning a particular investigation or study thus violates the principle of truth seeking in knowledge. Some examples are: • • • • • (d) Making up or changing of data or result, or using someone else's result, in an experiment, assignment or research. Citing sources that are not actually used or referred to. Intentional listing of incorrect or fictitious references. Falsifying of academic records or documents to gain academic advantage. Forging signatures of authorisation in any academic record or other university document. Collusion The School does not differentiate between those who commit an act of academic dishonesty with those who knowingly allow or help others in performing those acts. Some examples of collusion include: • • • • Paying, bribing or allowing someone to do an assignment, test/exam, project or research for you. Doing or assisting others in an assignment, test/exam, project or research for something in return. Permitting your work to be submitted as the work of others. Providing material, information, or sources to others knowing that such aids could be used in any dishonest act. 24 (e) Unfair Advantage A student may obtain an unfair advantage over another, which is also a breach of academic integrity, in several ways including: • • • • (f) Gaining access to, stealing, reproducing or circulating of test or exam material prior to its authorised time. Depriving others of the use of library material by stealing, defacing, destroying or hiding it. Intentionally interfering with other's effort to do their academic work. Altering or destroying work or computer files/programmes that belong to others or those that are meant for the whole class. Consequences of Violating Academic Integrity Both students and academic staff must assume the responsibility of protecting and upholding the academic integrity of the university. In the event that a student encounters any incident that denotes academic dishonesty, the student is expected to report it to the relevant lecturer. The lecturer is then responsible to substantiate the violation and is encouraged to confront the perpetrator(s) to discuss the facts surrounding the allegation, and report the matter to the Deputy Deans or the Dean of the School. If the lecturer found that the student is guilty, an appropriate punitive grading may be applied, depending on the extent of the violation. Examples of punitive grading are giving lower grade or "F" on the assignment, test, project, or lower grade or "F" for the whole course. If the violation is deemed serious by the lecturer, the matter will be brought to the attention of the University Disciplinary Authority where appropriate action will be taken. If a student is caught in an examination, the University Examination Board will pursue the matter according to the university's procedure. The consequence then may range from a warning, fine not exceeding RM200, exclusion from any specific part or parts of the University for a specified period, suspension from being a student of the University for a specified period, or expulsion from the University (University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999). 25 Below is an excerpt from the University and University College Act 1971, Universiti Sains Malaysia, Discipline of Students, Rule 1999 regarding Disciplinary Punishment (Part II, Provision 48): Disciplinary punishment 48. 2.6 A student who commits a disciplinary offense under these Rules and found guilty of the offense can be punished according to any one or any two or more of the following appropriate actions; (a) warning; (b) fine not more than two hundred ringgit; (c) banned from entering any or certain premises of the University for a specified period; (d) suspended from being a student of the University for a specified period; (e) dismissed from the University USM Mentor Programme Mentor Programme acts as a support-aid that involves the staff undergoing special training as a consultant and guide to USM community who would like to share their feelings and any psychosocial aspects that could harm their social functions. This programme manages psychosocial issues in a more effective manner and finally could improve the well-being of individuals in order to achieve life of better quality. Objectives (a) (b) (c) (d) As a co-operation and mutual assistance mechanism for dealing with stress, psychosocial problems and many more in order to reinforce the well-being of the USM community. To inculcate the spirit of unity and the concept of helping one another by appointing a well-trained mentor as a social agent who promotes caring society for USM To produce more volunteers to assist those who need help To prevent damages in any psychosocial aspects before they reach a critical stage. For more information, please visit www.usm.my/mentor 26 2.7 Student Exchange Programme (a) Study Abroad Scheme The student exchange programme is an opportunity for USM students to study one or two semesters abroad at any USM partners institutions. Ideally, students are encouraged to participate in the exchange programme within their third to fifth semester (3 years degree programme) and within third to seventh semester (4 years degree programme). Studies abroad are planned beforehand with the Dean or Deputy Dean of the respective School, and with the International Office. Credits earned at an associate university are transferable as a part of credit accumulation for graduation. (b) Student Exchange Programme between Local Higher Education Institutions (RPPIPT) This is a programme that allows students of public higher learning institutions to do an exchange programme for a semester between the public higher institutions itself. Students can choose any relevant courses and apply for credit transfers. For more information, please visit http://www.usm.my/io or contact the Academic Collaboration Unit, International Office at +604-653 2775/2778. 2.8 Graduation Requirements In order to graduate, students must fulfil both the minimum residence and the academic requirement such as: (a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e total credits and the required number of credits for each component in the programme [Core, Elective, University and Optional (if appropriate) courses]. (b) Obtain a minimum grade points of 2.00 and above for all Core courses. (c) Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme. (d) Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point 2.00 for the language courses (Bahasa Malaysia and English), Ethnics Relation and the TITAS courses. 27 3.0 UNIVERSITY REQUIREMENTS 3.1 Summary of University Requirements Students are required to take 15 - 22 units of the following University/Option courses for University requirements: University Requirements Unit 1 Bahasa Malaysia 2 2 English Language 4 3 Local Students • Islamic and Asian Civilisations (TITAS) (2 Units) • Ethnic Relations (2 Units) • Core Entrepreneurship* (2 Units) 6 International Students • Malaysian Studies (4 Units) • Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units) Third Language/Co-Curriculum /Skill Course/Options 4 Students have to choose one of the followings: • Third Language Package • Co-Curriculum** (1-6 units) • Skill Course/Options Total 3 - 10 15 - 22 * Students from Schools which have a similar course as this are exempted from following this course. The units should be replaced by an option course. ** Students from the School of Education are required to choose a uniformed body co-curriculum package. Students from the School of Medical Sciences and School of Dentistry are required to register two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in year Two. Students from the School of Health Sciences are required to register one (1) unit of Co-Curriculum course. Details of the University requirements are given in the following sections. 28 3.2 Bahasa Malaysia (a) Local Students The requirements are as follows: • LKM400/2 - Bahasa Malaysia IV All Malaysian students must take LKM400 and pass with the minimum of grade C in order to graduate. Entry requirements for Bahasa Malaysia are as follows: No Qualification Grade Level of Type Units Status Entry 1. (a) SPM/MCE/SC 2 Graduation 1 - 6 LKM400 U (or equivalent qualification) requirement P/S (b) STPM/HSC (or equivalent qualification) Note: To obtain credit units for Bahasa Malaysia courses, a minimum grade of C is required. Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation if they have different Bahasa Malaysia qualification from the above. (b) International Students • International students pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in Science, Accounting, Arts (ELLS), Education (TESL) and Housing, Building and Planning. All international students in this category are required to take the following courses: Code LKM100 • Type U Units 2 International students (non-Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in Arts. 29 International students in this category are required to take and pass three Intensive Malay Language courses before they commence their Bachelor’s degree programmes. Code LKM101 Course Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan I Duration 4 months LKM102 LKM201 Bahasa Malaysia Persediaan II Bahasa Malaysia Pertengahan 4 months 4 months The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as follows: Code LKM300 • Type U Units 2 International students (Indonesian) pursuing Bachelor’s degrees in Arts. The Bahasa Malaysia graduation requirement for this category of students is as follows: Code LKM200 LKM300 Type U U Units 2 2 Note: Students must pass with a minimum grade of C for type U courses. 30 3.3 English Language All Bachelor’s degree students must take 4 units of English Language courses in fulfillment of the University requirement for graduation. (e) Entry Requirements for English Language Courses No English Language Qualification Grade Level of Entry Status 1. *MUET LSP401/402/403/404 †Discretion of Dean Band 6 A-C LHP Compulsory/ 451/452/453/ Option/Type U (2 Units) 454/455/456/ 457/458/459 2. *MUET LSP300 †Discretion of Dean Band 5 A-C LSP 401/402/403/ 404 Compulsory/ Type U (2 Units) 3. *MUET LMT100 †Discretion of Dean Band 4 A-C LSP300 Compulsory/ Type U (2 Units) 4. *MUET †Discretion of Dean Band 3/2/1 (Score 0 - 179) LMT100/ Re-sit MUET Pre-requisite/ Type Z (2 Units) * MUET: Malaysia University English Test. † Students may obtain advice from the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation if they have different English Language qualification from the above. Note: • • • • Students are required to accumulate four (4) units of English for graduation. In order to obtain units in English Language courses, students have to pass with a minimum grade of C. Students with a Score 260 - 300 (Band 6) in MUET must accumulate the 4 units of English from the courses in the postadvanced level (LHP451/452/453/454/455/456/457/ 458/459*). They can also take foreign language courses to replace their English language units but they must first obtain a written consent from the Dean of the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation. (Please use the form that can be obtained from the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation.) [*The number of units for LHP457 is 4 and for LHP451, 452, 453, 454, 455, 456, 458 and 459 is 2.] Students with a score of 179 and below in MUET are required to resit MUET to improve their score to Band 4 or take LMT100 and pass with a minimum grade of C. 31 (b) English Language Courses (Compulsory English Language Units) The English Language courses offered as University courses are as follows: No Code/Unit Course Title School (If Applicable) 1. LMT100/2 Preparatory English Students from all Schools 2. LSP300/2 Academic English Students from all Schools 3. LSP401/2 General English Students from: School of Education Studies (Arts) School of Fine Arts School of Humanities School of Social Sciences 4. LSP402/2 Scientific and Medical English Students from: School of Biological Sciences School of Physics School of Chemical Sciences School of Mathematical Sciences School of Industrial Technology School of Education Studies (Science) School of Medical Sciences School of Health & Dental Sciences School of Pharmaceutical Sciences 5. LSP403/2 Business and Communication English Students from: School of Management School of Communication 6. LSP404/2 Technical and Engineering English Students from: School of Computer Sciences School of Housing, Building and Planning Schools of Engineering 7. LDN 101/2 English For Nursing I Students from School of Health Sciences 8. LDN 201/2 English For Nursing II 32 Students from School of Health Sciences 3.4 Local Students - Islamic and Relations/Core Entrepreneurship Asian Civilisations/Ethnic (a) Islamic and Asian Civilisations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia) The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C): HTU 223 - Islamic and Asian Civilisation (TITAS) (2 units) This course aims to increase students’ knowledge on history, principles, values, main aspect of Malay civilization, Islamic civilization and its culture. With the academic exposure to cultural issues and civilization in Malaysia, it is hoped that students will be more aware of issues that can contribute to the cultivation of the culture of respect and harmony among the plural society of Malaysia. Among the topics in this course are Interaction among Various Civilization, Islamic Civilization, Malay Civilization, Contemporary Challenges faced by the Islamic and Asian Civilization and Islamic Hadhari Principles. (b) Ethnic Relations (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia) The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C): SHE 101 - Ethnic Relations (2 units) This course is an introduction to ethnic relations in Malaysia. This course is designed with 3 main objectives: (1) to introduce students to the basic concept and the practices of social accord in Malaysia, (2) to reinforce basic understanding of challenges and problems in a multi-ethnic society, and (3) to provide an understanding and awareness in managing the complexity of ethnic relations in Malaysia. At the end of this course, it is hoped that students will be able to identify and apply the skills to issues associated with ethnic relations in Malaysia. (c) Core Entrepreneurship (The course is conducted in Bahasa Malaysia) The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C): WUS 101 - Core Entrepreneurship (2 units) 33 This course aims to provide basic exposure to students in the field of entrepreneurship and business, with emphasis on the implementation of the learning aspects while experiencing the process of executing business projects in campus. The mode of teaching is through interactive lectures, practical, business plan proposal, execution of entrepreneurial projects and report presentations. Practical experiences through hands-on participation of students in business projects management will generate interest and provide a clearer picture of entrepreneurship world. The main learning outcome is the assimilation of culture and entrepreneurship work ethics in their everyday life. This initiative is made to open the minds and arouse the spirit of entrepreneurship among target groups that possess the potentials to become successful entrepreneurs. By exposing entrepreneurial knowledge to all students, it is hoped that it will accelerate the effort to increase the number of middle class entrepreneurs in the country. For more information, please refer to the Co-curriculum Program Reference Book. 3.5 International Students - Malaysian Studies/Option (a) Malaysian Studies The following course is compulsory to pass (with a minimum grade of C) for all international students: SEA205E - Malaysian Studies (4 Units) This course investigates the structure of the Malaysian system of government and the major trends in contemporary Malaysia. Emphasis will be given both to current issues in Malaysian politics and the historical and economic developments and trends of the country. The discussion begins with a review of the independence process. An analysis of the formation and workings of the major institutions of government – parliament, judiciary, bureaucracy, and the electoral and party systems will follow this. The scope and extent of Malaysian democracy will be considered, especially in light of current changes and developments in Malaysian politics. The second part of the course focuses on specific issues: ethnic relations, national unity and the national ideology; development and political change; federal-state relations; the role of religion in Malaysian politics; politics and business; Malaysia in the modern world system; civil society; law, justice and order; and directions for the future. 34 (b) Option/Bahasa Malaysia/English Language (2 Units) International students need to fulfill a further 2 units of option course or additional Bahasa Malaysia/English Language course. 3.6 Third Language/Co-Curriculum/Skill Courses/Options Students have to choose one of the followings (A/B/C): (A) Third Language Package (6 Units) Third Language Courses are offered as University courses. They are offered as a package of three (3) levels, 2 units per level. The total number of units per package is 6. Students are requested to complete all levels (3 semesters). The packages offered are as follows: Commn. Arabic Commn. Chinese Commn. Japanese Commn. German Commn. Korean LTA100/2 LTC100/2 LTJ100/2 LTG100/2 LTK100/2 LTA200/2 LTC200/2 LTJ200/2 LTG200/2 LTK200/2 LTA300/2 LTC300/2 LTJ300/2 LTG300/2 LTK300/2 Commn. French Commn. Spanish Commn. Tamil Commn. Thai LTP100/2 LTE100/2 LTT100/2 LTS100/2 LTP200/2 LTE200/2 LTT200/2 LTS200/2 LTP300/2 LTE300/2 LTT300/2 LTS300/2 (B) Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (4 - 6 Units) Students who choose to take packaged co-curriculum courses are required to complete all levels of the package. It is compulsory for students from the School of Education to choose a uniformed body cocurriculum package from the list below (excluding Seni Silat Cekak). The co-curriculum packages offered are as follows: • Armed Uniformed/Seni Silat Cekak Co-Curriculum Package (6 Units) (3 years) 35 PALAPES PALAPES PALAPES SUKSIS Tentera Darat Tentera Laut Tentera Udara (Student Police (Army) (Navy) (Air Force) Volunteer) Seni Silat Cekak WTD102/2 WTL102/2 WTU102/2 WPD101/2 WCC123/2 WTD202/2 WTL202/2 WTU202/2 WPD201/2 WCC223/2 WTD302/2 WTL302/2 WTU302/2 WPD301/2 WCC323/2 • Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (4 Units) (2 Years) Kelana Siswa (Rover Training) Bulan Sabit Merah (Red Crescent) Ambulans St. John (St. John Ambulance) WLK101/2 WBM101/2 WJA101/2 WLK201/2 WBM201/2 WJA201/2 • Unarmed Uniformed Co-Curriculum Package (2 Units) (1 Year) SISPA (Siswa Siswi Pertahanan Awam) (Public Defense) (offered in Health Campus only) WLK101/2 WLK201/2 (C) Co-Curriculum/Skill Course/Options (1 – 6 Units) All students are encouraged to follow the co-curriculum courses and are given a maximum total of 6 units for Community Service, Culture, Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and Leadership (Students from the School of Medical Sciences and School of Dentistry are required to register for two (2) units of Co-Curriculum course in Year Two). (Students from the School of Health Sciences must take at least one of the co-curriculum courses while those from the School of Education must take the uniformed co-curriculum package [excluding Seni Silat Cekak]). Students who do not enroll for any co-curriculum courses or who enroll for only a portion of the 3 units need to replace these units with skill/option courses. The co-curriculum, skill and option courses offered are as follows: (i) Community Service, Culture, Sports, Innovation & Initiatives and Leadership Co-Curriculum Courses 36 Packaged (Students are required to complete all levels) Khidmat Masyarakat (Community Service) (2 Years) Jazz Band (3 Years) Karate (3 Semesters) Taekwondo (3 Semesters) WKM101/1 WCC108/1 WSC108/1 WSC115/1 WKM201/1 WCC208/1 WSC208/1 WSC215/1 WCC308/1 WSC308/1 WSC315/1 Non-Packaged (1 Semester) Culture Sports WCC103/1 - Catan (Painting) WSC105/1 - Bola Tampar (Volley Ball) WCC105/1 - Gamelan WSC106/1 - Golf WCC107/1 - Guitar WSC110/1 - Memanah (Archery) WCC109/1 - Koir (Choir) WSC111/1 - Ping Pong (Table Tennis) WCC110/1 - Kraftangan (Handcrafting) WSC112/1 - Renang (Swimming) WCC115/1 - Tarian Moden (Modern WSC113/1 - Aerobik (Aerobic) Dance) WCC116/1 - Tarian Tradisional WSC114/1 - Skuasy (Squash) (Traditional Dance) WCC117/1 - Teater Moden (Modern WSC116/1 - Tenis (Tennis) Theatre) WCC118/1 - Wayang Kulit Melayu WSC119/1 - Badminton (Malay Shadow Play) WCC119/1 - Senaman Qigong Asas (Basic WSC122/1 - Selaman SCUBA (SCUBA Qigong Exercise) Diving) WCC219 - Senaman Qigong Pertengahan WSC123/1 - Kriket (Cricket) (Intermediate Qigong Exercise) WCC124/1 - Kompang Berlagu WCC124/1 - Sepak Takraw WCC122/1 - Seni Memasak (Culinary Art) WSC 125/1 - Futsal WCC127/1 - Kesenian Muzik Nasyid WSC 126/1 - Bola Jaring (Netball) (Nasyid Musical Art) Innovation & Initiative Leadership (Kepimpinan) WCC120/1 - Canting Batik (Batik Painting) WSC 127/1 - Pengurusan Acara 1 (Event Management 1) WCC121/1 - Seni Khat (Calligraphic Art) WSC 227/1 - Pengurusan Acara 2 (Event Management 2) WCC125/1 - Seni Wau Tradisional (Traditional Kite Art) WCC128 - Seni Sulaman & Manik Labuci (Embroidery & Beads Sequins Art) WCC 130 - Seni Fotografi SLR Digital (Digital SLR Photography Art) 37 (ii) HTV201/2 - Teknik Berfikir (Thinking Techniques) (iii) Other option/skill courses as recommended or required by the respective school (if any) (iv) English Language Courses The following courses may be taken as university courses to fulfill the compulsory English Language requirements (for Band 5 and Band 6 in MUET) or as skill/option courses: No 1. Code/Unit LHP451/2 Course Title Effective Reading 2. LHP452/2 Business Writing 3. LHP453/2 Creative Writing 4. LHP454/2 Academic Writing 5. LHP455/2 English Pronunciation Skills 6. LHP456/2 Spoken English 7. LHP457/4 Speech Writing and Public Speaking 8. LHP458/2 English for Translation (Offered only in Semester II) 9. LHP459/2 English for Interpretation (Offered only in Semester I) 38 (v) Foreign Language Courses The foreign language courses offered by the School of Languages, Literacies and Translation can be taken by students as option or compulsory courses to fulfill the number of units required for graduation. Students are not allowed to register for more than one foreign language course per semester. They must complete at least two levels of a foreign language course before they are allowed to register for another foreign language course. However, students are not required to complete all four levels of one particular foreign language course. The foreign language courses offered are as follows: Arabic LAA100/2 LAA200/2 LAA300/2 LAA400/2 French LAP100/2 LAP200/2 LAP300/2 LAP400/2 Chinese LAC100/2 LAC200/2 LAC300/2 LAC400/2 Japanese LAJ100/2 LAJ200/2 LAJ300/2 LAJ400/2 Thai LAS100/2 LAS200/2 LAS300/2 LAS400/2 39 German LAG100/2 LAG200/2 LAG300/2 LAG400/2 Tamil LAT100/2 LAT200/2 LAT300/2 Spanish LAE100/2 LAE200/2 LAE300/2 LAE400/2 Korean LAK100/2 LAK200/2 LAK300/2 3.7 Foundation Courses Foundation courses are compulsory for all students pursuing the health science bachelor degrees in School of Health Sciences. These courses cover the basic knowledge and skills essential for various health related disciplines and are intended to prepare the students to undertake more advance courses later on. The total number of units required for graduation varies according to the respective programmes. Generally, each student is required to take between 16-25 units. Below is the summary of the Foundation Courses: No. Course Code Course Title 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU201/2 GTU301/3 8. 9. GTU302/3 GTU303/2 Structure and Function of Human I Biochemistry and Basic Genetic Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Human II Psychology and Behavioural Science Health and Society Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Biostatistics Research Methodology 3.8 Course Offered Year Semester 1 I 1 I 1 I & II 1 II 1 I & II 2 I & II 3 I & II 3 3 I & II I & II Core Courses These courses form the major component of the programme of studies and reflect the specialisation and expertise of each programme. Please refer to the list of core courses of the respective programme. 3.9 Electives Courses The purpose of offering elective courses is to ensure that students are presented with knowledge which not only complement the core courses but also will enhance and broaden their foundation of knowledge. The school encourages students to freely select any of the courses offered. All students of the school of Health Sciences are required to register a total of 8-20 units of elective courses. The units from electives courses will contribute to the total number of units for graduation. 40 Students are reminded to ONLY select courses indicated by the school and to avoid selecting courses from own programme or any programmes unless permitted and approved by the School Board. Students are strongly encouraged to select electives courses offered within their respective academic year level. They may choose courses from one level lower or higher than their academic year, though this practice should be guided closely by academic advisor. The Elective Courses offered by School of Health Sciences are as listed below. Courses offered as Elective Courses Course Code GEG103/3 Semester 1 Title of Course Semester II Title of Course Unit GTX 101/2 Science of Medical Radiation 2 GEG109/2 GEG204/3 2 3 2 GEG203/2 Health Economics 2 GEG213/3 History of Health Sciences Gender Perspectives in Health Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations Stress Management 3 GEG204/3 2 GEG302/3 Violence & Society 3 GTS207/3 GEG308/2 2 GEG209/2 3 1 2 GEG213/3 GEG214/2 GEG303/2 Stress Management Health and Personality Tissue Banking 3 2 2 2 GEG304/2 2 2 GEG305/2 GEG309/2 LAJ100/2 Japanese Language I 2 GEG310/2 LAA200/2 LAJ200/2 Arabic Language II Japanese Language II 2 2 GEG311/2 GTB107/3 GTJ108/2 Communication & Self Development Forensic Sciences Principles of Forensic Dentistry Principle of Laboratory Animal Sciences Botany and Health Epidemiology Health Communication & Education Arabic Language I Japanese Language I Arabic Language II Japanese Language II 2 GTB404/3 LAA100/2 Tropical Natural Resource Management Basic Chemistry Basic Immunology Communication & Self Development Principles of Health Management Toxicology Arabic Language I Gender Perspectives in Health Principle of Individual and Team Sports Aquatic Ecosystems GTF101/3 GTB203/1 GEG304/2 GTJ317/2 3 Course Code GEG109/2 History of Health Sciences GTX 103/2 Physics of Medical Radiation GEG114/2 Oral Health GEG201/2 Women’s Health GEG208/2 Fitness and Health Unit LAA100/2 LAJ100/2 LAA200/2 LAJ200/2 * GEGxxx/x= Courses are offered only as Elective Course and is subjected to changes. 41 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3.10 PROGRAMME 3.10.1 Status of Students and Level of Study Students are designated as equivalent to first, second, third or fourth year according to the total units accumulated as follows:Course of Study (Total Credit Unit Required for Graduation) Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative Credit Acquired First Second Third Fourth Biomedicine (124 Units) 0 - 32 33 - 68 69 - 104 ≥ 105 Dietetics (122 Units) 0 - 30 31 - 60 61 - 90 ≥ 91 Nursing (132 Units) 0 - 38 39 - 77 78 - 110 ≥ 111 Medical Radiation (124 Units) 0 - 36 37 - 70 71 - 105 ≥ 106 Forensic Science (130 Units) 0 - 40 41 - 75 76 - 107 ≥ 108 Audiology (130 Units) 0 - 35 36 - 70 71 - 102 ≥ 103 Speech Pathology (134 Units) 0 - 33 34 - 69 70 - 103 ≥ 104 Exercise And Sports Science (126 Units) 0 - 31 32 - 68 69 - 102 ≥ 103 Nutrition (121 Units) 0 - 32 33 - 66 67 - 98 ≥ 99 Environmental and Occupational Health (125 Units) 0 - 38 39 - 70 71 - 102 ≥ 102 3.10.2 Biomedicine Programme This is a 4-year programme. The total unit required for graduation is 124, which includes core (99 units), elective (10 units) and university (15 units) courses. 42 3.10.3 Nursing Programme The nursing programme was developed by taking into account the following criteria: (i) The requirement of the Malaysian Nursing Board is to have sufficient nursing skill training components for registration. The registered nurse does not need to adhere to this requirement. (ii) However, this component must be taken by students with matriculation, ‘Sijil Tinggi Pelajaran Malaysia’ and other diploma qualifications. The nursing programme is structured as follows: Semester 1-6: The courses in Semester 1-6 must be taken by all students. Registered nurses can be awarded the Bachelor of Health Sciences (Nursing) upon completion of 115 units (core course-85 units; elective courses-15 units; university courses-15 units) in three years. Registered nurses may be given unit exemptions of not more than 1/3 of the total unit requirement for graduation. Semester 7-8: Students other than registered nurses are required to undergo nursing skill training components over a period of one year in order to fulfill the Malaysian Nursing Board registration. These students will then be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Nursing) upon completion of 132 units (4 years). 3.10.4 Forensic Science Programme This is a 4-year programme requiring a total of 130 units for graduation. This consists of core courses (107 units), elective courses (8 units) and university courses (15 units). 3.10.5 Dietetics Programme This is a 4-year programme requiring 122 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (91 units), elective courses (16 units) and university courses (15 units). 3.10.6 Medical Radiation Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 124 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (94 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units). 43 3.10.7 Audiology Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 130 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (100 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units). 3.10.8 Speech Pathology Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 134 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (104 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units). 3.10.9 Exercise and Sports Science Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 126 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (96 units), elective courses (15 units) and university courses (15 units). 3.10.10 Nutrition Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 121 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (86 units), elective courses (20 units) and university courses (15 units). 3.10.11 Environmental and Occupational Health Programme This is a 4-year programme. It requires a total of 125 units for graduation. It consists of core courses (100 units), elective courses (10 units) and university courses (15 units). 44 Below is the synopsis of the structure of degree programme Programme Biomedicine 4.0 Unit Requirements for Graduation Core Elective University Total Courses Courses Courses 99 10 15 124 Nursing 102 15 15 132 Forensic Science 107 8 15 130 Dietetics 91 16 15 122 Medical Radiation 94 15 15 124 Audiology 100 15 15 130 Speech Pathology 104 15 15 134 Exercise and Sports Science 96 15 15 126 Nutrition 86 20 15 121 Environmental and Occupational Health 100 10 15 125 MAJOR PROGRAMMES 4.1 BIOMEDICINE Introduction The Biomedicine programme offered by the School of Health Sciences is a full time educational programme requiring 4 years or 8 semesters to complete. At the end of the programme, graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Biomedicine). This programme was started in the 2000/2001 academic session with the initial intake of 30 students. The intake depends on the availability of appropriate infrastructure and number of academic staff of the school. The programme is multidisciplinary in nature and allows students to explore the latest information and technology in the fields of Biomedical Sciences. It encompasses all aspects of laboratory diagnosis, disease prevention and research in the fields of Biomedical Sciences, which includes Pathology, Immunology, Haematology, Transfusion Science, Human Biochemistry, Clinical Biochemistry, Medical Microbiology and Parasitology, Pharmacology, Physiology, Anatomy and Genetics. In addition, courses such as Psychology and Behavioural Science, Health and Society, Ethics and Law for Health Professionals, Biostatistics and Research Methodology, Laboratory Animal Sciences, Epidemiology and Information Technology will be offered. Industrial 45 training, Biomedical Practicum and Research Project will be introduced in the final stage of the studies to equip the students with the knowledge and skills in the diagnostic and clinical laboratory, disease prevention and research fields. Students are also required to take several elective courses and some university courses. The latter includes Malay Language, English Language, Advanced English, Islamic and Asian Civilization (TITAS). Skill development courses such as Thinking Techniques and English Language are also included to better equip them with the working environment. This programme was carefully designed to cater for the man-power requirements of both the private and public sectors of the nation. The curriculum takes cognizance of the need to be proactive in its approach, whereby curricula of institutions from the US, Europe and Australia were used as benchmarks. This is to ensure that the curriculum is of quality and of high standards capable of producing graduates who are competent and are comparable to any in the world. Academic staff of the school together with those from the Medical and Dental Schools are responsible for the teaching of all courses. All of them are well trained and are experts in their respective fields. Students of the Biomedicine Programme must complete a total of 124 credit units as explained in the Course Structure before they can graduate. List of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTB106/3 GTB107/3 GTU103/3 GTB217/2 GTB204/3 GTB218/3 GTU302/3 GTB212/3 GTB221/3 GTB219/3 GTB222/4 GTB220/3 GTB310/3 GTB315/2 GTB307/3 Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioural Science Structure and Function of Humans II Human Biochemistry Laboratory Science Epidemiology Fundamentals of Health Informatics Immunology I Molecular Biology Techniques Immunology II Biostatistics Basic Microbiology Basic Haematology Pharmacology I Pathology Medical Bacteriology Clinical Biochemistry Medical Virology and Micology Medical Parasitology 46 Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 2 3 No. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. Course Code GTB318/3 GTU303/2 GTB316/3 GTB317/3 GTB407/4 GTB408/9 GTB409/4 GTB404/3 GTB410/3 GTU201/2 GTU301/3 GEG310/2 Title of Core Courses in the Biomedicine Programme Pharmacology II Research Methodology Transfusion Science and Blood Banking Clinical and Laboratory Haematology Industrial Training Biomedical Practicum Research Project Toxicology Laboratory Management Health and Society Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Laboratory Animal Sciences Total Credit Unit of Core Courses Unit 3 2 3 3 4 9 4 3 3 2 3 2 99 Programme Learning Outcome: At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge in biomedical sciences and display theoretical and practical skills in diagnosis and research. PO2: Perform laboratory diagnostic tests based on standard protocols; manage diagnostic and/or research laboratories; perform research projects under supervision; and utilise up-to-date information and communication technologies. PO3: Demonstrate and apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems and making decisions in diagnostic laboratories. PO4: Apply communication skills at working environment in a diagnostic laboratory, medical and research institutions. PO5: Work in groups to solve health-related problems and participate as a team player in community healthcare and services. PO6: Demonstrate ethics and professional values in performing diagnosis and solving problems in laboratory investigations. P07: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance laboratory services and research in biomedical sciences. PO8: Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship skills in biomedical fields and relevant professions. PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in activities related to teaching, service and research in biomedical sciences. 47 GTU201/2 GTB217/2 GTB221/3 GTB204/3 Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU103/3 GTB106/3 Code Health and Society Immunology I Basic Haematology Molecular Biology Techniques Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Fundamentals of Health Informatics Laboratory Science Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 10 2 2 3 3 48 Unit 12 3 3 3 3 Unit GTB107/3 GTB212/3 GTB219/3 GTB218/3 GEG310/2 Code GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTU105/3 Code Epidemiology Basic Microbiology Pharmacology I Immunology II Laboratory Animal Sciences Core Course Year 2 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Human Biochemistry Psychology and Behavioural Science Core Course Year 1 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme 14 3 3 3 3 2 Unit 9 3 3 3 Unit Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Code Toxicology Industrial Training Biomedical Practicum Research Project Medical Bacteriology Clinical and Laboratory Haematology Pharmacology II Pathology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals GTB220/3 GTB317/3 GTB318/3 GTB222/4 GTU301/3 GTB404/3 GTB407/4 GTB408/9 GTB409/4 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Code 11 3 4 9 4 49 Unit 16 3 3 3 4 3 Unit GTB408/9 GTB409/4 GTB410/2 Code GTB315/2 GTB307/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTB310/3 GTB316/3 Code Biomedical Practicum Research Project Laboratory Management Core Course Year 4 Semester II Biostatistics Research Methodology Clinical Biochemistry Transfusion Science and Blood Banking Medical Virology and Micology Medical Parasitology Core Course Year 3 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Biomedicine Programme 11 9 4 2 Unit 16 2 3 3 2 3 3 Unit 4.2 DIETETICS Introduction The Dietetics programme is a full time programme offered over 4 years or 8 semesters. Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Dietetics). The programme will help to fullfil the manpower needs for Dieticians in Malaysia. Students will be exposed to all aspects of food care and nutritional requirements for patients especially those requiring special diets as well as knowledge of community nutritional requirements. The graduates are expected to be able to function as dietitians as well as consultants in related fields and in the field of nutrition as therapeutic food. Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU201/2 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTN101/3 GTN202/3 GTN207/3 GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN210/2 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTD211/2 GTN301/3 GTN309/3 GTD311/3 GTN310/2 GTD321/3 GTD315/2 GTN311/3 GTD318/4 GTD310/4 GTD317/4 GTN401/3 GTD406/3 Title of Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Sciences Health and Society Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Biostatistics Food Science Principles of Food Preparation Principles of Nutrition Nutritional Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Nutrition for Health and Fitness Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Dietetics Skills and Communication Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum Nutrition and Diseases Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Food and Nutritional Toxicology Therapeutic Diet Preparation Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II Food Service Management Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I Food Service and Industry Practicum Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II 50 Unit 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 4 4 4 3 3 No. 29. 30. 31. Course Code GTD407/3 GTD408/3 GTN407/3 Title of Core Courses in the Dietetics Programme Unit Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar 3 3 3 Total Credit Unit of Core Courses 91 Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply knowledge in nutrition and dietetics for problem identification, formulation and solution. PO2: Apply in-depth dietetics knowledge to analyse, interpret, evaluate and improve nutritional status of patients in hospital and community in general. PO3: Demonstrate critical thinking and scientific knowledge in dietetics. PO4: Communicate effectively as an individual and in groups. PO5: Demonstrate the ability to work as a team in healthcare settings. PO6: Demonstrate professional ethics and moral values in their profession. PO7: Undertake professional development and engage in life-long learning. PO8: Integrate knowledge in nutrition and dietetics in entrepreneurship. PO9: Demonstrate the ability to be a leader among the healthcare professionals. 51 Core Course Year 2 Semester 1 Code Nutritional Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Principles of Food Preparation Nutrition for Health and Fitness Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Food Science GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTN101/3 GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN202/3 GTN210/2 Core Course Year 1 Semester 1 Code 11 3 3 3 2 Unit 9 3 3 3 Unit 52 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTD211/2 GTU301/3 Code GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTN207/3 GTU201/2 Code Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Dietetics Skills and Communication Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Core Course Year 2 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Sciences Principles of Nutrition Health and Society Core Course Year 1 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme 11 3 3 2 3 Unit 3 3 3 2 11 Unit GTD310/4 GTN401/3 GTD317/4 GTD406/3 Code GTN309/3 GTD311/3 GTN310/2 GTU302/3 GTN301/3 Code Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I Food Service and Industry Practicum Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II Year 4 Semester 1 Core Course Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum Nutrition and Disease Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Food and Nutritional Toxicology Biostatistics Year 3 Semester 1 Core Course 4 3 4 3 14 53 Unit 14 3 3 2 3 3 Unit GTD407/3 GTD408/3 GTN407/3 Code GTD321/3 GTD318/4 GTN311/3 GTD315/2 Code Year 3 Semester II Core Course Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar Year 4 Semester II Core Course Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I Food Service Management Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II Therapeutic Diet Preparation Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Dietetics Programme 9 3 3 3 Unit 12 3 4 3 2 Unit 4.3 NURSING Introduction The Bachelor of Health Science (Nursing) is one of the programmes offered by the School of Health Sciences, USM. This is a 4-year (8-semester) programme. It consists of the following components: (a) Biological Sciences (b) Behavioural Sciences (c) Nursing Sciences (d) Clinical Skills (e) Computer Skills (f) Research and Scientific Writing Skills (g) Communication and Information Distribution Skills (h) Critical Thinking and Problem Solving Skills (i) Co-Curricular Activities (j) Social Skills (k) Teaching and Patient Management Skills These components are incorporated into the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic knowledge of nursing practice. In addition, it improves the nursing profession at par with other healthcare professions. Scientific knowledge and evidenced-based care aid in promoting competent, independent and safe practitioners. The graduates of this programme are expected to be of calibre, innovative, proactive, with critical thinking and problem solving abilities. The university and elective courses enable the graduates to expand their mind set and horizon. 54 4.3.1 No. List of Core Courses of the Nursing Programme 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 Course Code GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU106/3 GTB105/3 GTB107/3 GTJ101/4 GTJ108/2 GTU201/2 GTU302/3 GTB212/3 GTB217/2 GTB219/3 GTJ205/4 GTJ207/2 18 19 20 GTJ209/3 GTJ210/3 GTJ211/2 21 22 23 24 25 GTJ212/2 GTU301/3 GTU303/2 GTJ309/2 GTJ310/2 26 27 28 GTJ311/2 GTJ312/6 GTJ313/2 29 30 GTJ314/2 GTJ315/2 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 GTJ316/2 GTJ317/2 GTJ318/2 GTJ405/5 GTJ406/4 GTJ407/4 GTJ408/4 Title of Core Courses in the Nursing Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamentals of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Science Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Human Biochemistry Epidemiology Nursing Foundation I Health Communication and Education Health and Society Biostatistics Basic Microbiology Immunology I Pharmacology I Nursing Foundation III Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology) Nursing Foundation II Primary Health Care, Family and Community Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Research Methodology Critical Care Nursing Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing Research Project (one academic session) Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology) Nursing Education Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Hematology and Oncology) Gerontology Nursing Principles of Health Management Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing Medical Nursing Practicum Surgical Nursing Practicum Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum Total Unit of Core Courses 55 Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 2 2 3 3 3 4 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 4 4 4 3 102 Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1- Demonstrate application of knowledge in nursing profession. PO2- Practices holistic, competent and safe nursing practice PO3- Acquire critical thinking and problem solving skills to make appropriate decision in nursing practice and management. PO4- Communicate effectively in every level of the organisation and society. PO5- Practice social responsibilities as a team members in nursing managment of patients. PO6- Apply learned nursing knowledge in a professional and ethical manner. PO7- Practice continous lifelong learning in nursing profession. PO8- Apply scientific and analytical thinking in research and entrepreneurship for sustainability. PO9- Acquire effective management principles and demonstrate effective leadership. 56 Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTJ209/3 GTJ205/4 Epidemiology Immunology I Primary Health Care, Family and Community Nursing Foundation II Nursing Foundation III Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioural Science Health and Society GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTU201/2 GTB107/3 GTB217/2 GTJ210/3 Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Code 15 3 4 3 2 3 Unit 11 3 3 3 2 Unit Core Course Year 2 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Human Biochemistry Fundamentals of Health Informatics Health Communication and Education Nursing Foundation I Core Course Year 1 Semester II 57 Pharmacology I Basic Microbiology Biostatistics Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) GTJ212/2 Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing GTJ207/2 Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology) GTB219/3 GTB212/3 GTU302/3 GTJ211/2 Code GTU104/3 GTB105/3 GTU103/3 GTJ108/2 GTJ101/4 Code Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme 15 2 2 3 3 3 2 Unit 3 3 3 2 4 15 Unit Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Medical Nursing Practicum Surgical Nursing Practicum Research Project (one academic session) 5 4 6 Unit Core Courses Unit Year 3 Semester 1 Research Methodology 2 Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine 2 and Musculoskeletal) Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing 2 Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, 2 Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology) Principles of Health Management 2 Research Project (one academic session 6 course) Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 3 19 GTJ408/4 GTJ407/4 Code GTJ316/2 GTJ309/2 GTJ318/2 GTJ314/2 GTJ315/2 Code Core Course Year 4 Semester II Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum Core Course Year 3 Semester II Nursing Education Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Hematology and Oncology) Gerontology Nursing Critical Care Nursing Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing 4 4 Unit 10 2 2 2 2 2 Unit 58 15 8 *The research project (one academic session) will be offered in Year 3 (Semester 1) to registered nurses that have been given exemption from the practicum courses (the whole of Year 4). Matriculation and STPM students must take this course in Year 4 (Semester 1). GTJ405/5 GTJ406/4 *GTJ312/6 Code GTU301/3 GTJ317/2 GTJ312/6* GTJ311/2 GTJ313/2 GTU303/2 GTJ310/2 Code Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nursing Programme 4.4 FORENSIC SCIENCE Introduction This programme is the first forensic science programme offered in Malaysia. It is a very popular programme and is highly demanded amongst prospective students. Students will be exposed to the latest knowledge and technologies in the field of Forensic Science via courses which have been developed meticulously. Renowned programmes from other countries such as the US, Europe and Australia were used as a benchmark. Teaching staff of the School together with others from the Medical and Dental Schools of USM, Chemistry Department of Malaysia, The Fire and Rescue Department, and The Royal Malaysia Police will together ensure that the programme is run smoothly and in an excellent manner. This programme is expected to help cater for the national requirements for Forensic scientists which are very much needed in the country. A total of 130 credit units is required for graduation as explained under the course structure section. List of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU104/3 GTF103/3 GTF104/3 GTF105/2 GTF106/3 GTF107/3 GTF108/2 GTB204/3 GTF200/3 GTF203/2 GTF204/3 GTF205/3 GTF206/3 GTF207/2 GTF208/2 GTF209/2 GTF210/3 GTF211/2 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTF300/2 GTF301/3 GTF305/4 GTF306/3 Title of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme Unit Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Structure and Function of Humans II Physical Chemistry Inorganic Chemistry General Chemistry Practical I Analytical Chemistry I Organic Chemistry I General Chemistry Practical II Molecular Biology Techniques Criminalistic Introduction to Criminology Forensic Psychology Analytical Chemistry II Organic Chemistry II Analytical Chemistry Practical Organic Chemistry Practical Pollutions and Environment Chemistry Material Chemistry Natural Products Chemistry Biostatistic Research Methodology Biological Evidence Physical Evidence Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs Fire Investigation 59 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 2 3 4 3 No. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. Course Code GTF309/3 GTF311/3 GTF312/3 GTF313/3 GTF314/2 GTF400/3 GTF402/4 GTF406/6 GTF407/8 GTF408/2 Title of Core Courses in the Forensic Science Programme Unit Forensic DNA Analysis Forensic Anthropology Organic Chemistry III Food Chemistry Forensic Serology Forensic Medicine Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives Research Project Forensic Practicum Forensic Documents Examination Total Unit of Core Courses 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 6 8 2 107 Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply the core knowledge of forensic sciences together with the other specialty areas of forensic sciences and display the ability to organize them specifically in the analysis of evidence in forensic investigations. PO2: Demonstrate technical skills required in the process of analysis, application and problem solving in forensic laboratory and/or at the real scene of crime. PO3: Demonstrate the ability to use scientific critical thinking skills to obtain necessary information, investigate and conduct experiment or research in solving forensic related problems. PO4: Communicate clearly and manage the scene of crime, and identify other associated skills in determining the type of forensic investigations with ethics and professional manners. PO5: Work in groups or peers in different stages of criminal investigations; searching for forensic evidences, forensic analysis, crime scene management, and reporting the findings. PO6: Display ethics and professional manners in the practice of forensic investigation and case presentation. PO7: Identify and adapt with the most recent technologies and resources and opportunities for the advancement of forensic science services and lifelong education. PO8: Apply good management skills and demonstrate entrepreneurship capaticities particularly in decisión making and planning. PO9: Demonstrate leadership skills through active involvement in social projects and the employment of fundamental knowledge in forensic sciences for the purpose of crime prevention. 60 GTB204/3 GTF204/3 GTF205/3 GTF206/3 GTF207/2 GTF208/2 Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTF103/3 GTF104/3 GTF105/2 Code Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Molecule Biology Techniques Psychology Forensic Analytical Chemistry II Organic Chemistry II Analytical Chemistry Practical Organic Chemistry Practical Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Physical Chemistry Inorganic Chemistry General Chemistry Practical I 16 3 3 3 3 2 2 Unit 3 3 3 3 2 14 Unit 61 GTF210/3 GTF211/2 GTF200/3 GTF203/2 GTF209/2 Code GTU104/3 GTF106/3 GTF107/3 GTF108/2 Code Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1I Criminalistic Introduction to Criminology Pollutions and Environment Chemistry Material Chemistry Natural Products Chemistry Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1I Structure and Function of Humans II Analytical Chemistry I Organic Chemistry I General Chemistry Practical II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme 12 3 2 3 2 2 Unit 11 3 3 3 2 Unit GTF402/4 GTF407/8 GTF408/2 Code GTF300/2 GTF301/3 GTF306/3 GTF312/3 GTF313/3 Code Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Balistic and Chemistry of Explosives Forensic Practicum Forensic Documents Examination Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Biological Evidence Physical Evidence Fire Investigation Organic Chemistry III Food Chemistry 4 8 2 14 Unit 14 2 3 3 3 3 Unit 62 GTF403/3 GTF406/6 Code GTF314/2 GTF309/3 GTF311/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTF305/4 Code Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1I Forensic Medicine Research Project Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1I Biostatistic Research Metodology Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs Forensic Serology Forensic DNA Analysis Forensic Anthropology Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Forensic Science Programme 9 3 6 Unit 2 3 3 17 3 2 4 Unit 4.5 MEDICAL RADIATION The Bachelor of Health Science (Medical Radiation) is a 4-year (8 semesters) full time academic programme which has been offered since academic year 2001/2002 to students with qualification of A-level, STPM, matriculation, diploma in radiography or equivalent. The government of Malaysia has accredited this programme since 2004. This programme provides theoretical and practical training experiences, which will allow students to understand, able to explain and utilise ionising and non-ionising radiation in the diagnosis and treatment of patients. The offering of this programme is expected to assist in fulfilling the national requirements for trained personnel in the medical radiation science disciplines. This programme opens up career opportunities in the field of diagnostic radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy and medical radiation protection which required knowledge and skills in these areas in order to ensure the safety of the graduates, medical and health professionals, patients and members of the general public. The students are required to complete a total of 124 units for the purpose of graduation. The whole programme consists of 94 units of core courses, 15 units of university courses and 15 units of elective courses. List of Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU106/3 GTX101/3 GTX102/3 GTX103/3 GTX210/3 GTX212/3 GTX213/3 GTX214/3 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTX302/2 GTX307/3 GTX314/2 GTX316/3 GTX317/3 Title of Core Courses in the the Medical Radiation Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioral Sciences Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Medical Radiation Mathematics of Radiation Science Medical Radiation Physics I Medical Radiation Physics II Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Biostatistics Research Methodology Radiation Protection and Safety I Radiation Protection and Safety II Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry Diagnostic Radiology Imaging Nuclear Medicine Imaging 63 Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 No. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. Course Code GTX320/3 GTX321/4 GTX402/2 GTX405/2 GTX406/6 GTX407/3 GTX408/3 GTX410/4 GTX411/4 GTX412/3 GTX413/3 Unit Title of Core Courses in the the Medical Radiation Programme Principles of Radiotherapy 3 Imaging Techniques I 4 Brachytherapy 2 Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I 2 Research Project 6 Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II 3 Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy 3 Imaging Techniques II 4 Radiotherapy Techniques 4 Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques 3 Professional Training 3 Total Unit of Core Courses 94 Programme Learning Outcomes At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply the knowledge of medical radiation sciences and display related skills in diagnostic radiology, nuclear medicine, radiation therapy and radiation protection in medical application. PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills required in medical imaging and radiotherapy procedures. PO3: Apply scientific thinking in solving problem related to medical imaging and radiation therapy. PO4: Apply communication skills in a hospital based working environment or research institutions. PO5: Display good social ability and able to work as a team member with other healthcare professionals. PO6: Demonstrate professionalism, good attitude and ethical values during patient management and clinical practices. PO7: Apply lifelong education and information management by having up-to-date ICT skills. PO8: Apply management skills and display entrepreneurship in medical radiation profession. PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient management and medically related professional activities. 64 GTX210/3 Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTX101/3 Code Medical Radiation Physics II Courses Year 2 Semester I Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioral Sciences Introduction to Medical Radiation Courses Year 1 Semester I 3 3 3 3 Unit 3 3 12 Unit 65 GTX213/3 GTX214/3 GTX212/3 Code GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTX102/3 GTX103/3 Code Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology Courses Year 2 Semester II Fundamental of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Mathematics of Radiation Science Medical Radiation Physics I Courses Year 1 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme 9 3 3 3 Unit 12 3 3 3 3 Unit GTX402/2 GTX405/2 GTX406/6 GTX410/4 GTX412/3 GTX413/3 Code GTU301/3 GTX302/2 GTX314/2 GTX316/3 GTX317/3 Code Brachytherapy Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I *Research Project Imaging Techniques II Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques Professional Training Courses Year 4 Semester I Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Radiation Protection and Safety I Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry Diagnostic Radiology Imaging Nuclear Medicine Imaging Courses Year 3 Semester I 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 6 4 3 3 20 Unit 13 Unit 66 GTX411/4 GTX406/6 GTX407/3 GTX408/3 Code GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTX307/3 GTX321/4 GTX320/3 Code Courses Year 3 Semester II *Research Project Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy Radiotherapy Techniques Courses Year 4 Semester II Biostatistics Research Methodology Radiation Protection and Safety II Imaging Techniques I Principles of Radiotherapy Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Medical Radiation Programme 13 4 3 3 3 Unit 15 3 2 3 4 3 Unit 4.6 AUDIOLOGY Introduction This programme is designed to produce audiologists who are knowledgeable and able to practice in the field of audiology to fulfill the needs of public and private sectors. Graduates will be awarded the Bachelor of Health Science (Audiology). This 4-year (8 semesters) programme includes the theoretical and practical (clinical) learning experience through our Core, University and Elective courses to equip the students to be competent as a practicing audiologist. Thus, students will acquire the necessary academic qualification to become a professional audiologist and play their role as part of the health care team. List of Courses of the Audiology Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTA101/2 GTA102/3 GTP101/2 GTU201/2 LKM400/2 HTU223/2 GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTA103/2 Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioral Science Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Physics for Audiologist Child Language Development Health and Society Bahasa Malaysia IV TITAS (Islamic and Asian Civilization) Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) GTP102/2 Basic Linguistics GTP103/2 Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology GTP104/3 Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing WUS101/2 Entrepreneurship WSCxxx/1 Co-curriculum (Sports) LSP300/2 Academic English GTA201/2 Audiology Instrumentation GTA202/3 Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques GTP202/3 Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders GTP204/2 Peadiatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology GTP205/2 Speech Acoustics and Phonetics GTA203/3 Advanced Audiology Technique GTA204/2 Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening GTA205/2 Neurology for Hearing and Speech 67 Unit 3 3 2 3 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 2 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 No. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. Course Code GTJ317/2 SHE101/2 WCCxxx/1 LSP402/2 GTA206/2 GTA207/2 GTU302/3 GTB107/3 GTJ108/2 WSCxxx/1 GTA301/3 GTA302/3 GTA303/3 GTU301/3 GTU303/2 GTA304/4 GTA305/3 GTA306/3 GTP305/2 GEG203/2 GTA401/6 GTA402/3 GTA403/5 GTP407/2 GTA404/2 GTA405/5 GEG304/2 Title of Core Courses in the Audiology Programme Principles of Health Management Ethnics Relation Co-curriculum (Cultural) Scientific and Medical English Otology Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System Biostatistics Epidemiology Health Communication and Education Co-curriculum (Sports) Basic Hearing Amplification Technology Audiology Clinic I Paediatric Audiology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Research Methodology Audiology Clinic II Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology Auditory Rehabilitation Counselling for Special Population Health Economy Research Project Noise and Hearing Audiology Clinic III Learning Disabilities Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Audiology Clinic IV Communication and Self Development Total Unit of Core Courses 68 Unit 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 2 4 3 3 2 2 6 3 5 2 2 5 2 130 Programme Learning Outcome: At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Demonstrate fundamental and advanced knowledge, (theoretically and clinicall) in the field of audiological sciences. PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills in diagnosis and re/habilitative audiology. PO3: Display critical and scientific thinking in integrating the audiological knowledge in assessment, interpretation, management, and re/habilitation aspects of hearing, balance and related disorders. PO4: Demonstrate communication skills in dealing with patients, family members and health-related professionals and other related working environments. PO5: Participate effectively in multi-disciplinary teams in managing patients with hearing and balance disorders. PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conducts and ethical standards and demonstrate sensitivity to the differences in culture and religion. PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills to enhance clinical services and research in audiology. PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills in audiology-related fields and practice systemic management in clinical audiology. PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills through active involvement in patient management and health-related professions. 69 Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioural Sciences Health and Society Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Physics for Audiologist Child Language Development Bahasa Malaysia IV TITAS GTU101/3 LKM400/2 HTU223/2 GTA102/3 GTP101/2 GTA101/2 GTU201/2 GTU105/3 Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Code 19 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 Unit 70 WUS101/2 WSCxxx/1 LSP300/2 GTP104/3 GTP102/2 GTP103/2 GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTA103/2 Code Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamental of Health Informatics Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Entrepreneurship Co-Curriculum (Sports) Academic English Core Courses Year 1 Semester 2 Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme Unit 20 2 1 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 GTP205/2 GTJ317/2 SHE101/2 WCCxxx/1 LSP402/2 GTP204/2 GTA202/3 GTP202/3 GTA201/2 Code 19 Audiology Instrumentation Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Peadiatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustics and Phonetics Principles of Health Management Ethnic Relation Co-curriculum (Cultural) Scientific and Medical English Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 2 Unit 71 WSCxxx/1 GTU302/3 GTB107/3 GTJ108/2 GTA205/2 GTA206/2 GTA207/2 GTA203/3 GTA204/2 Code Advanced Audiology Technique Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening Neurology for Hearing and Speech Otology Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System Biostatistics Epidemiology Health Communication and Education Co-curriculum (Sports) Core Courses Year 2 Semester 2 Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme 20 1 3 3 2 2 2 2 3 2 Unit GTA401/6 GTA402/3 GTA403/5 GTP407/2 Code GTA302/3 GTA303/3 GTU303/2 GTU301/3 GTA301/3 Code Year 4 Semester 1 Research Project Noise and Hearing Audiology Clinic III Learning Disabilities Core Courses Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Basic Hearing Amplification Technology Audiology Clinic I Paediatric Audiology Research Methodology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 16 6 3 5 2 Unit 14 3 3 2 3 3 Unit 72 GTA405/5 GEG304/2 GTA404/2 Code GTA306/3 GTP305/2 GEG203/2 GTA304/4 GTA305/3 Code Year 4 Semester 2 Ethics and Law for Health Professionals Audiology Clinic IV Communication and Self Development Core Courses Core Courses Year 3 Semester 2 Audiology Clinic II Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology Auditory Rehabilitation Counselling for Special Population Health Economy Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Courses of the Audiology Programme 9 5 2 2 Unit 14 3 2 2 4 3 Unit 4.7 SPEECH PATHOLOGY Introduction Speech pathology is a health science profession that deals with the identification, assessment, diagnosis, intervention and management of communication disorders (disorders of language, speech sounds, fluency and voice) and swallowing problems. The professionals in this profession are known as Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) in the government sector or Speech-Language Pathologist in the private sector. Speech Pathology Programme provides an academic program for students to obtain Bachelors of Health Science (Speech Pathology) as a qualification to work as the Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertuturan) or Speech-Language Pathologist. The main aim of Speech Pathology Programme is to produce professionals who have the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. Therefore, to achieve this main aim, the objectives of Speech Pathology Program are to: - Offer an academic programme that can produce professional who are knowledgeable and skilful in speech pathology. Provide students with the theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in preparation to work as competence professionals. Develop sense of professionalism to ensure ethical practices provided to the public. Give initial exposure to encourage involvement in research, parallel to advancement in speech pathology profession. This is a 4-year professional programme that provides students with theoretical knowledge and clinical skills in speech pathology. Students will undertake programme core courses that cover topics on communication sciences and disorders, medical and health sciences, linguistics, education, psychology and research, plus several elective and university courses. The students will also have to accumulate 400 clinical educational hours during clinical years i.e. from Year 2 to Year 4 and complete a research project during the final year. List of Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTP101/2 GTA101/2 GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTP102/2 GTP103/2 Title of Core Courses in the Speech Pathology Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioural Science Child Language Development Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology 73 Unit 3 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 No. 9. 10. Course Code GTP104/3 GTA103/2 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. GTP201/2 GTP202/3 GTP203/2 GTP204/2 GTP205/2 GTA202/3 GTP206/1 GTP207/2 GTP208/3 GTA205/2 GTA206/2 GTU302/3 GTP301/2 GTP302/2 GTP303/2 GTP304/3 GTU303/2 GTP309/3 GTP305/2 GTP306/3 GTP307/3 GTP308/4 GTP310/2 GTP401/2 GTP402/6 GTP403/6 GTP404/2 GTP407/2 GTP406/6 Title of Core Courses in the Speech Pathology Programme Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear and Throat) Linguistics for Speech Pathology Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic I Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustic and Phonetics Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Technique Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology Speech Pathology Clinic II Speech Disorders Neurology for Hearing and Speech Otology Biostatistics Psycholinguistics Language Disorders Neuropsychology Speech Pathology Clinic III Research Methodology Hearing Impairment Counselling for Special Population Voice and Resonance Disorders Acquired Communication Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic IV Speech Pathology Clinical Placement Augmentative and Alternative Communication Research Project Speech Pathology Clinic V Swallowing Problems Learning Disabilities Speech Pathology Clinic VI Total Unit of Core Courses 74 Unit 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 4 2 2 6 6 2 2 6 104 Programme Learning Outcome At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Demonstrate theoretical and clinical knowledge related to speech sciences specifically the principles and methods of assessment, intervention and prevention of communication and swallowing disorders. PO2: Demonstrate appropriate technical and clinical skills in speech sciences during formulation and execution of the prevention, assessment and intervention process. PO3: Apply critical thinking in integrating the theoretical knowledge, analysing and interpreting assessment findings for prognosis and diagnosis, problem solving and decision making. PO4: Demonstrate communication and interpersonal skills in dealing with patients, family members, other healthcare professionals and community. PO5: Collaborate effectively with other team members of healthcare professionals in managing patients with communication and swallowing disorders. PO6: Adhere to professional codes of conduct and ethical standard and demonstrate sensitivity to the differences in culture and religion practices. PO7: Apply current development in speech sciences, clinical skills and utilise ICT knowledge to enhance their profession and support lifelong learning. PO8: Display entrepreneurship skills and practice systemic management in speech sciences. PO9: Demonstrate leadership and social skills. 75 GTP101/2 GTA101/2 GTU101/3 GTU105/3 Code Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioural Science Child Language Development Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 10 2 2 3 3 Unit 76 GTA103/2 GTP104/3 GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTP102/2 GTP103/2 Code Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Basic Linguistics Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear and Throat) Core Course Year 2 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme 15 2 3 3 3 2 2 Unit GTP205/2 GTA202/3 GTP203/2 GTP204/2 GTP201/2 GTP202/3 Code Linguistics for Speech Pathology Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic I Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology Speech Acoustic and Phonetics Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Technique Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 14 2 3 2 2 2 3 Unit 77 GTP207/2 GTP208/3 GTA205/2 GTA206/2 GTU302/3 GTP206/1 Code Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology Speech Pathology Clinic II Speech Disorders Neurology for Hearing and Speech Otology Biostatistics Core Course Year 2 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme 13 2 3 2 2 3 1 Unit GTP402/6 GTP403/6 GTP404/2 GTP401/2 GTP310/2 Code GTP301/2 GTP302/2 GTP303/2 GTP304/3 GTU303/2 GTP309/3 Code Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Speech Pathology Clinical Placement Augmentative and Alternative Communication Research Project Speech Pathology Clinic V Swallowing Problems Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Psycholinguistics Language Disorders Neuropsychology Speech Pathology Clinic III Research Methodology Hearing Impairment 6 6 2 18 2 2 Unit 2 2 2 3 2 3 14 Unit 78 GTP407/2 GTP406/6 Code GTP305/2 GTP306/3 GTP307/3 GTP308/4 Code Core Course Year 4 Semester II Learning Disabilities Speech Pathology Clinic VI Core Course Year 3 Semester II Counselling for Special Population Voice and Resonance Disorders Acquired Communication Disorders Speech Pathology Clinic IV Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Speech Pathology Programme 8 2 6 Unit 12 2 3 3 4 Unit 4.8 EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE Introduction The objective of this programme is to produce graduates who are academically sound and able to function as the experts in the field of Exercise and Sports Science relevant to the requirement of the public and private sectors of the industry. It also takes cognisance of helping to achieve the national aspiration of creating healthy citizens. Students undergoing this programme are expected to acquire a high level of academic competency and knowledge that is at par with graduates of similar institutions within and outside the country. The uniqueness of this programme is that it allows the graduates to be flexible and capable of continued development in their specific career. This is based on the curriculum design which helps strengthen the knowledge of exercise and sports sciences while at the same time students will be exposed to the health and sporting events relevant to the field. List of Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTU105/3 GTU104/3 GTS101/2 GTS102/3 GTU103/3 GTU201/2 GTB217/2 GTS201/3 GTS202/2 GTS203/2 GTS204/2 GTS205/3 GTS206/3 GTS207/3 GTN207/3 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTS301/3 GTS302/2 GTS303/3 GTS304/3 Title of Core Courses in the Exercise and Sports Science Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Psychology and Behavioral Science Structure and Function of Humans II Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science Sociology and Philosophy of Sports Fundamentals of Health Informatics Health and Society Immunology I Exercise Physiology First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Kinanthropometry Tests and Measurements for Sports Science Sports Psychology Sports Training Methodology Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports Principles of Nutrition Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Biostatistics Research Methodology Sports Nutrition Motor Learning Sports Injuries and Rehabilition Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology 79 Unit 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 No. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. Course Code GTS305/2 GTS306/3 GTS307/3 GTS401/3 GTS402/6 GTS403/4 GTS404/2 GTS405/3 GTS406/3 GTS407/3 Title of Core Courses in the Exercise and Sports Science Programme Applied Sports Physiology Coaching Science and Performance Analysis Physical Activity, Growth and Development Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription Research Project Industrial Training Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices Sports Management Adapted Physical Activity Therapeutic Exercises Total Unit of Core Courses Unit 2 3 3 3 6 4 2 3 3 3 96 Programme Learning Outcomes At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Posess comprehensive knowledge with a strong foundation in exercise and sports physiology. PO2: Proficiently identify and apply the appropriate tests and technical analysis. PO3: Demonstrate analytical thinking, application of knowledge and problem-solving in research laboratories and at the actual playing field. PO4: Display professional communication skills for accurate information dissemination. PO5: Provide professional services to aid optimum health and fitness for the community. PO6: Demonstrate responsibility, accountability and portray professional ethics and noble values. PO7: Apply continuous learning and exploration of new knowledge in line with the latest development. PO8: Incorporate management and entrepreneurship skills that will branch out as other career option s related to the field. PO9: Display leadership and team management skills in taking charge of group tasks and in community. 80 GTS203/2 GTB217/2 GTU201/2 GTS201/3 GTS202/2 Code GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU106/3 GTS101/2 Code Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Health and Society Exercise Physiology First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) Kinanthropometry Immunology I Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamentals of Health Informatics Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science 11 2 2 2 3 2 Unit 11 3 3 3 2 Unit 81 GTN207/3 GTS205/3 GTS206/3 GTS207/3 GTS204/2 Code GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTS102/3 Code Core Course Year 2 Semester II Tests and Measurements for Sports Science Sports Psychology Sports Training Methodology Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports Principles of Nutrition Core Course Year 1 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Science Sociology and Philosophy of Sports Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme 14 3 3 3 3 2 Unit 9 3 3 3 Unit GTS402/6 GTS403/4 GTS404/2 GTS401/3 Code GTU301/3 GTS301/3 GTS302/2 GTS303/3 GTS304/3 Code Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription Research Project Industrial Training Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Sports Nutrition Motor Learning Sports Injuries and Rehabilition Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals 15 6 4 2 3 Unit 14 3 3 2 3 3 Unit 82 GTS405/3 GTS406/3 GTS407/3 Code GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTS307/3 GTS305/2 GTS306/3 Code Core Courses Year 4 Semester II Sports Management Adapted Physical Activity Therapeutic Exercises Core Courses Year 3 Semester II Applied Sports Physiology Coaching Science and Performance Analysis Physical Activity, Growth and Development Biostatistics Research Methodology Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Exercise and Sports Science Programme 9 3 3 3 Unit 13 3 2 3 2 3 Unit 4.9 NUTRITION Introduction The nutrition programme offers a 4-year (8 semesters) full time course leading to a Bachelor Degree in Health Science (Nutrition). The offering of the programme is to cater for the needs for more nutritionists in Malaysia. The programme applies multidisciplinary approaches, and is taught by experts from basic sciences, food science, and dietetic, medical, social science and community services. The nutrition programme has the purpose in delivering knowledge in the basic human nutrition and focuses towards community nutrition in Malaysia. It provides an academic programme that is able to produce versatile graduates and in fulfilling the needs of the job market in the future. Students will be exposed to every aspect of food, dietary nutrient requirement, evaluation of nutritional status and issues of lifelong nutrition cycle. Students will also learn the problems of nutrition in a community and methods in overcoming these problems. The research component will also be taught and students are required to carry out a research project in the final year. Teaching is conducted via lectures, seminar, practical, self study and directed learning. List of Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme No. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. Course Code GTU101/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU103/3 GTU201/2 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTU301/3 GTB107/3 GTN101/3 GTN202/3 GTN207/3 GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN210/2 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTN301/3 Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme Structure and Function of Humans I Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Science Fundamental of Health Informatics Health and Society Biostatistics Research Methodology Ethics and Law for the the Health Professionals Epidemiology Food Science Principle of Food Preparation Principle of Nutrition Nutrition Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Nutrition for Health and Fitness Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum 83 Unit 3 3 3 3 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 3 No. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. Course Code GTN309/3 GTN310/2 GTN311/3 GTN312/3 GTN314/2 GTN401/3 GTN403/6 GTN405/3 GTN407/3 GTD211/3 GTD311/3 GTD315/2 Title of Core Courses in the Nutrition Programme Nutrition and Diseases Food and Nutrition Toxicology Food Service Management Food Microbiology Nutrition Anthropology Food Services and Industry Practicum Research Project in Nutrition Current Issues in Nutrition Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars Dietetic and Communication Skills Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Principles in Medical Nutrition Therapy II Total Unit for Core Courses Unit 3 2 3 3 2 3 6 3 3 2 3 2 86 Programme Learning Outcome At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills for problem identification and solution. PO2: Demonstrate technical and practical skills required in patient care, patients and community services, and apply scientific knowledge in research. PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking skills in solving problems and making decisions related to nutrition field. PO4: Apply communication skills at any working environment in nutrition laboratory, health and research institutions. PO5: Work in groups as healthcare profesionals to solve nutrition- and health-related problems and participate as a team player in community healthcare and services. PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes and professional ethics in nutrition applications and services. PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and to identify resources to enhance services and research in nutritions. PO8: Display management and entrepreneurship skills in nutrition-related fields and professions. PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership skills as healthcare professionals in activities related to nutrition, healthcare and research. 84 Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTN208/3 GTN209/3 GTN202/3 GTN210/2 Nutrition Biochemistry Nutrition in the Life Cycle Principles of Food Preparation Nutrition for Health and Fitness Structure and Function of Humans I Psychology and Behavioural Science Food Science Health and Society GTU101/3 GTU105/3 GTN101/3 GTU201/2 Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Code 11 3 3 3 2 Unit 3 2 11 3 3 Unit 85 GTN211/3 GTN212/3 GTD211/3 GTU301/3 Code GTU104/3 GTU103/3 GTN207/3 GTB107/3 Code Food Analysis Assessment of Nutritional Status Dietetic and Communication Skills Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Core Course Year 2 Semester II Structure and Function of Humans II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Principles of Nutrition Epidemiology Core Course Year 1 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme 12 3 3 3 3 Unit 12 3 3 3 3 Unit Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Code GTN403/6 GTN401/3 GTN310/2 Training in Food Industries and Services Research Project in Nutrition Biostatistics Training in Community Nutrition and Dietetic Nutrition and Diseases Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I Food and Nutrition Toxicology GTU302/3 GTN301/3 GTN309/3 GTD311/3 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Code 9 6 3 Unit 2 14 3 3 3 3 Unit 86 GTN405/3 GTN407/3 Code GTN314/2 GTU303/2 GTN312/3 GTN311/3 GTD315/2 Code Current Issues in Nutrition Nutrition and Dietetic Seminar Core Courses Year 4 Semester II Food Microbiology Food Service Management Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II Nutrition Anthropology Research Methodology Core Course Year 3 Semester II Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Nutrition Programme 6 3 3 Unit 12 2 2 3 3 2 Unit 4.10 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH Introduction The Environmental and Occupational Health Programme is a full time 4 years (8 semesters) undergraduate academic programme. The students will be awarded the Bachelor Degree of Health Science (Environmental and Occupational Health) upon successful completion of the programme. This programme emphasises knowledge in the field of environmental and occupational as a competitive advantage, which enables graduates to communicate effectively with medical professionals involved in treatment and rehabilitation of individuals suffering environmental and occupational related diseases. The programme is designed and developed with care to fulfill the specific needs of potential employers, regulators and modern society in general. The students will be trained on international quality management systems, including ISO9001, ISO14001, OSHAS18000, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722: 2003. Students will also be exposed to knowledge in the field of quantitative chemistry with special attention on skills of handling analytical instruments in quantifying pollutants in outdoors and indoors samples, independently. Students will gain real life experience through an 4 months Smart Partnership Scheme established between the university, industries and government institutions. 87 List of Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme 1. 2. Course Code GTK101/3 GTK102/3 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. GTK103/3 GTU101/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTU106/3 GTB106/3 GTF101/3 GTK201/3 GTK202/3 GTK203/3 GTU201/2 GTB107/3 GTK301/4 GTK302/3 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. GTK303/3 GTK304/3 GTK305/3 GTK306/3 GTK307/3 GTU301/3 GTU302/3 GTU303/2 GTK401/8 GTK402/8 GTK403/4 GTK404/3 GTK405/3 No. Title of Core Courses in the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health Environmental and Occupational Health : Ecological Perspectives Biodiversity Structure and Function of Humans I Fundamentals of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioral Science Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Laboratory Science Basic Chemistry Occupational Health Pollution and Health Occupational Health Health and Society Epidemiology Environmental and Occupational Toxicology Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering Perspectives Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases Environmental and Occupational Emergency Occupational Rehabilitation Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Biostatistic Research Methodology Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum Research Project Environmental and Occupational Laws Environmental Management Management of Occupational Safety and Health Total Unit of Core Courses 88 Unit 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 8 8 4 3 3 100 Programme Learning Outcome (PO) At the end of the programme, the graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply core knowledge and display the ability to use theoretical and practical skills in all situations involving environmental and occupational hazards and safety. PO2: Demonstrate technical skills and capable in creating perception in order to identify environmental and occupational health’s problems. PO3: Apply critical and creative thinking in acquiring environmental and occupational health information and apply scientific knowledge in research towards effective services. PO4: Apply communication skills effectively at any working environment in all organizations, industrials and society. PO5: Demonstrate social skills and participate as team player in order to catch the organization goal and able to solve environmental and occupational health’s problem as a group. PO6: Demonstrate good values, attitudes, and professional ethics in environmental and occupational safety, applications and services. PO7: Apply lifelong education and ICT skills, and identify resources to enhance services and research in environmental and occupational. PO8: Identify and manipulate entrepreneur resources and skills in environmental and occupational related-skills and professions to facilitate society group in need. PO9: Demonstrate and apply leadership as healthcare professionals in activities related to environmental, occupational, healthcare and research. 89 Core Courses Year 2 Semester 1 Code GTU201/2 GTK201/3 GTK202/3 Health and Society Occupational Safety Pollution and Health Structure and Function of Humans I Biochemistry and Basic Genetics Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health Laboratory Science Basic Chemistry GTU101/3 GTU106/3 GTK101/3 GTB106/3 GTF101/3 Core Courses Year 1 Semester 1 Code 8 2 3 3 Unit 15 3 3 3 3 3 Unit 90 GTU302/3 GTK203/3 GTB107/3 Code GTK103/3 GTU103/3 GTU104/3 GTU105/3 GTK102/3 Code Biostatistics Occupational Health Epidemiology Core Courses Year 2 Semester II Fundamentals of Health Informatics Structure and Function of Humans II Psychology and Behavioural Science Environmental and Occupational Health : Ecological Perspectives Biodiversity Core Courses Year 1 Semester II 9 3 3 3 Unit 15 3 3 3 3 3 Unit Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme Environmental and Occupational Toxicology Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering Perspectives Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management Ethics and Law for the Health Professionals Core Courses Year 4 Semester 1 Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum Research Project GTK301/4 Code GTK401/8 GTK402/8 GTU301/3 GTK303/3 GTK302/3 Core Courses Year 3 Semester 1 Code 16 8 8 Unit 13 3 3 3 4 Unit 91 GTK403/4 GTK404/3 GTK405/3 Code GTK307/3 GTU303/2 GTK306/3 GTK305/3 GTK304/3 Code Environmental and Occupational Laws Environmental Management Management of Occupational Safety and Health Core Courses Year 4 Semester II Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants Environmental and Occupational Related Diseases Environmental and Occupational Emergencies Occupational Rehabilitation Research Methodology Core Courses Year 3 Semester II 10 4 3 3 Unit 14 3 2 3 3 3 Unit Recommended Registration Guidelines for the Core Courses of the Environmental and Occupational Health Programme 5.0 COURSES SYNOPSIS 92 5.1. Core Courses Level 100 93 GTA101/2-Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech This course introduces anatomy terminologies and correlation between structure and function of the human body. It emphasizes on organs related to hearing and speech, i.e. head, neck and thora and their interrelationships. Topics which will be discussed include introduction to anatomical terminology, main systems of speech and hearing, the skull, respiration system, larynx and phonetic mechanism. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Fawcett, D.W., Jensh, R.P., Bloom and Fawcett's Concise Histology, 2nd Ed., Oxford Universitiy Press, 2002. Anthony, J., Seikel, J., King, D.W., Drumright, D.G., Anatomy and Physiology for Speech, Language and Hearing, 2nd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1999. Zemlin, W.R., Speech and Hearing Science: Anatomy and Physiology, 4th Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2000. GTA102/3-Physics for Audiologist This course discusses the basic acoustics, electricity and electronics, such as magnetism and electromagneticsm, electrostatics, battery and mobile energy sources, electric circuits, resistors, capacitors, semiconductors, amplifiers, oscillators, interference effects and electrical noises. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Boylestad, R.L. & Nashelsky, L., Introduction to Electricity, Electronics and Electromagnetics, 5th ed., London: Pearson Education, 2002. Patrick, D.R. & Fardo, S.W., Electricity and Electronics: A Survey, 5th ed., Upper Saddle River, N.J: Prentice Hall, 2001. Villchur, E., Acoustics for Audiologists, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. GTA103/2-Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) This course discusses the anatomy and physiology related to detailed speech production mechanism. This includes the skeleton, face, structures in neck, muscles and ligaments that are involved in voice and speech production and swallowing. In addition, this course will also include the physiology of articulation and phonation, vestibular and auditory systems. 94 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Clark W. F. & Ohlemiller K., Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing for Audiologist, Singular Publishing Group, 2004. Culbertson W., Cotton S. & Tanner D., Anatomy and Physiology Study Guide for Speech & Hearing, Plural Publishing Inc., 2005. Atkinson M. & McHanwell S., Basic Medical Science for Speech, Hearing & Language Students, Whurr Publishers, 2004. GTB105/3-Human Biochemistry This course discusses aspects of human biochemistry including protein, carbohydrate and lipid metabolism, enzymes, hormones, and liver and renal functions. The focus will be towards the theory and methods used in measuring biochemical parameters in human. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Boyer, R. (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Devlin, T.M. (2002). Textbook of Biochemistry : With Clinical Correlations (5th Ed.). New York, NY: Wiley-Liss. Horton, H.A. (2006). Principles of Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ : Prentice Hall. Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. (2003). Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life. Boston: McGraw-Hill. Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K., Mayes, P.A., & Rodwell, V.W. (Eds.). (2000). Harper's Biochemistry (25th Ed.). Stamford: Lange Medical Publication. GTB106/3-Laboratory Science This course introduces students to the basic laboratory techniques, management and maintenance of laboratory equipment. Topics will be discussed include professional attitude and ethics, safety methods and disposal of dangerous chemicals, storage and maintenance of chemicals and reagents, keeping and record, use of laboratory plastics and glasses, sterilization and disinfection, principle of quality management, receiving and managing specimens. Students will also be trained in using and maintenance of laboratory equipments such as micropipette, centrifuge, pH meter, balances, spectrophotometer and other common laboratory analytical instruments. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Bishop M.L., Schoeff L.E. and Fody E.P., (2004). Clinical Chemistry-Principles, Procedures & Correlations (5th. Ed.). Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins. Burtis C.A., Ashwood E.R. and Bruns D.E., Tietz Textbook of Clinical Chemistry and Molecular Diagnostics (4th Ed.). Elsevier Science, 2005. 95 3. 4. Kaplan L.A., Pesce A.J. and Kazmierczak, S. (2002). Clinical Chemistry: Theory, Analysis, Correlation (5th. Ed.). Delmar Learning. Ramnik Sood, Textbook of Medical Laboratory Technology (2006). India: Jaypee Brothers. GTB107/3-Epidemiology This course aims to provide a comprehensive introduction to the principles and methods of epidemiology. Discussions will begin with explanation on the causes of disease with special emphasis on environmental factors that explain how epidemiology can be used for the prevention of disease and for health promotion, including environmental and occupational health. The course will provide students with the knowledge on how to best use suitable epidemiological study design for evaluation of health programs. Students are also encouraged to develop health skills within the clinical epidemiological framework. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Last, R. (1996). Kesihatan Awam dan Ekologi Manusia (Terjemahan: Wan Abdul Manan, Rusli Nordin, Abdul Manaf Hamid & Noor Hidayah Ishak) Pulau Pinang: Penerbit USM. Timmreck, T.C. (2002). Introduction to Epidemiology (3rd ed.). MA: Jones & Bartlett Publishers, Inc. Wasserheil-Smoller, S. (2004). Biotatistics and Epidemiology: A Primer for Health Professionals (3rd ed.). New York : Springer Verlag. GTF103/3-Physical Chemistry This course exposes students to properties of gas and liquid, matter state principles, gas kinetic theory, chemical kinetic and chemistry thermodynamic. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. P. Atkins and J. D. Paula, Physical Chemistry, 8th Ed, Oxford University Press, 2006. R. J. Silbey, R. A. Alberty and M. G. Bawendi, Physical Chemistry, 4th Ed., John Wiley, 2004. D. B. Ball, Physical Chemistry, 1st Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2003. J. Laider, J. H. Meiser and B. C. Sanctuary, Physical Chemistry, 4th Ed., Houghton Mifflin Co., 2003. N. Levine, Physical Chemistry, 5th Ed., McGraw Hill, 2002. GTF104/3-Inorganic Chemistry This course exposes students to various topics on basic chemistry including stoichiometry, atomic structures, nuclear chemistry, periodic table, chemical bonding and properties of matters. 96 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Hoasecroft and A. G. Shaspe, Inorganic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2004. G. L. Miessler and D. A. Tarr, Inorganic Chemistry, 3rd Ed., Prentice-Hall, 2003. T. L. Brown, H. E. LeMay, B. E. Bursten and J. R. Burdge, Chemistry: The Central Science, 9th Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2003. R. H. Petrucci, W. S. Harwood and F. G. Herring, General Chemistry: Principles and Modern Applications, 8th Ed., Prentice-Hall, Inc., New Jersey, 2002. GTF105/2-General Chemistry Practical I This course exposes students to general chemistry practical such as basic laboratory techniques, identification of substances based on physical properties, separation of component mixture, chemical formula, gravimetric analysis of chloride salt, paper chromatography for separation of cations and dyes, acid-base titration, salt hydrolysis and pH of buffer solutions, determination of the dissociation constant of a weak acid and determination of solubility-product constat for sparingly soluble salts. List of text/reference books: 1. J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments – Chemistry: The Central Science, 11th. Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2009. GTF106/3-Analytical Chemistry I This course exposes students to basic knowledge on chemical análysis which covers concentration expression, statistic for analytical chemistry, chemical equilibrium, acidbase equilibrium, acid-base titration and titration, complexometry titration, gravimetry analysis, precipitation titration, redoxs equilibrium and redox titration. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. D. A. Skoog, D. M. West, F. J. Holler and S. R. Crouch, Fundamentals of Analytical Chemistry, 8th Edn., Thomson Brooks/ Cole, 2004. G. D. Christian, Analytical Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2004. D. B. Harvey, Modern Analytical Chemistry, International Ed., Mc-Graw Hill, 2000. 97 GTF107/3-Organic Chemistry I This course introduces the students to the origin of organic chemistry and to study the basic concepts of electronic structure and bonding, structures and properties of organic molecules, chemistry of hydrocarbons, alkane, cycloalkane, alkene and alkyne. The course provides the study of chemical reactions in organic chemistry and stereochemistry. This course also provides the knowledge of alkyl halide and nucleophilic substitution and elimination reactions. Main references supporting this course: 1. 2. 3. L.G. Wade. Jr., Organic Chemsitry, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013. T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 10th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2011. J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008. Additional references supporting the course: 1. 2. J. E. McMurry,“Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008. P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007. GTF108/2-General Chemistry Practical II This course exposes students to general chemistry practical which is continued from GTF105-General Chemistry Practical I. It covers chemical reactions, analysis of aspirin, chemical equilibrium: Le Chatelier Principle, gravimetric determination of phosphorus in plant food, chemical reactions of copper and percent yield, chemicals in everyday life : what are they and how do we know?, colorimetric determination of an equilibrium instant in aqueous solution, oxidation-reduction titration II : Analysis of bleach, activity serried and titration curres of polyprotic acids. List of text/reference books: 1. J.H.Nelson and K.C. Kemp, Laboratory Experiments – Chemistry: The Central Science, 11th Ed., Pearson Education Inc., 2009. GTJ101/4-Nursing Foundation 1 This course comprises of three components: (1) history and nursing development; (2) practice and nursing focus; and (3) health assessment and nursing process. History and nursing development provides students with introduction to basic nursing, including the roles of the nurse, philosophy of the nursing practice and nursing education, nursing history, development of the nursing profession at the national and international level, Malaysian health care system, traditional health systems, transcultural nursing, evidenced based practice, as well as legal and ethical issues in nursing practice. 98 Practice and nursing focus introduces students to the theories and principles of nursing, basic theories and primary dynamic health concepts. These theories are foundations to the other courses in years 2, 3 and 4. These are practiced in the hospitals, community and home in a holistic manner. The focus is on critical thinking, problem solving and use of nursing process within the nursing context. Health assessment and nursing process focus on the practical aspects of basic nursing such as history taking, health assessment, formulating nursing diagnosis, implementing nursing actions, and evaluation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. (2008), Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts, Process and Practice. (8th ed). USA: New Jersey, Pearson. Wilkinson, J. M. & Leuven, K. V. (2007). Fundamentals of Nursing: Thinking and doing. Philadelphia: F. A. Davis Publishers. Smith, S. F., Duel, D. J., & Martin, B. C. (2008). Clinical Nursing Skills. New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. GTJ108/2-Health Communication and Education This course exposes students to various topics on basic knowledge of health promotion. Students will be introduced to the concepts and resources particularly concern the role of health promoter in health promotion, education and communication in the context of national health care system. Knowledge delivery of health promotion will be further extended to the strategy identification, designing, planning, management, research, material development and testing, monitoring and evaluation of the related health promotion programs introduce nationwide. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Butler, J Thomas, Principles of Health Education and Health Promotion, 3rd Ed., Wadsworth, 2001. Hornik, Robert C. (Ed.), Public Health Communication : Evidence for Behaviour Change ; Lauren Earlbaum Associates, Publishers : London, 2002. Lawrence W. Green, Marshall Kreuter, Health Program Planning: An Education and Ecological Approach, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill Companies Inc. , 2005 GTK101/3-Introduction To Environmental And Occupational Health This course exposes students to the areas of environmental health, occupational health, environmental safety, and occupational safety. The importance of responsibility and civil liberties of an individual towards the environment will be discussed. The implication and significant of nurturing environmental and occupational health will also be highlighted. 99 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Megan., Environment, Health And Sustainable. Open University Press; London, 2006. Harper C. L., Environment And Society; Human Perspectives On Environmental Issues, Upper Saddle River; Pearson Prentice Hall, 2004. Yassri A., Kjellstrom T., Theo de Kok & Guidotti T., Basic Environmental Health. Oxford University Press; New York, 2001. GTK102/3-Environmental And Occupational Health: Ecological Perspectives This course exposes students to basic ecological components (e.g., abiotic, biotic, physical, and social). The students are taught the compatibility between human health with those basic ecological components and be aware of how the latter affects human health. The impact of destabilise basic components with respect to human health will also be further discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hilgenkamp K., Environmental Health: Ecological Perspectives, Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2006. Molles M. C. Jr., Ecology. Concepts And Application, 2nd ed. McGraw Hill, 2002. Marten G. G., Human Ecology: Basic Concepts For Sustainable Development, Earthscan Publications Limited, 2001. GTK103/3-Biodiversity The course introduces students to major phyllums of organisms in earth. Emphasis is given to differentiate the organisms based on their distinct characteristics. The importance of interspecific interactions and its surroundings will be highlighted. At end of this course, students will be able to identify various organism living in their neighbourhood and be more conscious on activities that destroys earth biodiversity. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Levin S. A., Encyclopedia Of Biodiversity, (E-Book), 2007. Mader S. S., Inquiry Into Life, 10th edition. McGraw-Hill, 2003. Shiva V., Tomorrow's Biodiversity, London: Thames and Hudson, 2000. Andesirk T & Andesirk G., Biology: Life On Earth, Prentice-Hall, 1999. GTN101/3-Food Science This course introduces students to foods and the different kinds of fundamental changes in food as a result of food processing. It will focus on the scientific aspects of food research. The basic knowledge of foods will be taught through theoretical and practical aspects of food science. 100 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Amy Brown, Understanding Food: Principles & Preparation, 2nd Ed., Thomson Wardsworth Pub., 2004. Mehas KY, Rodgers SL, Food Science: Biochemistry of Food and Nutrition, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill Companies, 2002. Norman N. Potter, Joseph H. Hotchkiss, Food Science, 5th Ed., Aspen Publishers, Inc., 1998. GTP101/2-Child Language Development This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures on language development. It focuses on the acquisition and development of language among normal children. The topics covered are theories of language acquisition and language development processes in terms of language components i.e. semantics, syntax, morphology, phonology and pragmatics. Relationship between language development and other relevant aspects such as social and cognitive development are also covered in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Owens, R.E., Language Development: An Introduction, 7th Ed., Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2008. McLaughlin, S., Introduction to Language Development, London: Singular Publishing Group, 2006. Hoff, E., Language Development, 3rd Ed., Stamford: Wadsworth Press, 2005. GTP102/2-Basic Linguistics This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures to linguistics. It focuses on the fundamental knowledge in linguistics such as phonetics, phonology, morphology, syntax, semantic and pragmatics. Applied linguistics such as sociolinguistics and dialectology will be also covered in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Tallerman, M., Understanding Syntax, 2nd Ed., London: Arnold, 2005. Nik Safiah, K., Farid, M. O. & Hashim, M., Tatabahasa Dewan. Kuala Lumpur: Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka, 2003. Mukhlis, A. B., Pengantar Sintaksis dan Semantik Bahasa Melayu. Singapura: Pustaka Nasional Pte. Ltd., 2002. 101 GTP103/2-Introduction to Clinical Audiology and Speech-Language Pathology This is an orientation course which provides initial exposure to the clinical aspects of audiology and speech pathology. It focuses on the common procedures and managements in audiology or speech therapy. The topics covered are scope of practice of the audiologists and the speech pathologist. Assessment and management procedures for audiology and speech pathology cases are highlighted. This course also emphasises the theoretical and application aspects of observation skills. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lubinski, R., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, 3rd Ed., Oxford: Singular Press, 2007. Flasher, L. V, & Fogel, P. T., Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist and Audiologist, Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004. Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication Sciences and Disorders: From Science to Clinical Practice, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2010. GTP104/3-Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing This is a theoretical course that gives initial exposures to the field of psychology. It focuses on the developmental psychology of the human from prenatal to late adulthood. The topics covered include theories in developmental psychology and human development in relation to biological, cognitive, personality and social asprects. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bremner, G. & Slater, A., Introduction to Developmental Psychology, Oxford: Blackwell, 2003. Papalia, D. E. & Olds, S. W., Human Development, 8th Ed., New York: McGrawHill, 2008. Ulijaszek, S. J., Johnson, F. E. & Preece, M. A., The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Human Growth and Development , Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000. GTS101/2-Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science The course introduces the student to the scientific discipline known as Exercise and Sports Science through the exposure to the history and consequently to the latest knowledge and the application of current technology in the field. Students will be exposed to the basic and the sub-disciplines of exercise and sports science. The course will also introduce students to the characteristic, employment and career opportunities available in this are of expertise. 102 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Brown, S. P., Introduction to Exercise Sciences, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000. Lumpkin, A., Introduction to Physical Education, Exercise Science and Sports Activities, McGrawHill Book Co., 2002. Senn, A., Power, Politics and the Olympic Games, Champaign, IL : Human Kinetics, 1999. GTS102/3-Sociology and Philosophy of Sports This course provides the students with the basic concepts in sociology and the philosophy of sports. In addition, there will be discussions and considerations on the sociological and philosophical implications of previous and current development in the field of sports. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coakley, J., Sport in Society: Issues and Controversies, Columbus, OH: McGrawHill, 2001. Kretchmar, R. S., Practical Philosophy of Sport and Physical Activity, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Morgan, W. J., Ethics in Sport, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2007. GTU101/3-Structure and Function of Humans I This course discusses aspects of basic anatomy including the terminologies related to cell structures, primary tissues and human organ systems from the macro and micro perspectives. Emphasis will be directed towards the anatomical and physiological aspects of the various human organ systems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Barbara Herlihy, B. (2006). The human body in health and illness (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company. Marieb, E. N. (2008). Anatomy & physiology coloring workbook: A complete study guide, (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings. Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N. (2008). Human Anatomy & Physiology (7th Ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. Sembulingam K. & Prema Sembulingam (2004). Essentials of medical physiology (3rd Ed.). India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H. (2008). Principles of anatomy and physiology (12th Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Young, B. & Heath,J.W. (2006). Wheater’s functional histology: A text and color atlas (5th Ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. 103 GTU103/3-Fundamentals of Health Informatics The fundamental of health informatics course will introduce students to the concept and application of information and communication technology (ICT) in the field of health sciences. Students will be exposed to latest ICT technology, technology application in health sciences, security and usage procedure, and introduction to data structure. To create more understanding of applied health informatics, students will be exposed to practical applications, covering topics of computer basic such as E-learning System, Windows XP, Mac OS X, Office Suite Application (Word Processor, Presentation and Spreadsheet); website development, graphic and animation editing applications. For group project, students will be assigned to a project based on their understanding on health informatics (HI) describing a scenario of using HI in healthcare delivery List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Abdullah Embong (2000). Sistem Pangkalan Data, Konsep Asas, Reka Bentuk dan Pelaksanaan. Malaysia: Tradisi Ilmu. Englebard & Nelson (2002). Health Care Informatics An Interdisciplinary Approach. Edinburgh: Mosby. Gary B. S, et al. (2005). Discovering Computers. A Gateway to Information, Complete, Shelly Cashman Series, Course Technology. GTU104/3-Structure and Function of Humans II This course concentrates on the various anatomical and physiological aspects of the respiratory, urinary, gastrointestinal, endocrine and reproductive systems as well as the skin. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Barbara Herlihy, B. (2006). The human body in health and illness (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia: W.B. Saunders Company. Marieb, E. N. (2008). Anatomy & physiology coloring workbook: A complete study guide, (9th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings. Marieb, E.N. & Hoehn, K.N. (2008). Human Anatomy & Physiology (7th Ed.). San Francisco: Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. Sembulingam K. & Prema Sembulingam (2004). Essentials of medical physiology (3rd Ed.). India: Jaypee Brothers Medical Publishers. Tortora, G.J. & Derrickson, B.H. (2008). Principles of anatomy and physiology (12th Ed.). New York: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Young, B. & Heath,J.W. (2006). Wheater’s functional histology: A text and color atlas (5th ed.). Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone. 104 GTU105/3-Psychology and Behavioural Science This course provides students with basic theoretical knowledge and principles of psychology and behavioural sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coon D. (2007). Intoduction to Psychology (10th Ed.). San Francisco: Wadsworth. Schwartz, B. and Robbins, S. J. (1996). Psychology of Learning & Behavior (4th Ed.). NW: W. W. Norton & Company. Wedding, D., Their, S.O. and Daschle T. (2001). Behaviour and Medicine (3rd Ed.). NY: Hogrefe & Huber Publishers. GTU106/3-Biochemistry and Basic Genetics This course discusses the structures and the functions of cellular organelles. The focus will be towards the characteristics, synthesis and biomolecular metabolism, which includes carbohydrates, nucleic acids, lipids, proteins and vitamins and also the characteristics and the role of enzymes in the regulation of metabolism. The second part of the course will introduce basic genetics, which includes the structure and functions of DNA and RNA as the genetic materials, transcription and translation, structure and chromosomal organizations, Mendel’s Law and other traits inheritance. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Boyer, R. (2006). Concepts in Biochemistry (3rd Ed.). NJ: John Wiley & Sons Inc. Devlin, T.M. (2002). Textbook of Biochemistry : With Clinical Correlations (5th Ed.). New York, NY: Wiley-Liss. Horton, H.A. (2006). Principles of Biochemistry (4th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ : Prentice Hall. Mckee, T. & McKee, J.R. (2003). Biochemistry: The Molecular Basis of Life. Boston: McGraw-Hill. Murray, R.K., Granner, D.K., Mayes, P.A., & Rodwell, V.W. (eds.). (2000). Harper's Biochemistry (25th Ed.). Stamford: Lange Medical Publication. Zubay, G.L. (1998). Biochemistry (4th ed.). Dubuque: Wm. C. Brown Publishers. GTX101/3-Introduction to Medical Radiation This course introduces students to ionising and non-ionising radiation and their use in medical science and effects on general population including properties and spectrum of electromagnetic radiation It also provides knowledge regarding historical background and modern concept of atom including its quantum mechanical model and sub-atomic particles. Radioactivity, types of radioactive decays and production and use of 105 radionuclides in medicine will be taught. Types and production of x-rays and interaction of x-ray and gamma ray with matter and living being are also covered in this course. Students will be exposed to the production of non-ionising radiations such as infrared, short wave, microwave, ultrasound, lasers and their use in medicine. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bushberg, J.T. and et al, The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging: 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. John Low and Ann Reed, Electrotherapy Explained Principles and Practice, 3rd Ed, Elsevier Ltd, 2000. William E Prentice and William S Quillen, Therapeutic Modalities in Rehabilitation, 3rd Ed, Mc Graw Hill, 2005. GTX102/3-Mathematics of Radiation Science This course discusses advanced mathematics and calculus. It will focus on function and graph, advance function and equality solution, advance geometry, matrix, vector, complex number, limit and the use of first principles in polynomial differentiation, differentiation, differentiation techniques and applications, integration, advance differentiation and integration. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lay, D. C., Linear Algebra and Its Application, 3rd. Ed., Pearson Higher Education, 2002. Anton, H., Calculus, Combined, Student Resource, 6th Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 1998. Larson, R., Calculus with Analytic Geometry, 7th Ed., Houghton Mifflin Company College Division, 2002. GTX103/3-Medical Radiation Physics I This course discusses basic concepts of classical physics and relativity. The topics include kinematics and motion, forces, work and kinetic energy, potential energy and conservation of energy, impulse and linear momentum, rotation, static equilibrium and relativity. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, 8th Ed., Wiley, 2007. Tippens, P.E., Physics, 7th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007. Giancoli, D. C., Physics: Principles with Applications, 6th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2004. 106 5.2. Core Courses Level 200 107 GTA201/2-Audiology Instrumentation This course discusses instrumentations used in audiology such as sound level meter, tympanometer and audiometer. It also covers room acoustics for audiological tests, factors which affect sound level meter measurement and utility, types of microphone, audiometer block diagram, the function and standards of each component of calibrator (artificial mastoid) in audiometer calibration will also be discussed. Introduction to other audiological instrumentations are also discussed in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009. Martin, F. N., and Clark, J. G., Introduction to Audiology, 8th Ed., Reading: Allyn & Bacon, 2003. GTA202/3-Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques This course introduces students to psychoacoustics that relates to hearing science. Basic theories of immitance audiometry, pure tone audiometry, and speech audiometry will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals. 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Hepfner, S. T., The Audiogram Workbook, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 1998. Villchur, E., Acoustics for Audiologists, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. GTA203/3-Advanced Audiology Technique This course discusses detailed audiological tests in diagnosing organic and non-organic hearing impairment and balance disorders. The related issues in audiological tests and reports writing of hearing tests results will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. Bess, F. H., Audiology: The Fundamentals, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. 108 2. 3. Roeser, R. J., Valente, M., & Hosfod-Dunn, H., Audiology. Diagnosis, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 2007. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009. GTA204/2-Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening This course exposes students to case management in audiology clinic via observation and lectures related to basic clinical management such as, report-writing, code of ethics, and their responsibility. It also discusses the concepts of hearing screening, its principal, objectives and methods of screening tests of all stages of life, including the needs of conducting hearing screening test at industrial sector. The sensitivity and specificity, advantages and disadvantages of each test, factors affecting test, and the differences between screening and diagnostic test are also discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Roush, J. (ed.), Screening for Hearing Loss and Otitis Media in Children, 1st Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2001. Spivak, L. G., Universal Newborn Hearing Screening, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, Inc., 1998. GTA205/2-Neurology for Hearing and Speech This course introduces basic neurology related to hearing, balance, speech and language. The topics will be discussed include neuroaudiology and neurology related to speech and language. It also discusses the neurological diseases related to hearing, balance, speech and language aspects. The topics include neuroaudiology and neurology related to speech and language. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Berlin, C. I. (ed.), Neurotransmission and Hearing Loss: Basic Science, Diagnosis, and Management, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1997. Love, J. R., and Webb, W. G., Neurology for the Speech Pathologist, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2001. Musiek, F. E., Baran, J. A., and Pinheiro, M. L., Neuroaudiology: Case Studies, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1994. 109 GTA206/2-Otology This course includes the pathological processes, clinical symptoms, diagnostic algorithm and protocol, and of management otological disorders. This course also discusses clinical otology, hearing assessment, outer, middle, and inner ear pathologies, tinnitus, vertigo, sudden hearing loss, presbycusis and congenital deafness. Students will be given the opportunity to practice otoscopy, voice test, tuning fork test and exposure to patients at Otolarinolaringology (ORL) clinic. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Browning, G. G., Clinical Otology and Audiology, 2nd Ed., Oxford: Butterworth Heinemann, 1998. Berlin, C. I., and Keats, B. J. B., Genetics and Hearing Loss, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Rockeinstein, M. J., Comprehenssive Review of Otolaryngology, Philadephia: Elsevier, Inc., 2004. GTA207/2-Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System This course discusses electrophysiological tests for auditory system. A variety of electrophysiological tests will be introduced including both theory and practical. Students are also exposed to knowledge about factors affecting accuracy of the test results. The relationship between the test results and ear pathology will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hall, J. W., Handbook of Otoacoustic Emissions, 1st Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Hall, J. W., New Handbook of Auditory Evoked Responses, Boston, Mass: Pearson, 2007. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2009. GTB204/3-Molecular Biology Techniques This course introduces the students to basic techniques, principles as well as the application of molecular biology technologies in research and medicine. Topics that are covered include chromosomal structure, gene expression and regulation, extraction and purification of nucleic acids, DNA and protein analysis, restriction endonucelease and other enzymes in molecular biology, gene cloning and libraries, the concept of Southern, Northern and Western blotting, bacterial transformation and amplification methods such as PCR, LCR, SDA etc. The other advanced components of this course will also discuss the emerging research fields of Regulatory RNAs, Genomic Imprinting, Systems Biology and give particular focus on RNAi, microRNAs, the opportunities offered by the new generation of genome technologies and the elucidation of gene regulatory networks. 110 Basic laboratory training in extraction of nucleic acids and protein expression will be given. Students will also be exposed to latest molecular biology techniques such as PCR, rt-PCR, quantitative-PCR, EMSA and Microarray. All students will be trained to use various bioinformatics software applications related to Genomics & Proteomics such as BioEdit, DNAsis, OLIGO etc. via a compulsary Cloning Simulation Project’ exercise. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Dale, J. W. & Park, S. F. (2004). Molecular Genetics of Bacteria (4th Ed.). West Sussex: John Wiley and Sons. Primrose, S. B. & Twyman, R. M. (2006). Principles of Gene Manipulation and genomics (7th Ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Scientific Publications. Ream, W. & Field K. G. (2008). Molecular Biology Techniques: An Intensive Laboratory Course. Vikas. E-Book. Sambrook, J. & Russell, D. (2001). Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual (3rd Ed.). USA: Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press. Watson, J. D. & Bell, S. P. (2008). Molecular Biology of the Gene (6th Ed.). San Francisco: Pearson Benjamin Cummings. GTB212/3-Basic Microbiology This course introduces students to basic principles in microbiology, which covers bacteria, viruses, fungi and parasites. Topics which will be discussed, include microbial diversity, genetics, physiology, biochemistry and metabolism, reproduction and control of microorganisms, microbial interactions, medically important organisms in human diseases, nosocomial infection, and antimicrobial therapy and resistant. Basic practical skills such as staining methods, culture techniques and microscopy will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Black, J.G. (2005). Microbiology: Principles and Explorations (6th Ed.). New York: John Wiley & sons, Inc. Talaro, K.P. (2008). Foundations in Microbiology. (6th Ed.). New York: McGrawHill Companies. Tortora, G.J., Case. C, C.L, and Funke, B.R. (2003).Microbiology: An Introduction (8th Ed.). Benjamin Cummings Publishing Co. Willey, J.M., Sherwood, L.M, and Woolverton, C.J. (2008). Prescott, Harley, and Klein’s Microbiology (7th Ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill Companies. 111 GTB217/2-Imunology I This course describes the basic concepts in immunology which include the concept of immunity and the immune response. Description of the types of lymphoid tissues and cells, the characteristics, types and functions of various molecules such as immunoglobulins, cytokines and the various components of the complement system as well as immune cells such as B and T lymphocytes will also be addressed. In addition, the concepts of antigen, immunogen, antigenicity and immunogenicity, as well as the importance of vaccination (immunization) and the basic concept of immunopathology will be described. The use of antigen-antibody interactions in diagnosis will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Clancy, J. (2006). Basic Concepts in Immunology. Boston: McGraw Hill. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. (2001). Immunobiology: The Immune System in Health and Disease (5th ed.). New York: Garland Publishing Co. Levinson, W. and Jawetz, E. (2002). Medical Microbiology & Immunology (7th Ed.) Boston: McGraw Hill. Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. and Roitt, I. (2006). Immunology (7th Ed.). Edinburgh:Mosby Sompayrac, L. (2008). How the Immune System Works (3rd Ed.). Oxford: Blackwell Sciences. Inc. Stanley, J. (2002). Essentials of Immunology and Serology. USA: Delmar, Thomson Learning. GTB218/3-Immunology II This course encompasses advanced concepts in immunology particularly from the molecular immunological point of view. The involvement of immunological mechanisms in various diseases such as autoimmune diseases, immunodeficiency, HIV infection, transplantation and tumour immunology will be discussed. The students will also be exposed to the priciples and immunological methods such as immunoprecipitation and agglutination reactions, ELISA, immunofluorescence, immunoenzymatic staining and flow cytometry as well as the production and use of monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies. Students will undergo a short placement in the Immunology Laboratory (School of Medical Sciences) to expose them to the actual situation in a diagnostic immunology laboratory. 112 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Abbas, A.K., Lichtman, A.H. and Pober, J.S. (2003). Cellular and Molecular Immunology (5th Ed.). Philadelphi: W.B. Saunders, Co. Janeway, C.A., Travers, P., Walport, M. and Shlomchik, M. (2001). Immunobiology:The Immune System in Health and Disease (5th Ed.). New York: Garland Publishing Co. Levinson, W. and Jawetz, E. (2002). Medical Microbiology & Immunology (7th ed.). Boston: McGraw Hill. Male, D., Brostoff, J., Roth, D.B. and Roitt, I. (2006). Immunology (7th Ed.). Edinburgh: Mosby. Parslow, T.C., Stites, D.P., Terr, A.L., and Inbode, J.B. (2001). Medical Immunology (10th Ed.). New York: Lange Medical Books. Stanley, J. (2002). Essentials of Immunology and Serology. USA: Delmar, Thomson Learning. GTB219/3-Pharmacology I This course exposes students to the basic principles of Pharmacology including pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics and relationships between chemical structure and activity of drugs. Aspects of cellular pharmacology and biochemical pharmacology are also included. Some areas of systemic pharmacology (autonomic, cardiovascular, respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine, antimicrobials, central nervous system, anticoagulants and antiinflamation) will also be addressed. Methods of assessing effects of drugs and measurements of blood levels using the latest techniques of chemical analysis will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katzung, B.G. (2003). Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (9th Ed.). NY: McGrawHill Co. Rang and Dale (2007). Pharmacology (6th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone. Tripathi, K.D. (2008). Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (6th Ed.). India: Jaypee brothers Medical publishers (P) Ltd. GTB220/3-Medical Bacteriology This course provides the students with knowledge on general characteristics of medically important bacteria, the role of organisms in disease and health, the source, reservoirs and transmission of bacterial diseases and its pathogenesis. This course will also provide the students with skills in handling and processing of clinical specimens and various techniques in the identification of pathogenic bacteria (staining, culture, serology, molecular) and the advantages and limitations of these techniques. Knowledge and techniques related to laboratory procedures - antibiotic sensitivity test, serological tests, rapid diagnosis and tests for bacterial infections will also be taught. 113 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Betty, A. F., Daniel, F. S. & Alice, S. W. (2007). Bailey & Scott’s Diagnostic Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press. Cheesbrough, M. (2006). District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part 2 (2nd Ed.) U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press. Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M. (2007). Jawetz, Melnick & Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) USA: Mc Graw Hill. Gerald, L. M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D. (2010). Mandell, Douglas, and Bennett’s Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone. Maria, D.D (1997). Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby. GTB221/3-Basic Haematology This course introduces the students to theoretical and practical concepts of basic hematology which include structure and function of blood cells and blood components, hematopoiesis, ferrous metabolism, vitamin B12 and folate metabolism, red cell metabolism and haemostasis. Particular emphasis will be given to a few important basic concepts such as haemoglobin synthesis, structure and function of blood cells, introduction to anemia. The students will also be exposed to basic haematological tests, laboratory management and intrumentations used in a hematology laboratory. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harmening D.M. (2008). Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasi, (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: F.A. Davis Co. Lewis S.M., Bain B.J. and Bates I. (2007). Dacie and Lewis Practical Haematology (10th Ed.). Philadelphia:Elsevier Science. Rodak B.F., Fritsma G.A. and Doig K. (2007). Hematology: Clinical Principles and Applications (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:Elsevier Science. GTB222/4-Pathology This course introduces the students to basic pathological processes including tissue damaging agents, cell injury, adaptations, inflammation, wound healing, haemodynamic disturbances and neoplasm. Pathological investigative procedures such as preparation and fixation of tissues, processing of tissues, slicing of the processed tissues with microtome and staining techniques including routine, special and immunostains will be covered. The students will also gain basic knowledge on cytological and museum techniques. Students will also be exposed to actual working environment through practical classes in Biomedicine laboratory of School of Health sciences and short attachments at the Pathology Laboratory of the School of Medical Sciences. 114 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Abbas, K., Aster, F., Robbins and Cotran Pathologic (2010). Basis of Disease (8th Ed.). Philadelphia: Saunders, Elsevier. Bancroft J.D. and Gamble M. (2002). Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques (5th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone. Cheesbrough, M. (1987) , Medical Laboratory Manual for Tropical Countries (2nd Ed.), MA: ELBS and Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd. Culling, C.F.A., R.T.Allison. and W.T. Barr. (1985). Cellular Pathology Technique (4th Ed.). MA: Butterworths & Co.Ltd. Damjanov, I. (2000). Pathology for Health-Related Professions (2nd Ed.). Philadelphia: Elsevier - Health Sciences Division. Manual of Histological and Histochemical Methods, Dept of Pathology, PPSP, USM. Young, B., Lowe, J.S., Stevens, A. and Heath, J.W. Wheater’s Functional Histolog: A Text and Colour Atlas (5th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier 2006. GTB224/2-Laboratory Animal Sciences The course provides opportunities for students to learn the basic knowledge of anatomy and physiology, care, safety and management of laboratory animals. Students will also be introduced to rules and ethical issues involving laboratory animal in research and teaching. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. The UFAW Handbook on the care and Management of Laboratory Animals, Volume 1&2 (7th Ed.) Oxford: Blackwell Sciences Ltd , 1999. Hillyer E.V. and Quesenberry K.E., Ferrets (1997). Rabbits and Rodents Clinical Medicine and Surgery, W.B. Saunders Company. Fox J.G., Cohen B.J. and Loew F.M. (1984). Laboratory Animal Medicine, American Collage of Laboratory Animal Medicine Series. Smith J.B. and Mangkoewidjojo S. (1987). The Care, Breeding and Management of Experimental Animals for Research in the Tropics, International Development Program of Australian Universities and Colleges Limited Incorporated in the A.C.T. GTD211/2-Dietetics Skills and Communication This course focuses on the theoretical and practical aspects of dietetics and communication skills. This course will also enhance individual skills in communicating with individual clients and a group of clients both verbally and in written form, establishing rapport with the health care team, obtaining and evaluating food records, planning menus, using relevant equations for the determining of calories, documention of nutritional care process using the SOAP and ADIME formats and other educational tools. 115 This course also exposes students to many activities such as development of educational tools, conducting mock diet interviews, case presentations, case discussions and case report writing. The students will also attend various tutorial sessions emphasing on the aspects of nutritional education and cultural factors which influences the patients’ diet. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bauer, K.D and Sokolik, C.A., Basic Nutrtition Counseling Skills Development, America Wadsworth Group, 2002. Alpers, D.H., Stenson, W.F. and Bier, D.M., Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 4th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2008. Winterfeldt, E.A. Bogle, M.L and Lea L. Dietetics : Practical and Future Trends, Wadsworth Publisher Co. 2005. GTF200/3-Criminalistics The course introduces the students to the basic elements of Forensic Sciences. It provides fundamental information on crime scene and collection and preservation of evidence. It also describes the different types of impression evidence such as finger prints, foot prints, tool marks, and tyre prints used in identification of individuals and objects. A brief account on trace evidence materials like dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included. Introductory topics on DNA evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned documents also form part of the syllabus. The students are also taught photographic techniques, digital cameras, and uses of invisible radiation in crime detection. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Brian H. Kaye, Science and the Detective, VCH, New York, 1995. Max M. Houck and Jay A-Siegel, Fundamentals of Forensic Science, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 2010. Stuart H. James and John J. Nordly, Forensic Science, CRC Press 2009. GTF203/2-Introduction to Criminology This course introduces students to basic concepts and theories of criminology. The knowledge would enable students to understand issues and problems in various crimes including juvenile, environment, media technology and institutions. Students are also exposed to various psychometrics for criminal profiling. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Siegel, L.J (2012), Criminology : Theories, Patterns and Typologies, (11th Ed.), CA : Nadworth. Doerner, W.G and Lab, S.P (2011), Victimology (6th Ed.), Anderson. Berkan, S.E (2011), Criminology : A Sociological Understanding, (5th Ed.), Prentice Hall. 116 GTF204/4-Forensic Psychology This course discusses areas relating to behavioural aspects and human cognitive in crime from the perspectives of perpetrators and victims. Discussions will be concentrated on multifarious forms of crimes, juvenile issues, and adult criminals. The role of forensic psychologists, connections between psychology and law, the use of psychological measurements, treatment and rehabilitation will also be clarified. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Wrightsman L.S, Linsenman M, Taflinger M, Forensic Psychology, 1st Ed., Wadsworth Publishing, 2000. Baldwin, J.D. and Baldwin, J.I., Behaviour Principles in Everyday Life, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 1997. Turvey B., Criminal Profiling – An Introduction to Behavioral Evidence Analysis, Academic Press, London, 2002. GTF205/3-Analytical Chemistry II This course exposes students to analytical chemistry knowledge that has not been covered in Analytical Chemistry I which include spectrochemistry topics such as introduction to spectrochemistry methods, instrumentation of optical spectrometry, molecular absorption spectrometry, molecular flouresence spectroscopy and atomic spectroscopy. The students are also introduced to absorbtion methods which include an introduction of solvent extraction, gas chromatography and high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC). Under electrochemistry methods, students are exposed to potentiometry and voltammetry. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Niessen, W. M. Liquid Chromatography--Mass Spectrometry 3rd Ed., Boca Raton: CRC/Taylor & Francis, 2006. Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications, 3rd Ed., West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007. Welz, B. Atomic Absorption Spectrometry 3rd Ed. Weinheim: Wiley-VCH (1999). Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel Dekker, 2004. Robert, L. G. and Eugene, F. B. Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography 4th ed. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley-Interscience, 2004. Lough, W. J. and Wainer, I. W. High Performance Liquid Chromatography: Fundamental, Principles and Practice, London: Blackie Academic & Professional, 1996. Smyth, M. R. Analytical Voltammetry. John Wiley, 2007. Gosser, D. K. Cyclic Voltammetry Simulation and Analysis of Reaction Mechanisms Weinheim: VCH, 1993. 117 GTF206/3-Organic Chemistry II This course exposes students to aromacity, reactions of benzene and substituted benzenes, reactions of carbonyl compounds (carboxylic acids and their derivatives, aldehydes and ketones) with oxygen and nitrogen nucleophiles, carbon nucleophiles and the hydride ion. It also covers the identification of organic compounds using mass spectrometry, infrared spectroscopy, ultraviolet/visible spectroscopy and NMR. Main references supporting this course: 1. 2. 3. L.G. Wade. Jr., Organic Chemsitry, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013. T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 10th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2011. J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008. Additional references supporting the course: 1. 2. J. E. McMurry,“Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008. P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007. GTF207/2-Analytical Chemistry Practical This course exposes student to various analytical chemistry practicals such as absorption spectroscopy for determination of iron complex with 1,10-phenanthroline, application of ion selective electrode for determination of sodium and magnesium and also determination of flouride in drink water and toothpaste samples, separation of mixing acid using ion exchange resin, application of infrared spectrometry technique for quantitative analysis of m-xylene dan p-xylene in xylene mixing sample, application of gas chromatography for separation and quantitative identification of a mixing solution of cyclohexane, methylene chloride in toulene, High Performance Liquid Chromatography (HPLC) technique for separation of hydrocarbon mixture, visible spectrometry technique for determination of mole ratio of 1,10-phenanthroline in complex form, atomic absorption spectrometry for determination of calcium, determination of sodium using flame spectroscopy technique, voltammetric determination of lead in water samples and also polarographic determination of ascorbic acid in fruit juice samples. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. James, M. M., Analytical Chemistry in a GMP Environment: A Practical Guide, Wiley. New York, 2000. Niessen, W. M., Liquid Chromatography-Mass Spectrometry 3rd Ed. , 2006. Hoffmann, E. Mass Spectrometry: Principles and Applications, 3rd ed. West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons, Ltd., 2007 Welz, B. Atomic Absorption Spectrometry 3rd Ed., 1999. Marshall, A. G. Fourier Transforms in NMR, Optical, and Mass Spectrometry: A User's Handbook: Elsevier, 1990. 118 6. 7. 8. Aguilar, M. Solvent Extraction and Liquid Membranes. New York: Marcel Dekker, 2004. Jennings, W. Analytical Gas Chromatography, 1987 Robert, L. G. and Eugene, F. B. Modern Practice of Gas Chromatography, 4th Ed. Hoboken, N.J.: Wiley- Interscience, 2004. GTF208/2-Organic Chemistry Practical This course exposes students to organic chemistry practicals such as application of thin layer chromatography and column chromatography for analysis of organic compounds, qualitative analysis of organic compounds, identification of functional groups, distillation of organic samples, gas chromatographic analysis, photo-reduction of benzophenon to benzophinacole, application of high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC) for anaylsis of natural product samples, extraction and crystallation, acid-base properties and transesterification. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. J.A. Landgrebe, Theory and practice in Organic Laboratory with Mieroscole and Standard, Thomson/Wadsworth 2009. Randall G. Engel. George S. Kriz, Gary M. Lampman, Donald L. Pavia, Introduction to Organic Laboratory Techniques. A Small Scale Approach, 3rd Ed., Books/Cole 2011. Lehman, J. W. The Student's Lab Companion: Laboratory Techniques for Organic Chemistry, Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 2004. GTF209/2-Pollutions and Environmental Chemistry This course will cover introduction to the environmental components, environmental act and water quality standard, nutrient and eutrofication, heavy metals, biology oxygen demand (BOD), chemical oxygen demand (COD), meteorology of air contamination, concept of water population, and water contaminants, distribution of air pollutant and environmental forensics. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Daniel, B. B and Edward, A. K. Environmental Science : Earth as a Living Planet. United States of America : John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2005. William, P. C. and Barbara, W. S. Environmental Science: A Global Concern. United States of America : McGraw Hill, 1997. Shradha, S., Manisha, S. and Ranjana, S. A Text Book of Environmental Studies. New Delhi : AITBS Publishers, 2005. Environmental Quality Act 1974 (Act 127) & Subsidiary Legislation. Kuala Lumpur : International Law Book Services (2007). Suzanna, M. I. Environmental Law in Malaysia. Bangi : Penerbit UKM, 2006. 119 6. 7. Winfield, A. Environmental Chemistry, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK, 2000. Roy, M. H. Principles of Environmental Chemistry, RSC Publishing, Cambridge, U.K, 2007. GTF210/3-Material Chemistry This course covers the fundamentals of materials chemistry including principles of materials synthesis and methods of materials characterization. It introduces to students a broad view of how the fundamentals of chemistry are used to create the sophisticated material and devices that improve modern life. Various classes of materials such as solids, organic adn inorganic polymers, glasses and ceramics, metals, alloys, semiconductors, superconductors and composite materials are covered. The course also discusses how different materials are used in science, technology and engineering. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. H.R. Allcock, Introduction to Materials Chemstry, John Wiley & Sons, USA, 2008. P. Gabbott, Principles and Applications of Thermal Analysis, Blackwell Publishing, 2008. J.S. Temenoff and A. G. Mikos, Biomaterials : The Intersection of Biology and Material Science, Pearson International Edition, 2008. GTF211/3-Natural Product Chemistry This course exposes students to natural products. It covers the biosynthesis of natural secondary metabolites. Sythentic pathway of natural products such as acetate, shikimate, mevalonate and alkaloid are introduced using various examples. Development and synthetic works of natural product and its analogues are introduced. This course also explores current developments and future directions in the field of natural products. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Stanforth, S. P., Natural Product Chemistry at a Glance, Blackwell Publishing, 2006. Torssel, K. B. G., Natural Product Chemistry: Mechanic and Biosynthetic Approach to Secondary Metabolism, John Wiley & Sons, 1982. Sarker, S. D. and Nahar, L., Chemistry for Pharmacy Students: General Organic and Natural Product Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, 2007. Hornback, J. M., Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005. 120 GTJ205/4-Nursing Foundation III This course provides basic theoretical and skill components of therapeutic interventions in nursing. The students will learn the concept and technique of asepsis, medication administration, oxygenation, resuscitation, stress management, pain management, perioperative care, wound care, therapeutic diet and counselling. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. (2008), Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts, Process and Practice, 8th ed, Pearson, New Jersey. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical - Surgical Nursing: Critical thinking in client care, (4th ed.), New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A. (2004). Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th ed.). Mosby, USA. GTJ207/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing 11 (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology) This course exposes the students to the theoretical and professional aspects of medicalsurgical nursing practice related to gastrointestinal and renal/urology system. It focuses on the etiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic investigations, medical and surgical management and complications. Students will acquire experience in providing nursing care and health promotion for patients with gastrointestinal and renal/urology disorders in hospital and community. The nursing practice is approached from the wellness-illness continuum and holistic context. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Barbara, K. T. & Nancy, E. S. (2010). Introductory medical-surgical nursing. W. W. Lippincott , Philadelphia. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing: Critical thinking in client care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Smeltzer, S. & Bare. (2004). Brunner and sunddart’s textbook of medical-surgical nursing, (10th. Ed.) J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia GTJ209/3-Nursing Foundation II Nursing Foundation II course helps to develop a strong understanding of the basic nursing care concept in students. Specifically the knowledge and skills related to activity of daily living (ADL). The course caters as the first attempt to general nursing care, which can later enable student to integrate the knowledge and skills gained in this course to other nursing disciplines. 121 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B. & Erb, G. (2008), Fundamental of Nursing: Concepts, Process and Practice, 8th ed, Pearson, New Jersey. deWit, S.C. (2001). Fundamental Concepts and Skills for Nursing. Toronto: W.B. Saunders Company. Delaune, S.C. & Ladner, P.K. (2002). Fundamentals of Nursing: Standards & Practice (2th ed.). Delmar Thomson Learning, USA. GTJ210/3-Primary Health Care, Family and Community This course provides students with knowledge on principles and strategies that is utilised as a framework for primary health care in the community. This course also provides emphasize on the main health care problems and measures used to overcome the problems including communicable disease. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allender, J.A., Rector, C., & Warner, K.D. (2010). Community health nursing: Promoting & protecting the public health (7th ed.). China: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Clark, M.J. (2008). Community health nursing: Advocacy for population health (5th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Maville, J.A., & Huerta, C.G. (2008). Health promotion in nursing (2nd ed.). New York: Thomson Delmar Learning. GTJ211/2-Medical -Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) This course exposes the students to the theoretical and professional aspects of medicalsurgical nursing practice related to cardiovascular and respiratory system. It focuses on the etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, diagnostic investigations, medical and surgical management and complications. Students will acquire experience in providing nursing care and health promotion for patients with cardiovascular and respiratory disorders in hospital and community. The nursing practice is approached from the wellness-illness continuum and holistic context. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing.Ccritical thinking in client care, (4th Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Smeltzer, S. & Bare. (2004). Brunner and Suddarth’s Textbook of MedicalSurgical Nursing, (10th Ed.) J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P..A., (2004), Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th Ed.). Mosby, USA. 122 GTJ212/2-Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing This course introduces student to theory and practical in maternal and newborn care that begins from conception to the postpartum period in hospital and in the home. It assists the student to acquire the necessary elements in providing care to those individuals with conditions related to obstetrics and gynecology List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Beckham C, Ling FW, Barzanksy BM, Herbert WN, Laube DW & Smith RP (2009). Obstetrics and Gynecology, 6 ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Publishers. Coad J & Dunstall M (2005). Anatomy and Physiology for Midwives, Elsevier Ltd., United Kingdom. Towle MA (2009). Maternal-Newborn Nursing Care, Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. GTK201/3-Occupational Health This course introduces students to various safety hazards at workplace. Measures required to minimise risks of work injury due to these hazards will be discussed. Content of this course is streamlined with the content of module IV of the Safety and Health Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH). List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ILBS., Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 dan Peraturan-Peraturan, 2005. ILBS., Undang-Undang Malaysia. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 dan PeraturanPeraturan, 2005. Lingard H. & Rowlinson S. M., Occupational Health And Safety In Construction Project Management, Taylor & Francis, 2005. Manuele F. A., On The Practice Of Safety (3 Ed.). Wiley-IEEE, 2003. Reese C. D., Occupational Health And Safety Management; A Practical Approach. CRC Press, 2003. NIOSH., Keselamatan Pekerjaan. Manual Kursus Pegawai Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan, Modul 4, 2003. GTK202/3-Pollution And Health This course introduces students to the science of water, soil, atmosphere and wavelengths. Students are taught on the quality standards for water, soil, atmosphere and wavelengths. Students are also exposed to strategy of pollution management and steps that can be taken to control and reduce pollution. 123 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Calhoun Y., Water Pollution, Chelsea House Pub., 2005. Frumkin H., Environmental Health : From Global To Local, John Wiley and Sons, 2005. Ganesan Kumar., Air Toxics: Problems And Solution, Gordon & Breach Science Publishers, 2004. Mirsal I. A., Soil Pollution: Origin, Monitoring & Remediation, Springer Verlag, 2004. Harrison R. M., Pollution: Causes, Effects And Control, 4th Edition. Royal Society of Chemistry, 2001. Behar Alberto., Noise Control: A Primer, Singular Pub-Group, San Diego, California, 2000. Glenn F. Knoll., Radiation Detection And Measurement, John Wiley & Sons, 1999. GTK203/3-Occupational Health This course introduces student to various health hazards at workplace. Measures required to minimise risks of occupational diseases due to these hazards will be discussed. Content of this course is streamlined with the content of module III of the Safety and Health Officer course as regulated by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health (DOSH). List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Westerholm P., Professional Ethics In Occupational Health-Western European Perspectives, Radcliffe Medical Press, 2007. Barling J., Kelloway E. K. & Frone M. R., Handbook Of Work Stress SAGE, 2004. Westerholm P., Nilstun T. & Øvretveit J., Practical Ethics In Occupational Health, Radcliffe Medical Press, 2004. Stranks J. W., Health And Safety At Work : Key Terms, Published by ButterworthHeinemann, 2002. Koh D, Chia KS, Jeyaratnam J., Textbook Of Occupational Medicine Practice, 2nd Ed. Singapore: World Scientific Publishing Co Pte Ltd., 2001. Sadhra SS, Rampal KG., Occupational Health: Risk Assessment And Management, Oxford: Blackwell Science, 1999. Rampal K.G & Nor Hassim., Occupational Safety And Health In Malaysia, NIOSH. Kuala Lumpur, 1997. 124 GTN202/3-Principles of Food Preparation This course covers basic food chemistry and basic cooking methods for various types of foods such as meat, chicken, fish, vegetables, legumes and bakery products. It will also discuss personal hygiene, sanitation and safety related to food preparation and the cooking of food. Besides the conventional method of cooking, the latest technique such as using microwave for the preparation of food will also be discussed. Factors influencing the structure, colour, texture and nutritional value during preparation of food will be emphasised. Students will have the opportunity to use some of the cooking equipment in the laboratory and to evaluate the effectiveness of the kitchen tools and equipments. List of text/reference books: 1 2. 3. Freeland-Graves J.H., Peckham G.C., Principles of Food Preparation, Prentice Hall, 2002. Cataldo CB, Whitney EN, DeBruyne LK, Nutrition and Diet Therapy: Principles and Practice, 6th Ed., Thomson, 2002. Robert G.H. & Miller R.T., Food Preparation, 2nd Ed., American Technical Publishers, Inc., 1999. GTN207/3-Principles of Nutrition This course focuses on the importance of essential nutrients and optimal nutrition in the growth process and human development. Students will be introduced to functions, needs and food sources for essential nutrients of the human diet. They will also learn the role of food and its relationship with the economy, psychology, sociology and culture. The students are expected to exhibit proper attention and attitude towards nutrition in terms of personal, family and community health. List of text/reference book: 1. 2. 3. 4. McGuire M & Beerman K. Nutritional Sciences: From Fundamentals to Food, 1st Ed.. Thomson Woodsworth, 2007. Gibney M, Vorster H & Kok F. Introduction to Human Nutrition, 1st Ed.. Blackwell Sciences Limited, 2002. Mahan LK & Arlin M, Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, Philadelphia : Elsevier Science, 11th Ed., 2003. Boyle MA, Anderson SL, Personal Nutrition, 5th Ed., Thomson Learning, 2003. 125 GTN208/3-Nutritional Biochemistry This course focuses on metabolism and homeostasis of several key nutrients of macronutrients and micronutrients such as vitamins and minerals, body fluid and electrolyte balance, and inter-interaction between nutrients as well as the relationships between nutrients metabolism in maintaining optimal physiological and development of human body and also its relationship in the aetiology and development of chronic diseases such as cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, certain types of cancers and other nutritional-related disorders. Several aspects of utilisation and adaptation regulation related to nutrients metabolism will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Gropper SS, Smith JL, Groff JL. Advanced Nutrition and Human Nutrition. 4th Ed., Thomson Wadsworth, USA, 2005. Shills ME, Shike M, Ross AC, Caballero B and Cousins RJ. Modern Nutrition in Health and Disease. 10th Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2006. Gibney MJ, Macdonald IA, Roche HM. Nutrition and Metabolism, Blackwell Science Publishing, UK, 2003. GTN209/3-Nutrition in a Life Cycle This course focuses on nutritional aspects and the problems related with the growth and physiological development of infants and the increasing nutritional demand during pregnancy and breastfeeding. The course will also emphasise on the nutrition and growth of children, teenagers, adults and elderly people. The discussions will cover nutritional issues and human development in their life cycle from the fetus to the elderly. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Worthington-Roberts, BS et al, Nutrition Throughout Life Cycle, 4th Ed., London, McGraw Hill, 2000. Brown JE, Isaacs JS, Krinke UB, Nutrition Through Life Cycle, Wadsworth, 2004. P. Shetty, Nutrition Through Life Cycle, Springer-Verlag Telos, 2003. GTN210/2-Nutrition for Health and Fitness This course provides the student with thorough coverage of the role that nutrition plays in enhancing one's health, fitness and sport performance. The focus of the course will be on general effects of nutrition and exercise on health-related and sports-related fitness, nutrition for optimal health and physical performance, and the role of energy and nutrients as the key to all exercise and sports activities. Body composition and weight control in relation to losing or gaining weight through diet and exercise will be discussed. Current research and practical activities will be incorporated throughout. 126 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Melvin H Williams Nutrition for Health, Fitness & Sport, 8th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2007 Melinda M. Manore and Janice L. Thompson Sport Nutrition for Health and Performance - 1st Ed., Human Kinetics Robert E. C. Wildman, Sports and Fitness Nutrition, Brooks/Cole Pub Co, 2003 GTN211/3-Food Analysis This course discusses food intake techniques, preservation and food sample preparation prior to analysis. In depth studies about the principles of physical and chemical analyses in determining physico-chemical properties and food nutrient contents will also be covered. Chemical analyses cover proximate analysis, determination of fat properties, fat content, detection of preservatives, colouring and contaminants. The students will also be exposed to the basic techniques of food microbiology. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Suzanne Nielson, Food Analysis, 3rd Ed., Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers, 2003. Pomeranz Y & Meloan CE, Food Analysis. Theory and Practice, 3rd Ed., New York, Chapman and Hall, 2000. Tee ES, Ismail MN, Nasir MA & Khatijah I, Nutrient Composition of Malaysias Foods, 4th Ed., Kuala Lumpur, Institute for Medical Research, 1997. GTN212/3-Assessment of Nutritional Status This course exposes students to methods of nutritional evaluation in the individual and community. They will be introduced to direct and indirect methods of assessment of nutritional status. The focus is on food calculation and nutrient intake, anthropometric measurement, dietary evaluation, biochemical evaluation and clinical assessment. The students will collect data and use reference standards for the different stages of age and classification criteria. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lee, R.D. and Nieman, D.C., Nutritional Assessment, New York: McGraw-Hill, 2007. Jelliffe, O.D., The Assessment of Nutritional Status in the Community, Geneva: WHO, 2007 Sauberlich HE, Laboratory Tests for the Assessment of Nutritional Status, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 1999. 127 4. 5. Tee E. Siong et al., Nutrition Composition of Malaysian Food, 4th Ed., Kuala Lumpur: Malaysian Food Composition Database Programme, 1997. Bendich, A. and Deckelbaum, R.J. (ed.), Primary & Secondary Preventive Nutrition, Totowa (N.J., USA) : Humana Press, 2001. GTP201/2-Linguistics for Speech Pathology This is an advance component of the linguistics course that focuses on various assessments of speech and language from the linguist’s perspective with reference to the main languages in Malaysia and dialectal variations of these languages. Students will be exposed to qualitative and quantitative methods in phonology, morphology, syntax, semantics, pragmatics and discourse. This course also emphasises on the application of this knowledge in the management of speech pathology cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Buckley, B., Children's Communication Skills: From Birth to Five Years, Oxford: Routledge, 2003. Croft, W., Cognitive Linguistics, London: Cambridge University Press, 2004. Black, M. & Chiat, S., Linguistics for Clinician: A Practical Introduction. London: Hodder Arnold, 2003. GTP202/3-Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders This is a basic course of human communication and swallowing disorders. This course focuses on the disorders of speech, language, voice, fluency, hearing and swallowing. The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of communication and swallowing disorders. Overview of the basic principles of common management procedures for the individual with these disorders is also covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Shames, G. H., & Anderson, N. B., Human Communication Disorders: An Introduction, 7th Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2006. Hedge, M. N., Introduction to Communicative Disorders, 4th Ed., Austin: Pred., 2010. Gillam, R. B., Marquardt, T. P., & Martin, F. N., Communication Sciences and Disorders:From Science to Clinical Practice, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2010. 128 GTP203/2-Speech Pathology Clinic I In this course, students are expected to engage actively in clinical observation session. The focus of observation is on the interviewing process and history taking skills, formal and informal assessment procedures, and on the techniques and intervention strategies for speech and language disorders. The students are also expected to prepare the materials for therapy and to undergo placement at several specialist clinic. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist, London: Singular Publication Groups, 1997. Hegde, M., Pocket Guide to Treatment in Speech-Language Pathology, 3rd Ed., San Diego, CA: Singular/ Thomson Learning, 2007. Kersner, M. & Wright, J. (Eds), Speech and Language Therapy: The Decisionmaking Process When Working With Children, 2nd Ed., London: David Fulton Publishers, 2001. GTP204/2-Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology This course provides knowledge on important aspects of paediatrics that are relevant to the field of audiology and speech pathology. It covers the normal aspects and conditions associated with prenatal, perinatal and postnatal periods, etiologies of communication disorders and their characteristics found in paediatric cases. Basic knowledge of the management of normal or abnormal paediatric cases seen by the paediatrician will also be covered in this course. This course also emphasizes on the application this knowledge in the management of speech pathology cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allen, K. & Marotz, L., Developmental Profiles: Prebirth Through Eighth, 3rd Ed.,. Canada: Delmar Publishers, 1999. Behrman, R. E., Kliegman, R. M., & Jenson, H. B., Nelson Textbook of Pediatrics, 18th Ed., Philadephia: Elsevier, 2007. Schoenbrodt, L., Childhood Communication Disorders: Organic Bases, Clifton Park: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2004. GTP205/2-Speech Acoustics and Phonetics This course provides fundamental knowledge on the production and perception of speech acoustics. It covers the basic knowledge on speech acoustics such as sound waves, resonance, frequency, intensity, acoustic features of vowels and consonants. Relationship between phonetic and acoustics in human communication will also be covered. 129 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Speaks, C. E., Introduction to Sound: Acoustics for the Hearing and Speech Sciences, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1999. Kent R. D. & Read, C., Acoustic: Analysis of Speech, 2nd Ed., Canada: Delmar Learning, 2002. Ball, M. J. & Rahilly, J., Phonetics: The Science of Speech, London: Arnold, 1999. GTP206/1-Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology This course focuses in depth on the practical aspects of phonetics based on the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA). It emphasizes the transcription practices and analysis of normal and disordered speech sounds. Transcription practices based on IPA of dialectal variations in the Malay Language will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Edward, H. T., Applied Phonetics: The Sounds of American English, 3rd Ed., London: Delmar Learning, 2002. Martin, J., Ball, O. M., & Lowry, Methods in Clinical Phonetics, London: Whurr Publishers Ltd., 2001. Roach, P., English Phonetics and Phonology: A Practical Course, 3rd Ed., Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003. GTP207/2-Speech Pathology Clinic II In this course, the students are required to conduct interviewing session under supervision to obtain history of the patients. The students also have to work on building rapport with patients, especially the paediatric cases. Depending on the supervisor’s decision, the students may be asked to assist the clinician during these sessions. The student also are required to discuss their therapy goals, therapy plan and the issues related to the diagnosis and prognosis of cases with their supervisor at the end of each clinical session. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Goldberg, S., Clinical Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist, London: Singular Publication Groups, 1997. Philips, B. J. & Ruscello, D. M., Differential Diagnosis in Speech-Language Pathology, 2nd Ed., Butterworth-Heinemann, 1988. Shipley, K. G. & McAfee, J. G., Assessment in Speech-Language Pathology: A Resource manual, 4th Ed., New York: Delmar Learning, 2008. 130 GTP208/3-Speech Disorders This is a theoretical course on the study of speech disorders and fluency disorders. The study of speech disorders focuses on the articulation disorders and phonological disorders. Meanwhile, the study of fluency disorders emphasizes on stuttering. The topics covered are definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of speech disorders and fluency disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessments and principles of interventions in managing individuals with speech disorders or fluency disorders. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Zebrowski, P. M. & Kelly, E. M., Manual of Stuttering Intervention, San Diego: Singular/Thomson Learning, 2002. Bernthal, J. E. & Bankson, N. W., Articulation and Phonological Disorders, 6th Ed., Boston: Pearson/Allyn and Bacon, 2008. Bleile, K. M., Manual of Articulation and Phonological Disorders: Infancy Through Adulthood, 2nd Ed., Clifton Park, NY: Thomson-Delmar Learning, 2004. GTS201/3-Exercise Physiology This course focuses on the effects of training and exercise on various systems such as the cardiorespiratory, muscular, endocrine, metabolic systems as well as on the bioenergetics. Discussions on the various methods of physiological assessments catering for the trained and untrained individuals, the elderly and children will be included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Astrand P.O. and Rodahl, K. Textbook of Work Physiology, Champaign, IL:Human Kinetics, 2003. McAdrdle, W.D, Katch, Fl, Katch, VL., Exercise Physiology: Energy, Nutrition, and Human Performance, 5th Ed., Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 2001. Wilmore, JH and Costill, DL Physiology of Sport and Exercise, Champaign, IL:Human Kinetics, 2004. GTS202/2-First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) This course introduces the students to first-aid techniques and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) methods used in various situations with the emphasis on sports related incidences. List of text/reference books: 1. Thygerson A., American Academy of Orthopaedic Surgeons First Aid, CPR and AED, 4th Ed., Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2005. 131 2. 3. National Safety Council, Standard First Aid, CPR and AED, New York: McGrawHill Higher Education, 2005. National Safety Council, Pediatric First Aid, CPR and AED, New York: McGrawHill Higher Education, 2005. GTS203/2-Kinanthropometry The course introduces students to the measurements of individual movements in connection with size, shape, composition and ratio. It will provide students with knowledge on both the theorectical and practical methods in assessing professional athletes from the structural and functional perspective with considerations to differences in size and shape. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Gore CJ (editor) Australian Sports Commission, Physiological Tests for Elite Athletes, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics Publishers, 2000. Marfell-Jones, M. & Olds, T. (eds.), Kinanthropometry X, London: Routledge, 2007. Eston R & Reilly T. (eds.), Kinanthropometry and Exercise Physiology Laboratory Manual: Test, Procedures and Data, London : Routledge, 2009. GTS204/2-Test and Measurements for Sports Science This course introduces students to the terms, concepts and procedures related to the measurements and assessments of exercise and sports. These include validity and reliability of tests, their references, norms and criteria. Selection of methods, alteration and building skill tests, physical fitness tests, effective serial tests, and the valuation of the merit score test relative to the absolute standard will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Baumgartner, T. A., Jackson, A. S., Mahar, M. T. & Rowe, D. A., Measurement for Evaluation in Physical Education and Exercise Science, 8th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 2007. Morrow, J.R., Jackson, A. W., Disch, J.G. & Mood, D.P., Measurement and Evaluation in Human Performance 3rd Ed, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Wood, T. M. & Zhu, W., Measurement Theory and Practice in Kinesiology, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2006. GTS205/3-Sports Psychology This course exposes the students to the psychological skills and training strategies that can be applied to improve sports performance. The course will emphasise on the significance of emotional, cognitive and social processess in understanding sporting behaviour. 132 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Cox, R., Sport Psychology: Concepts and Applications, 5th Ed., Columbus, OH: McGraw Hill, 2002. Gill, D., Psychological Dynamics of Sport, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2000. Weinberg, R. & Gould, D., Foundations of Sport and Exercise Psychology, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2000. GTS206/3-Sports Training Methodology The course covers topics such as sports competitions, sports qualification, motor development training, planning and scheduling in sports. It also introduces the methods utilised in perfecting a technique, body shape, tactical preparation and psychological make-up. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Strength Training for Sport, Handbook of Sports Medicine and Science, An IOC Medical Commission Publication, Blackwell Science, 2002. Bompa T.O., Periodization: Theory and Methodology of Training, 4th Ed., York University, 2000. Bondarchuk, A Track and Field Training, Translated by James Riordan., Kiev: Zdotovye, 1986. GTS207/3- Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports This course introduces basic badminton, soccer and volleyball skills and game play including the knowledge and skills of these games with consideration of relevant kinesiological, physiological, biomechanical and socio-psychological factors/principles. This course also emphasises on skill acquisition, performance, and analysis of these games List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Dearing, J., Volleyball Fundamentals, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2003. Grice, T.A., Badminton - Steps to Success, 2nd ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2008. Mielke, D., Soccer Fundamentals. Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2003. 133 GTU201/2-Health and Society This course introduces basic concepts of health and illness with emphasis the importance of culture, religion, social class (poverty, gender and diseases prevention and treatment. The discussion on the health system will be focused in the context of social wellbeing and sustainable development in the society. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. McElroy, A., Townsend, P., Medical Anthropology in Ecological Perspective, 4th Ed., Westview Press, 2003. Graaff, J., What Is Sociology? Oxford University Press, 2002. Baer, H.A., Susser, I., Singer, M., Medical Anthropology and the World System, 2nd Ed., Greenwood Publishing Group, Incorporated, 2003. GTX210/3-Medical Radiation Physics II This course introduces the students to basic fundamentals of electricity, magnetism and modern physics and its role in the modern world and important connections with almost all areas of technological developments. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Taylor, J., Modern Physics for Scientists and Engineers, 2nd Ed., Pearson Prentice Hal, 2004. Beiser, A., Concepts of Modern Physics, 6th Ed., Mc Graw Hill, 2003. Halliday, D., Resnick, R and Walker, J., Fundamentals of Physics, 8th Ed., Wiley, 2007. GTX212/3-Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics This course discusses ordinary differential equations (ODE) of first and second orders, their solutions, meanings and methods of solutions that include Laplace transforms, series solution. It also introduces Fourier series and method of separation of variable for the partial differential equation (PDE). Simple applications relevant to medical imaging science will be covered such as vibrating string, vibrating membrane. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Kreyszig, E., Advance Engineering Mathematics, 9th Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2005. Arfken, G., Mathematical Methods for Physicists, 5th Ed., Elsevier Science & Technology Books, 2000. Stroud, K. A., Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Industrial Press, 2003. 134 GTX213/3-Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine This course provides theoretical exposure to the students about the basic principles in nuclear medicine. Students will acquire basic knowledge related to radioactivity, radioactive decays, radionuclide and radiopharmaceutical production methods, types of radiopharmaceuticals used in nuclear medicine, radiation detection and radiation monitoring statistics and internal dose calculations in nuclear medicine imaging. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Saha, G.B., Physics and Radiobiology of Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., SpringerVerlag, New York, 2006. Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics, 6th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2004. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Elsevier, 2003. GTX214/3-Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology This course introduces the students to the principles of basic sciences in the area of diagnostic radiology, imaging, focusing and conventional imaging. These include x-ray production and equipment, introduction to imaging, radiography production and factors that influence the quality of a radiograph. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee, WR & Ritenour ER, Medical Imaging Physics, 4th Ed., John Wiley & Sons Inc., 2002. Allisy-Roberts, Penelope, Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Elsevier, 2008. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, E.M. and Boone, J.M., The Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2002. 135 5.3. Core Courses Level 300 136 GTA301/3-Basic Hearing Amplification Technology This course discusses topics related to hearing amplification devices. These include physical and electroacoustic features, types of hearing aids and earmoulds, evaluation and prescription of hearing aids, acoustic and electroacoustic modification and counseling. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Valente, M., Hearing Aids: Standards, Options, and Limitations, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Valente, M., Strategies for Selecting and Verifying Hearing Aid Fittings, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Valente, M., Roeser, R. J. & Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology Treatment, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2000. GTA302/3-Audiology Clinic I In this course, students will have clinical attachment at audiology clinic to take case history, observe and perform basic audiological assessments. Students are expected to involve actively in all aspects with close supervision. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Stach, B. A., Clinical Audiology: An Introduction, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2010. Roeser, R.J., Valente, M., and Hosford-Dunn, H., Audiology: Diagnosis, Treatment, Practice Management Volumes I-III, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2008. GTA303/3- Paediatric Audiology This course discusses the audiological assessments in paediatric population. Students will also learn appropriate test selection for children, necessary modification for special needs children, integrating test results, and explaining results and make appropriate suggestions to parents. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Madell, J. R., & Flexer, C., Pediatric Audiology, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2008. Bellis, T., Assessment and Management of Central Auditory Processing Disorders in the Educational Setting from Science to Practice, 2nd Ed., New York: Singular Publishing Group, 2003. 137 3. Northem, J. L., & Downs, M. P., Hearing in Children, 5th Ed., Maryland: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. GTA304/4-Audiology Clinic II In this course, students will have clinical attachment to practice history taking, audiological assessments (subjective and objective test), hearing aid prescription, verification and validation, and ear-impression taking under supervision. Students will actively involve in all clinical aspects but under lesser supervision. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1996. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1998. GTA305/3-Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology This course discusses assistive listening devices (ALDs) including vibrotactile aids, loop, FM (frequency modulated), and infrared systems.. The selection criteria for cochlear implant, midbrain implant and bone anchored hearing aids (BAHA) and other implantable hearing aids will be discussed in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dillon, H., Hearing Aids, New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2000. Valente, M., Hearing Aids: Standards, Options, and Limitations, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Valente, M., Strategies For Selecting and Verifying Hearing Aid Fittings, 2nd Ed., New York: Thieme Medical Publishers, 2002. Zeng, F. G. & Popper, A. N., Cochlear Implants: Auditory Prostheses and Electric Hearing (Springer Handbook of Auditory Research), New York: Springer, 2006. GTA306/3-Auditory Rehabilitation This course discusses rehabilitation involved in hearing impaired patients at all stages of life. It also covers the importance of team work (audiologist, speech-language pathologist, teacher, social worker) and the roles of other professionals in aural rehabilitation. The selection of communication mode (e.g. cued speech, signing etc) based on residual hearing, speech and language development of hearing impaired will also been discussed. 138 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hull, R.H.H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Tye-Murray, N., Foundations of Aural Rehabilitation: Children, Adults, and Their Families, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. Johnson, C. E., Guidebook for Support Programs in Aural Rehabilitation, San Diego: Singular Pub. Group, 1999. GTB307/3-Medical Parasitology This course covers the definitions, classifications and nomenclatures of protozoa and helminths that infect humans. In addition, focus will be on the theoretical and practical aspects of routine and molecular diagnosis of various medically important parasites. The morphology, life cycle, epidemiology, brief pathogenesis, prevention and control of protozoal and helminthic infections will also be discussed. Identification keys and principles of controlling the four medically important genera of Malaysian mosquitoes will also be covered. The final topic will cover the structure, function and administration of a typical parasitology laboratory. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bogitsh, B. J., Carter, C. E. & Oeltmann (2005). T. N. Human Parasitolog (3rd Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press. Halton, D.W., Behnke, J.M. & Marshall, I., (Eds.) (2001). Practical exercises in Parasitology. Cambridge: University press. Leventhal, R., & Cheadle, R.F. (2002). Medical Parasitology: A Selfinstructional Text (5th Ed.). Philadelphia: F A. Davis Publishing Co. Parija, S.C. (2006). Textbook of Medical Parasitology (3rd ed.). New Delhi: All India Publishers & Distributors. GTB310/3-Clinical Biochemistry This course introduces the students to the theory and pathophysiological biochemistry of the human body. They will also be exposed to the principles of biochemical tests in the laboratory, and the interpretation of results from laboratory analyses performed on samples. The students are also expected to acquire some skills in performing laboratory diagnostic procedures in chemical pathology including specimen receiving and processing, reagent preparation related to biochemical analyses performing diagnostic tests such as liver function test, renal, heart, pancreas, gastrointestinal tract, measurement of pH, acid-base haemostasis of the body, electrolytes, determination of enzyme activities, blood glucose protein, albumin, urea, cholesterol and triglyceride levels, and other major biochemical parameters in diagnostic biochemistry. The students will also be exposed to the manual diagnostic procedures and in the application of laboratory automation for clinical diagnosis, quality control program and laboratory administration. 139 Further, students will be exposed to actual working environment through short attachments at the Chemical Pathology Laboratory, School of Medical Sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Bishop, M.L., Duben-Engelkirk, J.L., & Fody, E.P. Clinical Biochemistry, 4th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000. Burtis, C.A., & Ashwood, E.R., Tietz Fundamentals of Clinical Chemistry, 5th Ed., Philadelphia: Saunders, 2001. GTB315/2-Medical Virology and Mycology This course covers the details of general characteristics of medically important viruses, molds and yeasts. It also explains about the role of these pathogens in the course of diseases, epidemiology, reservoirs, transmission, pathogenesis of diseases and clinical manifestations. The students will also be taught on appropriate clinical specimens collection and transportation techniques, the principle and processing techniques of laboratory detection, isolation and identification of these pathogens. Apart from that, student will acquire knowledge concerning on advantages and disadvantages of available laboratory techniques or tests (such as staining, culture, serological tests and molecular methods) used for bacterial detection. Prevention, control methods and treatment of the diseases caused by those pathogens are also discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Betty, A. F., Daniel, F. S. & Alice, S. W. (2007). Bailey & Scott’s Diagnostic Microbiology (12th Ed.). San Diego: Elsevier Academic Press. Cheesbrough, M. (2006). District Laboratory Practice in Tropical Countries, Part 2. (2nd Ed.) U.K: Cambridge Universiti Press. Geo, F.B., Karen, C.C., Janet, S.B. & Stephen, A.M. (2007). Jawetz, Melnick & Adelberg’s Medical Microbiology (24th Ed.) USA: Mc Graw Hill. Gerald, L. M., John, E.B. & Raphael, D. (2010). Mandell, Douglas, and Bennett’s Principles and Practice of Infectious Diseases (7th Ed.) London: Churchill Livingstone. Maria, D.D (1997). Introduction to Diagnostic Microbiology. Edinburgh: Mosby. GTB316/3-Transfusion Science and Blood Banking This course covers theory and practical aspects of immunology and genetic of blood group and related tests for blood and blood component transfusion to patients. Complication of blood transfusion and application of blood and blood components in medical field are also discussed. Students will be exposed to knowledge and practical skills in pretransfusion testing, blood taking, preparation and processing of blood components and storage to ensure good quality management of blood products. 140 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harmening D.M. (2005). Modern Blood Banking and Transfusion Practice (5th Ed.). NY: F.A. Davis Co. Roback J.D. (ed.) (2008).Technical Manual, American Association of Blood Banks, (16th Ed.). American Association of Blood Banks (AABB). Rudmann, S.V. (2005). Textbook of Blood Banking and Transfusion Medicine, (2nd Ed.). NY: Elsevier Science. GTB317/3-Advanced Haematology This course correlates the basic principles of hematology which comprise of structure and function of blood cells and other normal blood components previously introduced in Hematology 1 with blood pathophysiological condition that caused by factor deficiencies which is needed for normal blood function and production or caused by genetic or environmental factors. This course will be focusing on the disease that involved blood and its related system which is frequently seen in clinical hematology practice for eg: Nutritional anaemias, Hemolytic anaemia, leukemias and genetic hematological malignancies, assessment of blood morphology from full blood picture and bone marrow smear, bleeding disorder caused vascular problem, platelet and clotting factors, thrombotic problem and antithrombotic treatment, automation in hematology and laboratory management. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harmening D.M. (2008). Clinical Hematology and Fundamentals of Hemostasis (5th Ed.) NY: F.A. Davis Co. Hoffbrand V., Moss P., and Pettit J. (2006). Essential Haematology (5th Ed.) London: Blackwell Publishing. Lewis S.M., Bain B.J. and Bates I. (2007). Dacie and Lewis Practical Haematology (10th Ed.). NY: Elsevier Science. GTB318/3-Pharmacology II This course discusses the principles of pharmacology including pharmacokinetics, pharmacodynamics, quantitative and systemic pharmacology (autonomic, cardiovascular, respiratory, gastrointestinal, endocrine, antimicrobials, central nervous system, anticoagulant and anti-inflammatory). The latest methodology in the development and production of pharmaceutical drugs and alternative medicines will be introduced. This course is expected to emphasize various aspects of applied pharmacology and efficacy studies in relation to health sciences. 141 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Craig, C.R., and Stitze, l R.E. (eds) (2003). Modern Pharmacology With Clinical Applications (6th Ed.). NY: Little Brown & Co. Katzung, B.G. (2003). Basic and Clinical Pharmacology (9th Ed.). NY: McGrawHill Co. Rang and Dale (2007). Pharmacology (6th Ed.). London: Churchill Livingstone. Tripathi, K.D. (2008). Essentials of Medical Pharmacology (6th Ed.). India: Jaypee brothers Medical publishers (P) Ltd. GTD310/4-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I This course provides clinical training to the students with the intention of enhancing their dietetic skills while giving medical nutrition therapy to the patients in hospital wards. This internship programme covers individual patient approach, bed side counseling, nutrient intake analysis and therapeutic diet planning according to patients' dietary requirements based on diagnosis and medical report. Activities such as assessment of nutritional status and diet surveillance are also included. The students are required to give diet education to patients and their families. The students will understand the role and importance of dietitians in a healthcare team. Upon completion of this course the students are expected to submit case reports and to give case presentation of their respective case studies. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendricks K.M, Duggan C., and Walker W.A., Manual of Paediatric Nutrition, 4th Ed., BC Decker, 2005. Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007. Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach, 3rd Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008. GTD311/3-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I This course explains the rationale of modifying normal diet to therapeutic diet in terms of nutrient composition, texture and presentation. It enables students to understand the importance of therapeutic diet in the prevention and treatment of various diseases. Topics include dietary management of gastrointestinal diseases, cardiovascular diseases, diabetes, inborn errors of metabolism, body weight control, eating disorders, failure to thrive, food allergy, food intolerance and rehabilitation. The application of food exchange lists and various dietary guidelines will also be discussed. 142 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003. Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007. GTD315/2-Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II This course is a continuation of Principles of Diet Therapy I. It covers the principles and dietary management including the physiological and biochemical changes that occur during renal diseases, hepatobiliary diseases, cancer, skeletal and muscle diseases, pre and post operation conditions, trauma and burns. This course also deals with pediatric nutrition, total enteral and parenteral nutritions. Each topic will discuss about the theoretical and practical aspects of medical nutrition therapy that has to be given to the patients which includes assessment, planning, implementation, evaluation and documentation of the nutritional care processes. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003. Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007. GTD317/4-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I This course is a continuation of the Dietetic Internship I which will focus on dietetic services at special units in hospitals and clinics such as ICU, CCU, pediatric, hypertension unit and diabetes mellitus clinic. Evaluation of nutritional status, specific diet treatment and diet surveillance of patients before discharge will also be conducted. Patient diet management in wards whether normal, therapeutic or effective enterelparenteral and the lag of diet regime planning including the evaluation of the effectiveness diet regimes will also be discussed. Students will be introduced to nutritional status evaluation and therapeutic care of HIV, kidney, neuro-musular and skeletal systems diseases patients and those who suffer from cancer. Those enrolled in this course will also learn about topics related to operations and burns patients. Ethics and bed side counseling procedures during diet treatment session will be focussed in order to enhance students’ communication skills. This will be undertaken with counselors. Emphasis will be on communicative ability with the patient's family especially on the diet of patients suffering from cancer and HIV. 143 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Werbach MR and Moss J, Textbook of Nutritional Medicine, Third Line Press, 2000. Skipper A (ed.), Dietitian's Handbook of Enteral and Parenteral Nutrition, 2nd Ed., Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2011. Nelms, M., Roth, S.L and Lacey, K Medical Nutrition Therapy: A Case Study Approach, 3rd . Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008. GTD318/4-Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I This course exposes students to practicals involving the handling of cases in the outpatient clinics. They are expected to be able to translate diet therapy theory into practice ensuring that they will easily understand diseases requiring nutritional intervention. They will also be taught on how to change patients' nutritional habit by using counselling techniques and history of prevalence. It is expected that this internship will effectively improve their skills required for nutritional counselling sessions. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Alpers DH, Stenson WF, Bier DM, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008. Bauer K.D and Sokolik, C.A, Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development, Wadsworth, 2002. Mahan L.K and Escott-Stump, S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007. GTD321/3-Therapeutic Diet Preparation This course gives practical training in the methods of therapeutic diet preparation for various disease conditions. Usage of foods for meal preparation and the minimisation of food wastage will be discussed during diet preparation. Purchase of raw materials, calculation of the nutrient contents in a prepared food item, preparation methods, food serving and sensory evaluation will be emphasised. Lectures on therapeutic diet preparation protocols will be given before the practical session. Assessment will be based on the students’ ability in selecting/purchasing raw materials, nutrient calculations, demonstration of food serving and sensory evaluation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Nelson J., Mayo Clinic Diet Manual, 8th Ed., Elsevier Science, 2003. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Alpers DH, Stenson WF, Bier DM, Manual of Nutritional Therapeutics, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2008. 144 GTF300/2-Biological Evidence This course introduces the students to the multiple biological evidence types of both plant and animal origin that are found at the crime scenes, the methods of observing, describing and collecting them, their salient morphological features that enable identification and the procedures used in the laboratory to investigate these evidence. The evidence types focused will include, among others, pollen grains, diatoms, wood, hairs and natural fibers, damages in cloth and necrophagous insects. Emerging areas in forensic biology such as wildlife and marine forensics and bioterrorism are also included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Alan Gunn (2006), Essentials of Forensic Biology, John Wiley & Sons, England. Siegel J, Knupfer G and Saukko P (2000), Encyclopedia of Forensic Sciences, Academic Press, London. Saferstein, R. (ed) (2001), Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. I-III, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey. Byrd JH and Castner JL., (2001), Forensic Entomology: The Utility of Arthropods in Legal Investigations, CRC Press, Boca Raton. Ogle RR and Fox MJ., (1999), Atlas of Human Hair Microscopic Characteristics, CRC Press, Boca Raton. Robertson J and Grieve M, (1999), Forensic Examination of Fibres, Taylor & Francis, London. GTF301/3-Physical Evidence This course describes the characterization of some kinds of physical evidence commonly encountered in crime investigation: paint, glass, soil, fibres, and lamp filaments by using physical and instrumental techniques. Theory and techniques of macrophotography and photomicrography; the principles and experimental techniques on the restoration of erased numbers on different metal surfaces and investigations related to computer crime are also included. Uses of lasers and electron microscopy in the examinations of physical evidence materials form part of the curriculum. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Andrew R.W. Jackson and Julie M. Jackson, Forensic Science, (2nd Ed.), Pearson, Prentice Hall, 2008. Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science, (3rd Ed.), CRC Press, 2009. Lamp Examination for ON or OFF in Traffic Collisions, North Western University, IL 60 204 2003. 145 GTF305/4-Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drugs This course introduces the students to the fundamental concept of toxicology, forensic toxicology, poison, multiple poisoned material, chemistry and appearance of poisoned material, signs and symptoms of poisoning, multiple procedures, techniques and equipments employed to extract, identify and profile the poisoned material from biological and autopsy specimens. Classification and identification of drugs that commonly abused, modes of action in human body and techniques to identify and detect them will also be emphasised. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cole, M. D., The Analysis of Controlled Substance, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, 2003. Flanagan, R. J., Taylor, A. A., Watson, I. D. & Whelpton, R., Fundamentals of Analytical Toxicology, New Jersey: Wiley-Interscience, 2008. Jickell, S., Negrusz, A., Moffat, A. C, Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke Analytical Forensic Toxicology, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2008. Karch, S. B., Postmorterm Toxicology of Abused Drugs, Steven B. Boca Raton: CRC Press, 2008. Moffat, A.C., Osselton, M. D. & Widdop, B., Clarke's Analysis of Drugs and Poisons, London: Pharmaceutical Press, 2011. GTF306/3-Fire Investigation This course introduces students to the concepts and basics of fire investigation and methods to collect material evidences in structure fires and forest fires to find out the origin and cause of fire to solve cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. David, J. icove and John D. Dehaan, Forensic Fire Scene Reconstruction, Prentice Hall, 2003. John and D., Kirk’s Fire Investigation, 5 th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2002. Redsicker, D.R., Practical Fire and Arson Investigation, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 1997. GTF309/3-Forensic DNA Analysis This course introduces students to the fundamental knowledge associated to forensic DNA analysis, including the earlier developments to the most recent advances. Students will also be exposed to problems and cases associated in each technology involving DNA analysis and ways of troubleshooting to solve the problems. Students will be trained to use apparatus and latest software in DNA analysis and interpret the results. At the end of 146 the course, student will also be exposed to real forensic cases involving DNA analysis to improve their understanding of the importance of DNA technology in the field of Forensic Sciences. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Norah Rudin and Keith Inman, An Introduction to Forensic DNA Analysis, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 2001. John Butler and John M. Butler, Biology and Technology Behind STR Markers, Academic Press, 2001. Bruce Budowle, Jenifer Smith and Tamyarah Moretti, DNA Typing Protocols: Molecular Biology and Forensic Analysis, Eaton Pub. Co., 2000. GTF311/3-Forensic Anthropology This course introduces the students to the fundamentals of forensic anthropology, the types of biological and peripheral evidence useful in anthropological analysis, crime scene and excavation techniques, handling the skeletal remains, types of anthropometric and anthroposcopic identification using skeletal remains like assessment of race, sex, age and individualization and the limitations there in. The techniques focused, among others, include skull based personal identification using video superimposition method (handson) and applying specific radiological skeletal traits. Photo to photo comparison and anthropological reconstruction of population biology are also included. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Komar DA, Buikstra JE. (2008), Forensic Anthropology, Contemporary Theory and Practice, Oxford : Oxford University Press. Pickering R, Bachman D. (2009), The Use of Forensic Anthropology (2nd Ed.), Florida : Charles C. Thomas. Krogman, WM, Iscan MY., (1986), The Human Skeleton in Forensic Medicine, Charles C.Thomas, Illinois. Iscan, MY and Helmer, RP. (eds) (1993), Forensic Analysis of The Skull-Cranio Facial Analysis, Reconstruction, and Identification, Wiley Liss Inc., New York. Byers SN, (2002), Introduction to Forensic Anthropology, Allyn & Bacon, Boston, USA. Schmitt A, Cunha E, Pinheiro J, (2006), Forensic Anthropology and Medicine : Complementary Sciences from Recovery to Cause of Death, Humana Press, Totowa, New Jersey. Byers SN (2008), Forensic Anthropology Laboratory Manual, Pearson. Boston. 147 GTF312/3-Organic Chemistry III This course provides knowledge about the structure, nomenclature, synthesis, and reactions of amines, phenols and alcohols. This course also covers the study of carbohydrates and nucleic acids. The course will emphasise on the understanding of amino acids, peptides, proteins, lipids and synthetic polymers and their importance. Main references supporting this course: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. L.G. Wade. Jr., Organic Chemsitry, 8th Edition, Pearson Prentice Hall, USA 2013. T. W. G. Solomons and C. B. Fryhle, Organic Chemistry, 10th Ed., John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2011. J.G. Smith, Organic Chemistry, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2008. J. E. McMurry,“Organic Chemistry, 7th Ed., Brooks/ Cole, 2008. P. Y. Bruice, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall, USA, 2007. GTF313/3-Food Chemistry This course exposes students to the chemistry of food. Students are taught about classification and structure of carbohydrates, proteins, oils and fats. Food flavour and food additives are also introduces using various examples. Students are also exposed to food forensics and the importance of quality control in food. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Belitz, H.-D., Grosch, W. and Schieberle, P. Food Chemistry, Hornback, J. M. Organic Chemistry, Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2005. Damodaran, S., Parkin, K. L. and Fennema, O. R. Fennema's Food Chemistry, Akoh, C. C. and Min, D. B. Food Lipids: Chemistry, Nutrition, and Biotechnology, CRC Press/Taylor & Francis Group, Boca Raton, 2008. Frey, C. and Rouseff, R. Natural Flavors and Fragrances : Chemistry, Analysis, and Production, Carl : American Chemical Society, Washington, DC, 2005. Otles, S. Methods of Analysis of Food Components and Additives, CRC Press, Boca Raton, 2005. GTF314/2-Forensic Serology This course introduces the concept of antigens and antibodies and various polymorphic blood-proteins and enzymes present in the blood and body fluid. It also provides practical knowledge to group the body fluids from crime scenes, to identify and individualise the samples. This course also explains briefly HLA system and its application to identify individuals. 148 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bidwell J.L., Navarrete C. and Bodmer W.F., Histocompatibility Testing, Imperial College Press, 2000. Saferstein R., Forensic Science Handbook, Vol. II and III, Regents/Prentice HalL, New Jersey, 1993. Issitt P.D., Applied Blood Group Serology, 3rd Ed., Montgomery Scientific Publication, 1985 GTJ309/2-Critical Care Nursing This course provides students with theoretical knowledge on medical-surgical pertaining to risk factors, etiology, patho-physiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic investigations, and diagnostic investigation as well as medical/surgical treatment of patients who are critically ill. The knowledge will be used to plan for nursing management including health promotion strategies to patients at all ages with disturbance to multi system. This course will also integrate all learned nursing skills particularly those specific to the nursing management of patients with altered cardio-respiratory function and other body systems. Learning of nursing skills will be provided via practical sessions in the critical areas. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2008). Medical surgical nursing: Critical thinking in client care (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc. Berman, A., Synder, S.J., Kozier, B., & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing: Concept, process and practice (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A. (2004) Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th ed.). USA: Mosby. GTJ310/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) This course exposes the students to the theoretical and professional aspects of medicalsurgical nursing practice related to endocrine and musculoskeletal system. It focuses on the etiology, clinical manifestation, diagnostic investigations, medical and surgical management and complications. Students will acquire experience in providing nursing care and health promotion for patients with endocrine and musculoskeletal disorders in hospital and community. The nursing practice approach used is from the wellness-illness continuum and holistic context. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing. critical thinking in client care, (4th. edition) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Timby, B.K and Smith N. (2010) Introductory Medical Surgical Nursing (10th edition) Lippincott Williams and Wilkins Philadelphia 149 3. Sublett ,C and Blair, M (2008) Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical management for positive outcomes (8th edition) Saunders Elsevier, St. Louis GTJ311/2- Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing This course is designed to introduce a basic concept of Psychiatric-Mental Health nursing in the specific care of individuals and family experiencing a mental health problem and psychiatric disorder. It will provide students a theory of mental health and mental illness; and expose students to the biopsychosocial model of treatment in psychiatric setting. The course is based on a holistic and humanistic framework, emphasizing on patient’s care and family intervention in the hospital and community List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. O’Brien, P.G., Kennedy, W.Z., & Ballard, K. A. (2008). Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing. An Introduction to Theory and Practice. Massachusetts: Jones and Barlett. Shives, L.R. & Isaacs, A. (2002). Basic concepts of psychiatric & mental health nursing. 5th ed. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott. Varcarolis, E.M., & Halter, M.J. (2010). Foundation of Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing. A Clinical Approach. 6th Edition. St. Louis: Saunders Elsevier. GTJ312/6-Research Project This course aims to provide the student experience in performing a research project in related field in nursing and other health sciences topics under the guidance of supervisor(s) in Semester 1 and II (one academic year). The student is to report their research project findings and submit their thesis/dissertation at the end of the final semester II. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Creswell JW (2008).Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approach, 3rd. Edn., Thousand Oaks, California: Sage Publication. Gerrish K & Lacey A (2010). The Research Process in Nursing, 6th edn., WileyBlackwell Publishing Ltd., UK. Wood GL & HaberJ (2010). Nursing Research: Methods and Critical Appraisal for Evidence-Based Practice, 7th edn., Mosby Elsevier, New York. 150 GTJ313/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and Opthalmology) This course provides students with theoretical knowledge on medical-surgical pertaining to risk factors, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic investigations, and diagnostic investigation as well as medical-surgical treatment of patients with Neurology, Otorhinolarygology and Opthalmology problems in hospital and community. The knowledge will be used to plan for nursing management including health promotion strategies to patients at all ages with disturbance to the system either in hospital or community. This course will also integrate all learned nursing skills particularly those specific to the nursing management of patients with such health problems. Learning of nursing skills will be provided via practical sessions in the nursing skills laboratory and clinical areas that have patients with Neurology, Otorhinolarygology and Opthalmology problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2008). Medical surgical nursing: Critical thinking in client care (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc. Berman, A., Synder, S.J., Kozier, B., & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing: Concept, process and practice (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Perry, A. G. P. & Potter, P.A. (2004) Clinical Nursing Skills Techniques (5th ed.). USA: Mosby. GTJ314/2-Nursing Education This course is structured to provide students with the knowledge and understanding of the theories, principles and methods of teaching and learning process. Particular attention is given to the preparation of students to plan and conduct teaching and learning to patients, relatives and staff in the clinical areas. Evaluation of the course will be based on continuous assessments from different types of approaches such as quiz, developing lesson plan and conducting clinical health teaching for patients, relatives and staff in clinical area and peer evaluation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. DeYoung, C, S. (2003). Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.G. L. Miessler Lowenstein, A. L. & Bradshaw, M. J. (2004). Fuszard’s Innovative Teaching Strategies in Nursing. 3rd ed. Sudbury: Jones & Bartlett Publisher. Jarvis, P. (2002). The Theory and Practice of Teaching. UK: Kogan Page. 151 GTJ315/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Haematology and Oncology) This course provides students with theoretical knowledge on medical-surgical pertaining to risk factors, etiology, pathophysiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic investigations as well as medical/surgical treatment of patients with dermatology, immunology, hematology and oncology problems in hospital and community. The knowledge will be used to plan for nursing management including health promotion strategies to patients at all ages with disturbance to the system either in hospital or community. This course will also integrate all learned nursing skills particularly those specific to the nursing management of patients with such health problems. Learning of nursing skills will be provided via practical sessions in the nursing lab and clinical areas that have patients with dermatology, immunology, hematology and oncology problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P., & Burke, K.M. (2008). Medical surgical nursing: Critical thinking in client care (4th ed.). New Jersey: Prentice-Hall, Inc. Berman, A., Synder, S.J., Kozier, B., & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing: Concept, process and practice (8th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall. Gulanick, M., & Myers, J.L. (2007). Nursing care plans: Nursing diagnosis and intervention (6th ed.). USA: Mosby Elsevier. GTJ316/2-Gerontological Nursing This course exposes the students to the care of geriatric patients. The contents of this course include the aspect of medical, surgical, diagnostic investigations, complications and holistic nursing management. Congruent with the knowledge and skills, students are expected to acquire the ability to deliver holistic nursing care to geriatric patients in an institution or community setting. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Miller, C.A. (2009) Nursing for Wellness in Older Adults (5th edition) Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, Philaldelphia Ebersole, P, Hess, P. Touhy, T.D. Jett, K. and Luggen, A.S. (2008) Towards Healthy Ageing: Human Needs and Nursing Response (7th edition) Mosby Elsevier, St. Louis. Meiner, S.E. and Lueckenotte A.G. (2006) Gerontologic Nursing (3rd edition) Mosby Inc. St. Louis 152 GTJ317/2-Principles of Health Management This course is structured to expose students with the basic knowledge of the principles and theories of health management. Issues such as management concepts and evolutions, organizations process, basic functions of a manager, financial management, leadership, change, motivation, groupwork, team building, decision making, conflict resolution, job satisfaction and organization development will be discussed in this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Kelly-Heidenthal, P. (2003). Nursing leadership and management. Canada: Delmar Learning. Marquis, B. L. & Huston, C.J. (2006). Leadership roles and management functions in nursing theory and application (5th ed.). Lippincott William & Wilkins: USA Liebler, J. G. & McConnel, R. (2004). Management principles for health care professionals (4th ed.). Jones & Butler Publishers, Inc. GTJ318/2-Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing This course exposes the students to the care of neonatal and pediatric patients. The contents of this course compile the aspect of medical, surgical, diagnostic test, complications and holistic nursing management. Congruent with this knowledge and skills, students are expected to acquire the ability to deliver holistic nursing care to neonates and children in a tertiary or community hospital. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hockenberry, M. J. (2005). Wong’s Essential of Pediatric Nursing. 7th ed. St. Louis: Elservier Saunders. Murray, S. S. & Mckinney, E. S. (2006). Foundation of Maternal – Newborn Nursing. (4th ed.) Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders Co. Muscari,M. E. (2005). Pediatric Nursing. 4th ed. Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott. GTK301/4-Environmental And Occupational Toxicology This course introduces the students to the principle of polluted substances released to environment and their toxicology effect to the living things. Students will be introduced to toxicology definition, types of toxicology test and interpretation of toxicology data. This course also discusses basic immunology concept, types of tissue and lymphoid cell; types, and molecule functions; antigen concept, immunogenic, antigenicity and immunogenecity and immunisation and immunopathology concept. Application of antigen-antibody reaction in diagnosis will be introduced. 153 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Stanley E.M., Toxicological Chemistry And Biochemistry, Lewis Publication, 2003. Clements W.H., Community Ecotoxicology, John Wiley & Son, 2002. Paul I., Toxicity And Risk: Context, Principles And Practice. Routledge, London, 2001. Hayes A.W., Principles And Methods Of Toxicology, 4th Edition. Taylor & Francis, 2001. GTK302/3-Environmental And Occupational Health From Engineering Perspective This course introduces the students to the theory and application of knowledge engineering, especially civil and mechanical engineering in implementing engineering controls to reduce pollutant levels in the workplace environment. Pollution prevention measures in buildings through selection of construction materials will be introduced. Aspects of civil engineering to reduce sick building problems and accidents will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Code of Practice, Indoor Air Quality, DOSH, Malaysia, 2010. Davis M. L. & Masten S. J., Principles Of Environmental Engineering And Science, McGraw-Hill, 2004. De Nevers N., Air Pollution Control Engineering, McGraw-Hill, 2000. Uniform Building By-Laws, MDC Publishers, 2000. Mohd Zaid Y., Teknologi Industri: Kawalan Mutu Dan Peralatan, Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka, 1996. Noor Hassim I., Kesihatan Persekitaran, Dewan Bahasa & Pustaka, 1993. Code of Practice, Design And Construction, British Standards Institution, 1997. GTK303/3-Domestic, Laboratory And Industrial Waste Management This course exposes the students to the knowledge on waste classification and characteristics of distinction. It also introduces legal requirements in relation to the disposal of solid waste and radioactive waste scheduled. Analytical techniques and methods of waste handling are also discussed. The method of labeling, packaging, storage, transport and waste disposal as well as the safety aspects of waste handling waste are also emphasized. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Isa Baud, Johan Post & Christine Furedy, Solid Waste Management And Recycling : Actors, Partnerships & Policies In Hyderabad, India & Nairobi, Kenya. Kluwer Academic Publishers, 2004. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974. International Law Books Services. 2007. 154 3. 4. 5. 6. Hester R.E & Harisson R.M., Environmental And Health Impact Of Solid Waste Management Activities, Cambridge: Royal Socitey of Chemistry, 2002. Blackman W. C., Basic Hazardous Waste Management, 3rd Edition. CRC Press, 2001. Cheremisioff N. P., Handbook Of Solid Waste Management And Waste Minimization Technology, 2002. Grover V. I., Solid Waste Management, Rotterdam, 2000. GTK304/3- Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants This course focuses on the importance and measurement of levels of contaminants in the environment. Students are taught in greater depth of sampling methods, storage and use of samples as AAS analytical instrument, GCMS and HPLC to measure various types of contaminants in the field of health and hygiene. Students are also taught the knowledge to formulate the plan of monitoring concentrations of contaminants in the environment and the workplace. The use of new technologies for environmental monitoring, such as Geographical Information System (GIS) and Radio Frequency Environmental Tracking System will also be described. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Friedrich R. & Reis S., Emission Of Air Pollutants: Measurement, Calculation And Uncertainties, 1st Ed. Springer, UK, 2004. Vallero D., Environmental Contaminant: Assessment And Control, AP, London, 2004. Ware G. W., Reviews of Environmental Contamination And Toxicology, Springer, 2001. Fifield F.W. & Haines P.J., Environmental Analytical Chemistry, Blackwell Science, UK, 2000. Vincent J.H., Particle Size: Selective Sampling For Particulate Air Contaminants, Academic Press, London, 1998. Bacci E., Ecotoxicology of Organic Contaminant, CRC, London, 1993. GTK305/3-Environmental And Occupational Health Related Diseases This course discusses various types of diseases caused by environmental pollution and workplace. Students will learn the concept of disease, symptoms and medical measures needed to identify the disease. Health monitoring, medical surveillance and preventive measures to be taken will be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Yassi A., Tord Kjellström, Theo de Kok and Tee Guidotti. Basic Environmental Health WHO, UNEP Oxford University Press, 2001. Reese C. D., Occupational, Health And Safety Management: A Practical Approach, Lewis Publishers, 2003. 155 3. 4. Koran H., Environmental And Occupational Health, 2nd Ed. CRC Press, 2004. La Dou J., Current Occupational And Environmental Medicine, Lange Medical Books. 3rd Ed., 2003. GTK306/3-Environmental And Occupational Emergency This course discusses the major accidents and disasters in Malaysia and Southeast Asia that have impact on the environment and the life of workers. Students are also introduced to the concept of disaster prevention and the establishment of an Emergency Response Plan (ERP) and Emergency Response Team (ERT). In addition, handling of emergency aid equipment, knowledge of first aid and fire fighting techniques will be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Parcell P., Disaster Prep 101: The Ultimate Guided Emergency Readiness, Info Quest, 2004. Greece S. A., International Resources Guide To Hazardous Chemicals: Manufacturers, Agencies, Organizations And Sources Of Information, William Andrew Publishing, 2003. Leigh J. P., Markowitz S., Fahe M. & Landrigen P., Costs Of Occupational Injuries And Illnesses, 4th Ed. University of Michigan Press, 2003. Erickson P. A., Emergency Response Planning For Corporate And Municipal Managers, Academic Press, 1999. GTK307/3-Occupational Rehabilitation This course introduces students to the theory and application in the rehabilitation process that assists injured workers to return to duty. Emphasis is given to the role of occupational safety and health officers to monitor the rehabilitation of workers on site working. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dollard M. F., Winefield A. H. & Winefield H. R., Occupational Stress In The Service Professions, Taylor & Francis Inc., 2003. Menckel E. & Westerholm P., Evaluation In Occupational Health Practice, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999. Ann Allart W., An Occupational Perspective Of Health, Thorofare, NJ: SLACK, Inc., 1998. Brenda S., Managing Disability At Work: Improving Practice In Organisations, J. Kingsley, 1991. 156 GTN301/3-Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum This course exposes students to communities such as the squatter population, handicap homes, old age homes, pregnant mothers, health care clinics and centers for a period of four weeks to promote health activity and to educate the community on incorrect nutritional habits. This course also enables the students to face real life situation as dietitians in the community. The students will be involved in educational activity either in the form of talks or demonstrations in order to increase the awareness of selected populations towards acquiring optimal nutrition. Students will also gather knowledge about the role of a selected health care agency in a community setup. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Homan, M.S., Promoting Community Change- Making it Happen in the Real World, Belmont Thompson Higher Education, 2008. Nutrition Society, Gibney M.J., (Editors), Public Health Nutrition, Blackwell Publishers, 2003. Heber D, Nutrition for Primary Care, Saunders W B Co, 2000. Morgan JB, Dickerson JW (Eds.), Nutrition in Early Life John Wiley & Sons, Incorporated, 2003. GTN309/3-Nutrition and Diseases This course covers selected clinical situations requiring individual nutrition regimes. Discussions of diseases related to the gastrointestinal, cardiovascular, urinary, endocrine and nervous systems will be undertaken. In addition, aspects of diversity of treatment, effect of drugs, radiation and operation-related condition such as trauma, burn, cancer, pregnancy, insufficient protein nutrient, retardation of growth, pre and post surgical and diarrhea will be covered. Metabolic changes related to diseases, drug and food interactions, patient health condition and preventive aspects will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ganong WF., Review of Medical Physiology, 21st Ed., Appleton & Lange, 2003. P. Kumar, Clark, Clinical Medicine, 5th Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, 2005. Vinay Kumar, Nelso Fausto, Abdul Abbas, Robbins & Cotnan Pathologic Basis of Disease, 7th Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, 2004. 157 GTN310/2-Food and Nutrition Toxicology Food toxicology covers food safety during handling, preparation, processing, storage and food services and lectures on diseases normally causes by water and food contaminants. The main causes of food poisoning including microorganisms, toxic wastes, insects and heavy metals are discussed. Preventive procedures and the issue of misleading consumption of food fortification agents and food additives will be discussed. The role of government agencies or specific bodies such as HACCP and GMP requirements of factories and other food industries in ensuring safety of food will also be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Helferich W, Winter CK, Food Toxicology, CRC Press, 2000. Ray B, Fundamental Food Microbiology, 3rd Ed., CRC Press, 2003. Stanley, T. T. Omaye, Omaye T. Omaye, Food and Nutritional Toxicology, Marcel Dekker, 2004. GTN311/3-Food Service Management This cource discusses the important aspects of catering, planning and food service management, menu planning, selection of laboratory equipments and food service system. Students are exposed to methods, principles and preparation techniques of nutritious and tasty food in huge quantities. Food safety and sanitation will also be discussed. Dynamic flows of food from the purchasing stage up to the serving of clients within time constraints are discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Knight JBL & Korschevar LH, Quantity of Food Production, Planning and Management, New York : Van Nstrand Reinhold, 1999. Byers BA, Shanklin CW, Hoover LC, Hoover LA, Food Service Manual for Health Care Institutions, 2nd Ed., American Hospital Pub. Inc., 1997. Spears MC & Marquardt NW, Food Service Organization: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999. GTN312/3-Food Microbiology This course will introduce students to the role of microorganism in food. Chronicle research in food microbiology, characteristics and behavior of microorganisms, water bone disease, microbial related food poisoning and toxicity will be discussed. Students will be exposed to several aspects of food production by using the means of microorganism and food biotechnology. Statistics related to food quality control will also introduced. 158 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Jay, JM, Modern Food Mikrobiology, New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 2001. Ray, B., Fundamental Food Mikrobiology, USA: CRC Press, 2003. Waittes, MJ and Mogan, NL, Industrial Microbiology, New York: Blackwell Science Inc., 2001. Marth, EH and Steele Sr, JL, Applied Dairy Microbiology, NewYork: Marcell Dekker Inc., 2001. Harrigan, W, Laboratory Methods in Food Microbiology, New York: Academic Press, 1998. Garbutt, JH, Essential of Food Microbiology, New York : Edward Arnold, 1997. GTN314/2-Nutrition Anthropology This course focuses on the food heritage and definition of food diversity in different cultures including classification of food, belief, taboo, food symbolism, origin and food pattern evaluation including food availability pattern and food preparation. It also covers the factors that influence food choice and trends in food intake. Students will be taught on dietary habits of various ethics or community and its implication towards nutritional and health status. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Bryant C.A., Dewalt K.M., Courtney A. and Schwantz J., The Cultural Feast-An Introduction to Food and Society, Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, 2003. Kitler, Goyan P., Food and Culture, Wadsworth/Thompson Learning, 2000. McMillan DE (editor), Anthropology & Food Policy: Human Dimensions of Food Policy in Africa & Latin America, Univ. of Georgia, 1991. Sinclair HM & Howat GR, World Nutrition and Nutrition Education, Paris, Oxford Univ. Press, 1980. Rita R.C., The Economic & Politics of Health, Chapel Hill, 2001. Gordon J, Direnzo, Human Social Behavior: Concepts and Principles of Sociology, Holt Rinehart & Winston, 1990. GTP301/2-Psycholinguistics This is an advanced course in linguistics that discusses the psychological and neurobiological processes in the acquisition, understanding and the use of language. The topics covered include language processing and production, first and second language acquisition and bilingualism. This course also emphasizes on the application of psycholinguistics knowledge to the field of speech pathology. 159 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Altmann, G. T. M., Psycholinguistics Critical Concepts in Psychology, London: Routledge, 2002. Field, J., Psycholinguistics A Resource Book for Students, London: Routledge, 2003. Steinberg, D. D., Hiroshi, N. & Aline, D. P., Psycholinguistics Language, Mind And World, Essex: Longman, 2001. GTP302/2-Language Disorders This is a theoretical course on language disorders among children which focuses on the developmental language disorders such as receptive language disorders and expressive language disorders. It covers definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of language disorders. In addition, this course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with language disorders. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Rhea, P., Language Disorders from Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment and Intervention, 3rd Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2001. Nelson, N. W., Childhood Language Disorders in Context: Infancy Through Adolescence, 2nd Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1998. Vinson, B. P., Language Disorders Across the Lifespan: An Introduction 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Pub. Group, 2008. GTP303/2- Neuropsychology This is a theoretical course which exposes students to the fundamental aspects of neuropsychology in the fields of speech pathology. The topics covered included major brain structures, systems and their associated functions. It focuses, in general, on the brain-behaviours and brain-cognition relationships and their disorders. This course also emphasises on the application of this knowledge to the management of speech pathology cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stirling, J., Introducing Neuropsychology, New York: Taylor& Francis, Inc., 2002. Rains, G. D., Principles of Human Neuropsychology, Montreal: McGraw-Hill, 2002. Balconi, M (ed), Neuropsychology of communication, New York: Springer, 2010 160 GTP304/3-Speech Pathology Clinic III This courses required the students to conduct interviewing sessions under supervision and perform related formal/ informal assessment of patients. They are also expected to practice building rapport with patient, especially in paediatric cases. Depending on the supervisor’s judgment, the students may be asked to assist the therapist and/or to perform the therapy. The students are also required to plan therapy goals, weekly therapy plan and formulate the prognosis prior to discussion with supervisors. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Smit, A.B., Articulation and Phonology Resource, New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2003. Gordon-Brannan, M., Clinical Management of Articulatory and Phonologic Disorders, 3rd Ed., New York: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2007. Gregory, H.H., Campbell, J. H., Gregory, C.B. & Hill, D.G., Stuttering Therapy: Rationale and Procedures, Boston: Allyn & Bacon Inc., 2003. GTP305/2-Counseling for Special Population This is a theoretical course that exposes fundamental aspects of counselling in the fields of audiology and speech pathology. It focuses on the application of counselling methodologies in the management of individuals with communication disorders. The topics covered include theories, procedures, related issues in counselling and their applications in the fields of audiology and speech pathology. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Luterman, D.M., Counseling persons With Communication Disorders and Their Families, 5th Ed., Austin, TX: Pro-Ed., 2008. Flasher, L. V, & Fogel, P. T, Counseling Skills for Speech-Language Pathologist and Audiologist, Albany: Thompson Delmar Learning, 2004. Nelson-Jones, R., Introduction to Counseling Skills, 3rd Ed., London: Sage Publication Ltd., 2000. GTP306/3-Voice and Resonance Disorders This is a theoretical course on disorders of voice and resonance. The study of voice disorders focuses on several types of voice disorders such as organic and neurological voice disorders, and alaryngeal speech. The study of resonance disorders emphasises on hypernasality and hyponasality are introduced. The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of voice disorders and resonance disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with voice disorders and resonance disorders. 161 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stemple, J. C., Glaze, L. E., & Klaben, B. G., Clinical Voice Pathology: Theory and Management, 3rd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2000. Kent, R. D., & Ball, M. J., Voice Quality Measurement, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001. Boone, D. R., McFarlane, S. C. & Von Berg, S. L., The Voice and Voice Therapy, 8th Ed., Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 2009. GTP307/3- Acquired Communication Disorders This is a theoretical course on acquired communication disorders that focuses on acquired language disorders such as aphasia, dementia, right hemisphere syndrome and traumatic brain injury and motor speech disorders such as apraxia and dysarthria. The topics covered include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of each type of acquired communication disorders. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with acquired communication disorders. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Freed, D. B., Motor Speech Disorders Diagnosis and Treatment, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2000. Brookshire, R. H., Introduction to Neurogenic Communication Disorders, 7th Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2003 Hedge, M.N., A Coursebook On Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language Disorders, 2nd Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2007. GTP308/4-Speech Pathology Clinic IV In this course, the student are required to manage patients with speech disorders and hearing impairment under supervision Students will have to perform interviewing session related asessment and interpretion of data collected. They also have to plan for the long and short term goals, weekly therapy plan and conduct therapy session on their own. Each decision made by students will be analysed critically during discussion with the supervisor. The student will be trained to make the diagnosis and prognosis for each case that they handle. Therefore, students must show adequate knowledge and critical thought during the discussion session in order to make proper diagnosis and prognosis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Meyer, S. M., Survival Guide for the Beginning Speech-Language Clinician, 2nd Ed., London: Pro-Ed Inc., 2004. Rhea, P., Language Disorders From Infancy Through Adolescence: Assessment and Intervention, 3rd Ed., St. Louis: Mosby, 2001. 162 3. Hull, R. H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001. GTP309/3-Hearing Impairment This is a theoretical course on hearing impairment and aural rehabilitation. The study of aural rehabilitation focuses mainly on paediatrics aural habilitation with an additional exposure on adults’ aural rehabilitation. The topics covered include hearing impairment and its effects on communication, audiological management and educational issues. This course emphasises on the methods of assessment and principles of interventions in managing individuals with hearing impairment. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hull, R. H., Aural Rehabilitation: Serving Children and Adults, 4th Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 2001. Johnson, C. E. & Danhauer, J. C., Guidebook for Support Programs in Aural Rehabilitation, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, 1999. Northern, J. C. & Davis, M. P., Hearing in Children, 5th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. GTP310/2-Speech Pathology Clinical Placement In this course, the students are required to help in handling various cases of paediatric and adult cases of speech and language disorders, hearing impairment, acquired neurogenic disorders, and voice and resonance disorders under selected supervisor from outside of the university. Depending on the supervisor’s judgment, the student may be asked to assist the clinician during the session. The students will be required to conduct the interviewing session and perform related formal/ informal assessment of the patient and also to plan for the goals and therapies. Ethics and related professional issues will also be highlighted. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Goldstein, B., Cultural and Linguistic Diversity Resource Guide for SpeechLanguage Pathologists, New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2000. Hedge, M. N., Treatment Protocols for Language Disorders in Children, Plural Publishing, Incorporated, 2005. Hedge,M. N., Clinical Methods and Practicum in Speech-Language Pathology, 5th Ed., New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2009. 163 GTS301/3-Sports Nutrition This course exposes students to the methods of identifying the nutritional requirements of the sports person in various sporting disciplines. Nutrional requirements of various sports events and additional ergogenic aids to enhance sports performance will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. McArdle, W.D., Katch, F.I., Katch, V.L., Sports and Exercise Nutrition, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Wildman R.E.C. and Miller B.S., Sports and Fitness Nutrition, Belmont, CA: Thomson/Wadsworth, 2004. Eberle S.G., Endurance Sports Nutrition, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2007. GTS302/2-Motor Learning This course introduces the students to learning theories and perception, and how these impact on motor learning, including the acquisition of motor skills, retention and forgetting of information. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Magill, R. A., Motor Learning. Concepts and Applications, Columbus, OH: McGraw-Hill, 2004. Schmidt, R. and Lee, T. Motor Control and Learning: A Behavioral Emphasis, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Schmidt, R. and Wrisberg, C., Motor Learning and Performance, Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2004. GTS303/3-Sports Injuries and Rehabilitation This course introduces the students to the concepts of trauma and injuries in sports, epidemiology of sport injuries and mechanism of injuries due to sport activities. Different types of sport injuries on specific body region will be discussed. Students will learn about the principles of rehabilitation process including the use of equipments for the treatment and therapies of particular sport injuries. Students will also be exposed on the post injury management related to rehabilitation program and learn how to implement the basic techniques for injury prevention in sports. 164 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Robert S. Gotlin, (Ed.). Sports Injuries Guidebook. Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2008. Freddie H. Fu, Stone & David A. Stone (eds). Sports Injuries: Mechanisms, prevention and treatment, 2nd Ed.. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. 2001. Selvanetti, A., Giombini, A., Puddu, G. (eds). Rehabilitation of Sports Injuries. Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg. New York. 2001 GTS304/3-Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology This course introduces the students to the anatomy of the skeletal-muscle and neuromuscular structure, helps to understand the functions and limitations of the systems, comprehend the types and causes of movement in sports and to analyse body motion. The course will focus on the development techniques of human motion analysis from the aspect of structure and function as well as the applied mechanical principles involved in human movement. Examples from joint movements and application of sports skills will be used for the analyses. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hamilton N., Welmar W. and Luttgens K., Kinesiology: Scientific basis for human motion, 11th Ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill Higher Education, 2008 Bartlett R., Introduction to Sports Biomechanics: Analysing human movement patterns, 2nd Ed., London: Taylor & Francis, 2007. Hall S.J., Basic Biomechanics, 5th Ed., Boston, Mass.: McGraw-Hill, 2007. GTS305/2-Applied Sports Physiology The course emphasises on physiological changes to the body based on influence from environment, training method, time and age level. The environmental aspects related to sport performance including problems during exercise in hot and damp environment will be discussed. Issues related to altitude training, circadian rhythm and jet lag phenomena will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Reilly T. and Waterhouse J., Sport, Exercise and Environmental Physiology, Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, 2005. Tipton C.M. (Eds) Sawka M.N., Tate C.A. and Terjung R.L. (Eds), ACSM's Advanced Exercise Physiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. Powers S.K. and Howley E.T., Exercise Physiology Theory and Application to Fitness and Performance, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2001. 165 GTS306/3-Coaching Science and Performance Analysis This course introduces the students to the information of sport sciences (anatomy, physiology, psychology, biomechanics, and skill acquisition) which are important for coaches. It also emphasises on the management, planning and interpersonal skills required by the modern coach. The course also covers advanced coaching means and methods, theoretical and practical aspects of planning, periodisation, forecasting and target setting in order to analyse sport performance. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Martens R., Successful Coaching, 3rd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2004. Pyke F.S., Australia Sports Commission, Better Coaching: Advance Coach’s Manual, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001. MacMorris T. and Hale T. Coaching Science: Theory Into Practice. John Wiley & Sons, 2006. Hughes M., Notational Analysis of Sport: Systems for Better Coaching and Performance in Sport, London: Routledge, 2004. GTS307/3- Physical Activity, Growth and Development This course introduces the students to issues related to physical growth and development with regards to physical activity. Discussion on the maturation process, morphological and functional changes in relation to exercise and training will be conducted. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thies K.M. and Travers J.F., Growth and Development through the Lifespan, 2nd Ed., Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett Publishers, 2009. Malina, R. M., Bar-Or, O., Bouchard, C., Growth, Maturation and Physical Activity, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2001. Jurimae, T. and Hills, A. P., Body Composition Assessment in Children and Adolescents, Karger, 2001. GTU302/3-Biostatistics This course introduces the students to the basics of biostatistics in relation to qualitative data analysis and quantitative analysis in medicine and health such as normal distribution, one-sample and two-sample case study, correlations, linear regression, one-way ANOVA, analysis of categorical data and analysis of numerical data. 166 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Daly, J., Gliksman, J. and Kellehear A. and Gliksman, M. (1997) Public Health Researcher: A Methodological Guide. UK: Oxford University Press. Daniel, W.W. (1998). Biostatistics: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences, 7th Ed., NJ: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1998. Norman, G.R and Streiner, D.L, Norman, G.R. (2000). Biostatistics - The Bare Essentials, 2nd Ed., Ontario: B.C. Decker Inc. GTU303/2-Research Methodology This course introduces students to various important concepts and aspects in research methodology. It encompasses the characteristics, types and approaches in research usually employed by researchers. Students will also be exposed to the integration of Health Science research mechanism with the Social Science counterpart as a comprehensive research. The process of scientific calculation of sample size, preparation and critical evaluation of research proposal, data analysis and research report writing will be given greater emphasis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R. (1999). Handbook for Research Methods in Health Science., Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman. Montgomery, D. (2000). Design and Analysis of Experiments (5th Ed.). NY: John Wiley and Sons. Zieger, M. (1999). Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers (2nd Ed.). NY: McGraw-Hill Professionals. GTU303/2-Research Methodology This course introduces students to various important concepts and aspects in research methodology. It encompasses the characteristics, types and approaches in research usually employed by researchers. Students will also be exposed to the integration of Health Science research mechanism with the Social Science counterpart as a comprehensive research. The process of scientific calculation of sample size, preparation and critical evaluation of research proposal, data analysis and research report writing will be given greater emphasis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R., Handbook for Research Methods in Health Sciences, Addison Wesley, Longman Australia, 1999. Zieger, M., Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers, 2nd Ed., McGrawHill Professionals, 1999. 167 3. Montgomery, D.C Design and Analysis of Experiments, 5th Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2000. GTX302/2-Radiation Protection and Safety I This course aims to expose the students theoretically regarding biological effects of ionizing radiation as well as basic principles on radiation protection. Students also will be taught through lectures and demonstration regarding radiation detection and measurement using available radiation detectors. This course also discuss the regulatory acts regarding the use of radiation and radiation safety in Malaysia especially the Atomic Energy Licensing Act (1984). This course also gives input to the students regarding Radiation Protection Programme as recommended by Atomic Energy Licensing Board (AELB). Students will be taught theoretically and through demonstrations regarding safety procedure and emergency involving radiation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ismail, B. and Mohd. Yusof, M.A., Managing Radiation Safety: Guide for Radiation Protection Officers, 1st Ed., McGraw Hill, 2007. Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H. and Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller’s Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2002. Martin, A. and Harbison, S.A., An Introduction to Radiation Protection, 5th Ed., A Hodder Arnold Publication, 2006. GTX307/3-Radiation Protection and Safety II This course is the continuity of Radiation Protection and Safety I course. This course concerns on giving input through lectures and practical regarding the application of basic principles in radiation protection towards medical fields. Students will be exposed on radiation protection and safety aspects including administration, work procedures and construction of three main departments in hospital: Diagnostic radiology, radiotherapy and nuclear medicine. Students will be exposed practically on workplace and personnel monitoring according to Atomic Energy Licensing Board (AELB) and Ministry of Health (MOH). Students also will be taught theoretically and practically regarding working procedures and safety aspects in research using radiation as well as radiation waste management. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. McGinley P.H., Shielding Techniques for Radiation Oncology Facilities, 2nd Ed., Medical Physics Publishing, 2002. Statkiewicz sherer, M.A., Visconti, P.J. and Ritenour, E.R., Radiation Protection in Medical Radiography, 5th Ed., Mosby, 2006. Lombardi, M.H., Radiation Protection in Nuclear Medicine, 2nd Ed., CRC, 2006. 168 GTX314/2-Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry This course focuses on radiation dosimetry. The theoretical aspects of radiation dosimetry for both photon and electron will be discussed. Topics on dosimetry of ionization chamber, thermoluminescent detector, film, gel and solid state detector also will be introduced. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee W.R. and Ibbott G.S., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. GTX316/3-Diagnostic Radiology Imaging This course focuses on the methods of imaging other than conventional ways including mammography, fluoroscopy, digital radiology, digital subtraction angiography (DSA), CT scan and MRI. It also includes quality assurance programmes, regulations on the use of radiation equipment and practical radiation protection. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allisy-Roberts, Penelope, Farr’s Physics for Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Elsevier, 2008. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A Science, 4th Ed., Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006. GTX317/3-Nuclear Medicine Imaging This course focuses on in-vivo radiation detection and the major components of imaging equipment including gamma camera and PET scanner. Image formation in nuclear medicine imaging with the performance parameters for both gamma camera and PET scanner and quality assurance will be discussed. Students will be taught the imaging techniques using gamma camera and PET scanner. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Chandra R., Nuclear Medicine Physics: The Basics, 6th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins, 2004. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. 169 3. Cherry, S.R., Sorenson, J.A. and Phelps, M.E., Physics in Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Elsevier, 2003. GTX320/3-Principles of Radiotherapy This course introduces students the basic principles of photon beam and electron beam therapies including basic physics and dosimetry of radiotherapy. Students will be taught the monitor unit calculation techniques for clinical applications. Students will also be exposed to the proper technique on calibration of photon beam and electron beam that generated by linear accelerator. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. Hendee, W.R., Ibbott, G.S. and Hendee, E.G., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., Wiley-Liss, 2004. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. GTX321/4-Imaging Techniques I This course gives the opportunity to students to carry out clinical training in the hospital related to diagnostic radiology. Students will learn various imaging procedures using xray machines. Students need to perform patient preparation and management during imaging procedures, include practising good communication skills. Students will be trained to practise the ethical and responsibillities of work in the imaging and diagnostic department List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006. Bontrager, K.L. and Lampignano, J.P., Textbook of Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy, 7th Ed., Elsevier Mosby, 2010. Sutherland, R. and Thomson C., Pocketbook of Radiographic Positioning, 3rd Ed., Churchill Livingston, 2007. 170 5.4. Core Courses Level 400 171 GTA401/6-Research Project This course requires the students to conduct and complete a research project in audiology over two semesters. The aim of this research project is to expose the students to research methodology and research problem solving methods. The results of the research are presented in the last semester of the program. List of text/reference books: References suitable for the research title. GTA402/3-Noise and Hearing This course discusses noise and its effects on health and hearing, types of noise, noise levels measurement, other measurement devices, and Malaysia’s Noise Control Act. Hearing conservation programme, hearing protection devices, noise-induced hearing loss and record keeping for noise exposed population will be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hinchcliffe, R., & Luxon, L. M., Noise and Hearing, London: Whurr, 2001. Luxon, L., & Prasher, D., Noise and its Effects, London: Whurr, 2007. Lipscomb, D. M., Hearing Conservation in Industry, Schools and the Military, 1st Ed., San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1995. GTA403/5-Audiology Clinic III In this course, students will be supervised for their clinical sessions either in or off campus during Year 3 long semester break and the first semester of Year 4. They are expected to improve their clinical skills such as client history, taking a conduct audiological assessment (subjective and objective tests), prescribe, evaluate and assess hearing aids, take ear-impression, write refer and reply letters to other professionals whenever necessary. Students will be trained to plan appropriate hearing tests or management prior to every clinical session, to explain results and counsel clients at the end of each clinical session. Student will actively involve and act competently in all aspects while under supervision and lesser assistant from supervisor. 172 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc. Hall, 1996. J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1998. GTA404/2- Ethics and Law for Health Professionals The aim of this course is to expose students to current issues in audiology field. Students are required to present or to conduct forum on selected audiological topics. This course will also expose the students to the professional code of ethics in Audiology and Speech based on the American Speech and Hearing Association (ASHA). Local issues are also discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Irwin, D. L., Pannbacker; M., Powell, T. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for Speech-Language Pathologists and Audiologists, An Illustrative Caseboo, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2007. Lubinski, R. & Frattali, C., Professional Issues in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, San Diego : Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 2000. GTA405/5- Audiology Clinic IV In this course, students will be supervised for their clinical sessions. The students are expected to improve their clinical skills such as client’s history taking, to conduct audiological assessment (subjective and objective tesst), to prescribe, evaluate and validate hearing aids, to take ear-impression, to write referral letters, and audiological reports to other professionals whenever necessary and competently while under supervision. Students will be trained to plan appropriate hearing tests or management prior to every clinical session and to explain results and counsel clients at the end of each clinical session. Student clinicians are expected to be involved competently in every aspect under supervision and with least assistance from the supervisor. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Katz, J., Burkard, R., Hood, L., & Medwetsky, L., Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2009. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologists' Desk Reference Volume I: Diagnostic Audiology Principles Procedures And Protocols, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1996. 173 3. Hall, J. W. & Mueller, H. G., Audiologist's Desk Reference, Volume II: Audiologic Management, Rehabilitation, And Terminology, San Diego: Singular Publishing Group, Inc., 1998. GTB404/3-Toxicology This course covers the introduction of toxicology, quantitative aspects and kinetics including the effects of dose, effect and tissue responses to toxic agents, the excretion of toxic substances, toxic reaction compounds, toxic substances such as solvent, food additives, herbicides and pesticides, detergents. Toxicity testing, in vitro and in vivo test, toxicokinetic, toxicity to target organs, particularly the human, carcinogen, mutagen teratogen, the mechanism of toxicity, laboratory tests, an antidote, and treatment are also being discussed. Students are exposed to knowledge regarding common toxins, genetoxicity and current issues with regards to harmful chemicals. In addition, students will be trained in the principles and practical techniques used in laboratory tests, such as acute and chronic toxicity, carcinogenecity, the detection of trace elements, the isolation and testing of compounds and the use of tools to study such as spectroscopy and chromatography. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Dart, R.C. (2003). Medical Toxicology, (3rd Ed.). Philadelphia:Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Hodgson. E. (2004). A Texbook of Modern Toxicology, (3rd. Ed.). NY: John Wiley and Sons. Klaasen, C.D. et al. (2003). Casarett & Doull’s Essential of Toxicology (1st Ed.). USA: McGraw Hill Companies Inc. Klaasen, C.D. et al. (2008). Casarett & Doull’s Toxicology the basic science of Poison, (7th Ed.). USA: McGraw Hill Companies Inc. GTB407/4-Industrial Training This is a core course in which student is given the choice to choose between gaining experiences in a research laboratory or in a healthcare-based laboratory. In research laboratory, student will be exposed to relevant practical skills in research. Student will be guided and supervised by the laboratory researcher in project to be determined by the supervisor. Student who chooses to perform his/her industrial training in clinical/industrial laboratory will get to experience the running, analysis and evaluation of various clinical or industrial tests. Student will also be exposed to various administrative or management skills in the laboratory. List of text/reference books: Relevant text books and peer-reviewed journals related to the field of interest. 174 GTB408/9-Biomedical Practicum This course covers the clinical laboratory services training catering for patients in HUSM. The students will have opportunity to acquire practical knowledge and skills through exposure in a real diagnostic laboratory working environment such as handling, performing, analyzing and interpreting the tests or test results according to individual patient’s condition or suspected disease. They will be able to apply previous laboratory or clinical theoretical knowledge in the form of practical skills. The scope of the training will also focus on the aspect of identifying the sources of problems in laboratory services and handling them, acquiring skills in performing analysis of clinical specimens, involving in implementation of quality control program, troubleshooting of equipments and laboratory management. This course is to build and increase the skills and knowledge of the students with regards to effective and qualitative laboratory management. List of text/reference books: Any text books relevant to the field of clinical/industrial attachment chosen by the students including those journals in their respective fields of speciality. GTB409/4-Research Project The students are required to carry out a research project in related fields in order to broaden their knowledge and skills in critical analysis and to acquire skills in scientific aspects for the testing of hypotheses in health science topics. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Minichiello V., Sullivan G., Greenwood K., and Axford R.(1999). Handbook for Research Methods in Health Sciences. Australia: Addison Wesley, Longman. Montgomery, D.C (2000).Design and Analysis of Experiments, 5th Ed. NY: John Wiley and Sons. Zieger, M. (1999). Essentials of Writing Biomedical Research Papers 2nd Ed., NY: McGraw-Hill Professionals Any test books/journals relevant to the fields or topics of research chosen by the students. GTB410/2-Laboratory Management Quality assurance has become an essential part of hospital services. It is described as systematic actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that a product or service will satisfy given needs. The course introduces students to the concept of total quality management (TQM) in clinical diagnostic laboratory. TQM in clinical diagnostic laboratory emphasized the deployment of quality assurance principles and practice through the development and implementation of quality assurance plans and phases. 175 Students will also learn the quality systems, ISO 9001, MS ISO 15189 and MS ISO/IEC 17025, in relation to the management of clinical diagnostic laboratory. Teaching and learning methods will be in form of lectures, seminars and practical attachment in various clinical diagnostic laboratories. Coursework assessment includes the evaluation of written assignment, written test and seminar presentations. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Carson, P. A. & Dent. N.J. (2007). Good clinical, laboratory and manufacturing practices: techniques for the QA professional. Cambridge: RSC Publication. Cooper G. & Gillions T. (2007). Producing Reliable Test Results in the Medical Laboratory. Irvin, CA: Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc Department of Standards Malaysia. (2005). MS ISO/IEC 17025:2005. General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories. Cyberjaya: Department of Standards Malaysia. Department of Standards Malaysia. (2008). MS ISO 15189:2007. Medical laboratories – Particular requirements for quality and competence. Cyberjaya: Department of Standards Malaysia. International Standards Organization. (2008). ISO 9001:2008. Quality management systems – Requirement (4th Ed.). ISO. Singer D. C., Stefan R. & and Staden J (2005). Laboratory Auditing for Quality and regulatory Compliance. NY: Taylor & Francis Group. GTD406/3-Outpatient Dietetic Practicum II This course is a continuation of Outpatient Dietetic Internship I which aims to develop students' self confidence in planning the diet and to handle diet counselling session under supervision. Students will be attached to specialist clinics including the pediatric, renal and surgical clinics. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Thomas B. and Bishop, T., Manual of Dietetic Practices, (The British Dietetic Association), Oxford: Blackwell Scientific, 2008. Bauer K.D and Sokolik, C.A, Basic Nutrition Counseling Skill Development, Wadsworth, 2002. Mahan K and Escott-Stump, S. Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th. Ed., Saunders Co., 2007 176 GTD407/3-Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II This course is a continuation of Dietetic Practicum in the Ward I which aims to enhance students’ dietetic skills in giving medical nutrition therapy to patients in hospital wards. Students will be attached to selected wards such as pediatric, general, surgical and medical wards under the supervision of respective dietitians. Students are required to give case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite of completion of this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Mahan, K and escott-Stump, S Krause’s Food, Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 12th Ed., Saunders Co., 2007 Nelms, M., Roth, S.L and Lacey K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach, 3rd Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008. Nix, S. William’s Basic Nutrition and Diet Theraphy. Mosby Elsevier, Canada, 2009. GTD408/3-Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II This course is a continuation of Dietetic Internship Special Unit I which aims to expand students' knowledge in giving appropriate medical nutrition therapy in specific fields such as pediatric, surgery, trauma, medical, renal, oncology, nutritional support and critical care. Intensive training will be provided by the respective dietitians. Students are required to give case presentations and case reports based on their case studies as a prerequisite to the completion of this course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Werbach MR, Jeffrey Moss J, Textbook of Nutritional Medicine, Third Line Press, 2000. Mahan, K and Escott-Stump, S. Krause’s Food, and Nutrition Therapy, 2008. Nelms M., Long, S. And Lacey, K. Medical Nutrition Therapy A Case Study Approach, 3rd Ed., Thomson Wadswoth, 2008. GTF400/2-Forensic Medicine This course introducesthe students to various kinds of death and its signs, fundamental knowledge on the various chemical transformations taking place after death, which form the basis for the estimation of time of death, on postmortem study, pattern and types of injuries. It include theoretical and practical aspects of the victims dying of unknown causes, killing, suicide, blunt/sharp force injuries, firearm & explosive injuries, asphyxia, drowning, burns and electricals shocks. Students will witness autopsy demonstrations and are taught the management of a mortuary, embalming and how to prepare a report of procedure and the causes of death for certain cases. 177 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Jurgen Ludwiig, Handbook of Autopsy Practice, 3rd Ed., Human Press, 2002. Maio, V.J.M, Dominic Dimaio and Dominic J. Dimaio, Forensic Pathology, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 2001. Robinson, P.S., Principles of Forensic Medicine, Oxford Press, Hong Kong, 1996. Jason Payne-James, Anthony Busuttil and William Smock, Forensic Medicine: Clinical and Pathological Aspects, Greenwich Medical Media, 2003. Saukko, Pekka, Knight’s Forensic Pathology, Arnold, 2004. GTF402/4-Ballistics and Chemistry of Explosives This course is a combination of ballistic and explosives. This course introduces concepts of ballistics and knowledge for ballistic and explosive investigations. It also covers the concepts of explosives and various types of firearms dan explosives commonly used by terrorist and criminals. This course is conducted at Chemistry Department by the experts in ballistics and explosives. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Vincent J. M. Di Maio, Gunshot Wounds: Practical Aspects of Fire Arms, Ballistics, and Forensic Techniques, 2 nd Ed., CRC Press, 2002. Jonas A.Zukas, William, P.Walters, Explosive Effects and Applications, Springer, 2002. Mike Pickett, Explosives Identification Guide, Delmer Publishers, 1998. Donald E. Carlucci and Sidney S. Jacobson, Ballistics - Theory and Design of Guns and Ammunition, CRC Press, 2007. Tom Warlow, Firearms, the Law, and Forensic Ballistics, 2nd Ed., CRC Press, 2005. GTF406/6- Research Projects The course offers opportunities for students of forensic science hands-on, career-related experience complementing their academic education. The students will engage in supervised research under the guidance of a faculty member. They are encouraged to select research topics in criminalistics, biological and chemical sciences, criminal profiling and forensic psychology. The course requires substantial independent work by students. The completion of the course will present the students the ability to better understand research methodologies. The course will also provide a strong science foundation and emphasize the scientific method and problem solving skills that will keep them in good stead, when they are employed in forensic laboratories. 178 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Guide to the preparation of dissertation for undergraduate research project, School of Health Sciences, USM, 2004. Journals and other references based on areas of research. GTF407/8-Forensic Practicum This course provides hands on training on crime scene management and forensic examination by way of mock crime scenes and moot court. The students will attend practical training in fingerprints, ballistics, and clandestine laboratory besides various chemical and instrumental methods of analysis. The students will be taken to real crime scenes and will be taught the various procedures in the search and collection of evidence materials. This course provides fundamental knowledge on the Malaysian Legal System and the police administration in processing of evidence materials. This course is conducted at Royal Malaysia Police College in Cheras and Forensic Laboratory. This course also provides detailed knowledge on the preparation of reports and presentation of evidence before courts of law. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Jami J. St. Clair, Crime Laboratory Management, Academic Press, 2003. Stuart H. James and Jon J. Nordby, Forensic Science: An Introduction to Scientific and Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2005. Donnell R. Christian, Forensic Investigation of Clandestine Laboratories, CRC Press, 2004. Henry C. Lee and R. E. Gaensslen, Advances in Fingerprint Technology, CRC Press, 2001. John Horswell, Practice of Crime Scene Investigation, Taylor & Francis, 2004. Max H. Houck, Mute Witnesses: Trace Evidence Analysis, Academic Press, 2001. Stuart H. James, Paul Erwin Kish, T. Paulette Sutton, Principles of Bloodstain Analysis : Theory and Practice, CRC Press, 2005. Barry A.J. Fisher, Techniques of Crime Scene Investigation, 7th Ed. CRC Press, 2004. Hal Sherman and Nicholas Petraco, Illustrated Guide to Crime Scene Investigation, CRC Press 2005. GTF408/2-Forensic Documents Examination This course introduces the students to various techniques to examine sample of questioned documents. The content of the course includes the principle techniques for the examination of questioned documents, as well as the formal report writing. Students will be trained to use the latest instruments related to the examination of questioned documents to equip them with appropriate knowledge and skills to be used in the understanding of related concepts and techniques. Practical training will include; 179 typewriting, handwriting, signature, examination of indentation marks, ink and paper analysis, identification of printing process, and identification of formal document authenticity. This course is conducted at Chemistry Department by experts in Questioned Documents. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ellen, D. The Scientific Examination of Documents-Methods and Techniques, 2nd Ed., Taylor and Francis, 1997. Roy, A. H. and Headrick, A. M. Handwriting Identification, Facts and Fundamentals, CRC Press LLC, 1999. Koppenhaven, K.M. Forensic Document Examination: Principles and Practices, Springer-Verlag, New York, 2007 Kelly, J.S. and Lindblom, B.J. Scientific Examination of Questioned Documents, Taylor & Francis, 2006. Hober, H.I, and Headrick A.M. Handwriting Identification, Facts and Fundamentals, Taylor and Francis, 2006. GTJ405/5-Medical Nursing Practicum This course provides opportunities to students to deliver nursing management to patient needed medical interventions. Students need to integrate knowledge and skill to provide holistic nursing care based on nursing process. Students will practice related nursing skill and to perform wad /unit management and give nursing education to patient and family. Emphasis will be given to the students in order to practice professionalism during clinical posting in the hospital and community setting. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing. critical thinking in client care, (4th. Ed.). Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B, & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing: Concepts, Process and Practice. (8th Ed.). Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Smeltzer, S. & Bare. (2004). Brunner and Sunddarth textbook of medical-surgical nursing, (10th. Ed.). J.B. Lippincott, Philadelphia. GTJ406/4-Surgical Nursing Practicum This course provides opportunities to students to delivering nursing management to patient needed surgical interventions. Students need to integrate knowledge and skill to provide holistic nursing care based on nursing process. Students will practice related nursing skill and to perform wad /unit management and give nursing education to patients and family. Emphasise will be given to the students in order to practice professionalism during clinical posting in the hospital and community setting. 180 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing. Critical thinking in client care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Berman, A., Synder, S., Kozier, B, & Erb, G. (2008). Fundamentals of nursing: Concepts, Process and Practice. (8th Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. Gulanick, M., & Myers, J.L. (2007). Nursing care plans: Nursing diagnosis and intervention (6th Ed.). Mosby Elsevier, USA GTJ407/4-Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum This course provides opportunities to student to deliver nursing management to patients that needed critical care and management of patients at community setting. Students need to integrate knowledge and skill to provide holistic nursing care based on nursing process. Students will practice related nursing skill and to perform wad /unit management and give nursing education to patients and family. Emphasis will be given to the student in order to practice professionalism during clinical posting in the hospital and community setting. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Allender, J.A., Rector, C., & Warner, K.D. (2010). Community health nursing: Promoting & protecting the public health (7th ed.). China: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Sole, M. L., Klein, D. G., & Moseley, M. J. (2009). Introduction to Critical Care Nursing (5th ed.). Utah: Saunders. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. M. (2008). Medical-surgical nursing: Critical thinking in client care, (4th. Ed.) Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey. GTJ408/4-Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum The structured nursing practicum is designed to give the student exposure and clinical experience in the field of maternal, child and women health. This is an application course of maternal, child and gynecological nursing and primary care. Students will integrate this knowledge in providing holistic nursing care using the nursing process and practice the related nursing skills safely and efficiently. Opportunity will be given to students in performing client and family health teaching. Emphasis will be given on professional practice and attitudes during clinical practicum in the hospital and community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Towle M.A. (2009). Maternal-Newborn Nursing Care. Pearson Education, Inc., Upper Saddle River, New Jersey. Beckham C, Ling FW, Barzanksy BM, Herbert WN, Laube DW & Smith RP (2009). Obstetrics and Gynecology, 6 ed., Lippincott, Williams & Wilkins Publishers 181 3. Lowdermilk P (2006). Maternity Nursing, Mosby Inc., Missouri, Unites States of America GTK401/8-Environmental And Occupational Health Practicum Through USM-industry collaboration, the students will be placed at selected government or private organisations for a semester. Students will be exposed to the actual situation of environmental and occupational safety and health problems, which exists in the world of work. Students have the opportunity to practice the knowledge that they have learned and improve their skills as well as to prepare themselves to face the real situation in the workplace. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS). 2009. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Akta Pengurusan Sisa Pepejal Dan Pembersihan Awam 2007 (Akta 672). PNMB, 2007. Akta Petroleum (Langkah-Langkah Keselamatan) 1984 (Akta 302). PNMB, 2005. GTK402/8-Research Project Students will conduct a research project in the field of Environmental and Occupational Health. This aims to increase knowledge and research skills and to share the research results through scientific writing and presentation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Wayne W. Daniel. Biostatistics, Student Solutions Manual: A Foundation For Analysis In The Health Sciences (Wiley Series In Probability And Statistics). John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2009. L. Gordis. Epidemiology. W.B. Saunders Company. 2009. W. B. Weimer. Notes On The Methodology Of Scientific Research. John Wiley & Sons., 1979. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. 182 GTK403/4-Environmental And Occupational Law This course focuses on existing law and enforcement activities in Malaysia in relation to environmental protection, occupational safety and health. Problems encountered in law enforcement will also be discussed. Students will be exposed to the detail of legal requirements and documentation with their implications. The course content is aligned to the content of Module II of Occupational Health and Safety Officer’s Course, required by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Ministry of Human Resources, Malaysia. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Akta Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan 1994 (Akta 514) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Akta Kualiti Alam Sekeliling 1974 (Akta 127) Dan Peraturan-Peraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Akta Kilang Dan Jentera 1967 (Pindaan - 1974) (Akta 139) Dan PeraturanPeraturan Dan Perintah-Perintah. International Law Book Services (ILBS), 2009. Lazarus R. J. The Making of Environmental Law. University of Chicago Press, 2004. Abraham R. H. et al. Environmental Law and Policy : Nature, Law and Society. Aspen Publishers, 2004. JKKP GP (BM) 04/2003. Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan dan Kesihatan, Modul l - lV. Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara, Malaysia, 2003. GTK404/3-Environmental Management This course introduce students to the ISO 14001 environmental management system. Students are exposed to the detail of the need for such standards and are trained to provide documentation and to conduct internal audits. Environmental Impact Assessment, Social Impact Assessment, an integrated modeling and management of the environment will also be described. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Miller G.T., Environmental Science, Working With The Earth, Thompson Learning Science, 2009. Radojevic M. & Bashkin V., Practical Environmental Analysis, Royal Society of Chemistry, 2006. Cheremisinoff P.N. & Cheremisinoff N.P., Professional Environmental Auditor’s Handbook, William Andrew, 1993. Schoffman A. & Tordini A.M., ISO 14001 : A Practical Approach. An American Chemical Society Publication, 2003. Friedman F.B., Practical Guide to Environmental Management, 9th Edition. Environmental Law Institute, 2003. 183 GTK405/8- Management of Occupational Safety and Health This course introduces the students to the system of occupational safety and health management practices in Malaysia such as OSHAS 18001, ILO-OSH 2001 and MS 1722. It is expected to cultivate a caring attitude and self-regulate to employees and employers in creating a work environment that is safe and healthy. This course will also include documentation, training, performance assessment and audit methodologies. The course content is aligned to Module I, Occupational Safety and Health Officer required by the Department of Occupational Safety and Health, Ministry of Human Resources, Malaysia. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. JKKP GP (BM) 04/2003. Manual Kursus Sijil Pegawai Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan, Modul l - lV. Institut Keselamatan dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan Negara, Malaysia, 2003. Ismail Bahari. Pengaturan Sendiri Dalam Pengurusan Keselamatan Dan Kesihatan Pekerjaan. McGraw Hill Education, 2002. ILO-OSH. Guidelines On Occupational Safety And Health Management Systems, 2001. GTN401/3-Food Service and Industry Practicum This course emphasizes on food service handling (in hospitals, institutions, industry and restaurants) and the relationship between quantitative food manufacturing with different menus, equipments, service staff, time of serving, kitchen sanitation, food preparation and quality assurance. The main focus is on the practical sessions at hospitals, institutions, industries and major restaurants. Lectures and briefing sessions will be given on the first week or before the commencement of internship. The students will undergo internship service for a period of 4 weeks in recognised premises. During internship attachments, the students are required to observe the utilisation of equipments, services and food management under supervision. List of text/reference books: 1 2 3 Knight JBL & Korschevar LH., Quantity of Food Production, Planning and Management, 3rd Ed., New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1999. Byers BA, Shanklin CW, Hoover LC, Hoover LA, Food Service Manual for Health Care Institutions, 2nd Ed., American Hospital Pub. Inc., 1997. Spears MC & Marquardt NW., Food Service Organization: A Managerial and Systems Approach, 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 1999. 184 GTN403/6-Research Project in Nutrition This course requires the students to execute a research in related field to increase knowledge and experience in critical analysis. The students are guided to obtain skills in scientific aspects to test certain hypothesis especially those related to health sciences field. Students are expected to produce a dissertations at the end of the course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Eunsook T., Introduction to Nutrition and Health Research, Boston: Kluver Academic Publication, 2001 Heppner P.P, Writing and Publishing Your Thesis, Dissertation, and Research: a Guide for Students in the Helping Professions, Belmont: Thomson Brooks/Cole, 2004 GTN405/3-Current Issues in Nutrition This course provides an opportunity to students to discuss contemporary issues related to Malaysian nutrition intake. Controversial issues such as ‘new form of conquering’ by the introduction of fast food, introduction of processed foods from other countries/continents and its impact on Malaysian food intake quality will be discussed. Other topics include therapeutic and nutraceutical food consumption, fad diet, association of food with cancer disease and obesity will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Wardlaw, GM and Wardlaw G, Contemporary Nutrition: Issues and Insight with Foodworks, New York: McGraw-Hill Science/Engineering/Maths, 2000. Nestle, M, Food Politics: How the Food Industry Influences Nutrition and Health, California: University of California Press, 2003. Brownell, KD and Horgen, KB, Food Fight: The Inside Story of Food Industry, America’s Obesity Crisis, and What We Can Do About It, New York: McGraw Hill, 2003. Schlosser, E, Fast Food Nation: The Dark Side of the All-American Meal, New York: Harper Collins, 2002. De Graff J, Wann, D, Naylor, TH, Horsey, D, and Simon, S, Affluenza: The All Consumming Epidemic, New York: Berrett-Koehler Publisher, 2002. 185 GTN407/3-Nutrition and Dietetics Seminar This course requires students to perform a library search and to read additional materials in the field of dietetics and nutrition. They are also required to do a literature review to explore the nutrition discipline. Students are guided with research process in terms of statement of the problem, literature review, experimental design, hypothesis, analysis, interpretation and presentation of data, writing, discussing, concluding and giving of proper recommendation in the writing of dissertations and scientific articles. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Wardlaw GMM, Contemporary Nutrition, Issues and Insights, 5th Ed., Boston : McGrawHill, 2002. Nassabaum M, Adolescent Nutrition and eating Disorders, Elsevier Science, 1998. Jaffe, MS, Hobbs J, Holthausen B, Geriatric Nutrition and Diet Therapy, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning, 1998. GTP401/2-Augmentative and Alternative Communication This course provides knowledge on the augmentative and alternative communication (ACC) as a communication method for those who cannot communicate verbally. The topics are types, methods and features of ACC. In addition, assessment and intervention principles of ACC will also be discussed. List of text/reference book: 1. 2. 3. Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication: Management of Severe Communication Disorders in Children and Adults, Baltimore: Brookes Publishers, 1998. Tetzchner, S. V. & Martinsen, H., Introduction to Augmentative and Alternative Communication, London: Whurr Publishers, 2000. Beukelman, D. R. & Mirenda, P., Augmentative and Alternative Communication: Supporting Children and Adults With Complex Communication Needs. Baltimore: Paul H. Brooked Pub, 2006. GTP402/6- Research Project This is a one-term course that requires students to complete a research project under supervision. Research topics may be in the field of speech pathology or other related fields such as linguistics, psychology, special education or audiology. At the end of the term, students are required to present their final outcomes and produce a complete thesis to be assessed. 186 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Silverman, F. H., Research Design and Evaluation in Speech-Language Pathology and Audiology, 4th Ed., Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1998. Kuzma, J. W. & Bohnenblust, S. E., Basic Statistics for the Health Sciences, 5th Ed., Mountain View: Mayfield Pub., 2005. Ruscello, D. M., Tests and Measurements in Speech-Language Pathology, Boston: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1999. GTP403/6-Speech Pathology Clinic V This course requires the students to manage referred patients and conduct cases on their own under supervision. They have to perform all the assessment nessessary to evaluate the patient’s condition and ability, analyse and interprete the data collected and then plan for goals and weekly therapy. Student are also required to give counselling to the patient, where needed. At this stage, students will be exposed to the speech diagnostic tools and will be allowed to use it on their own. The students must show an adequate knowledge and critical thought during discussion session in order to make proper diagnosis and prognosis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Boone, M. & Von Berg, The Voice and Voice Therapy, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2005. McHenry, W. & McHenry, J., What Therapists Say and Why They Say It: Effective Therapeutic Responses and Techniques, Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 2007. Hedge, M. N., A Coursebook on Aphasia and Other Neurogenic Language Disorder. New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006. GTP404/2–Swallowing Problems This is a theoretical course which focuses on swallowing disorders and feeding difficulties. The topics include definitions, etiologies and characteristics of swallowing problems. This course also discusses the methods of assessment and principles of intervention in managing individuals with swallowing problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Carrau, R. L., & Murry, T. Comprehensive Management of Swallowing Disorders. San Diego. Singular Publishing Group, 2006 Aevedson, J. C., & Brodsky, L. Pediatric Swallowing and Feeding. San Diego.: Singular Publishing Group, 2002 Logemann, J. (1998). Evaluation and Treatment of Swallowing Disorders 2nd Ed., Texas: Pro-ed, 1998 187 GTP406/6- Speech Pathology Clinic VI This course requires the student to manage referred patient and conduct the case on their own, especially for acquired neurogenic and dysphagia cases while under supervision. Students will have to perform the interviewing session, related asessment and interpretion of data collected. They also have to plan for the long and short term goals, weekly therapy, plan and conduct the therapy session on their own. The students are also required to give counselling to the patient, where needed. The student must be able to make proper diagnosis and prognosis. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Corbin-Lewis, K., Liss, J. M. & Sciortino, K., Clinical Anatomy and Physiology of the Swallow Mechanism, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2005. Leonard, R. & Kendall, K., Dysphagia Assessment and Treatment Planning: A Team Approach, 2nd Ed., New York: Thomson Delmar Learning, 2007. Irwin D.L., Pannbacker, M., Powell, P. W. & Vekovius, G. T., Ethics for SpeechLanguage Pathologist and Audiologist. An Illustrative Casebook, New York: Thomson Delmar learning, 2007. GTP407/2-Learning Disabilities This course focuses on the learning disabilities and education for children with communication disorders. The topics include theories and processes of learning, etiologies and characteristics of learning disabilities. this course also emphasises on the educational issues that are related to children with communication disorders and learning disabilities. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Harwell, J.M., jackson R. W., The Complete Learning Disabilities Handbook: Ready-To-Use Strategies and Activities for Teaching Students with Learning Disabilities (Jossey-Bass teacher). California: Jossey-Bass Publisher, 2008. Lerner, J. W. Learning Disabilities Theories, Diagnosis, and Teaching Strategies. 10th Ed.,, Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 2005 Fletcher, M., Lyon, G. R., Fuchs, L. S. & Barnes, M.A., Learning Disabilities: From Identification to Intervention. New York: The Guilford Press, 2006 GTS401/3-Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription Thi course introduces the students to the basic principles of physical fitness as well as to the adoption of a regular program of prescribed physical exercise, the health-related components of fitness and exercise prescription for endurance, strength, and flexibility. Students will be able to determine fitness and stress status and to implement suitable exercise programmes. 188 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Franklin, B.A. (Ed.), ACSM's Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription, 7th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. Golding, L. A., YMCA Fitness Testing and Assessment Manual, 4th Ed., Human Kinetics Publishers, Inc., 2000. Nieman, D.C., Exercise Testing and Prescription: A Health-Related Approach, 6th Ed., Boston: McGraw-Hill, 2007 GTS402/6-Research Project This course exposes students to the research process that requires skill in planning, handling and analysis of data. The students are required to submit their dissertation in the given format. List of text/reference books: Journals and other references based on areas of research. GTS403/4-Industrial Training The course enables the students to gain experience in actual working environment in the exercise and sports industry. During attachment, the students will be involved in day-today activities of exercise, sports and therapeutic methods in a relevant organisation. List of text/reference books: Journal and other references based on areas of research being choosen. GTS404/2-Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices This course discusses the selected contemporary issues in sports science from local and worldwide perspectives. Students are expected to draw on the knowledge and practical skills to debate on important issues within sports science. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Cheung, S.S. (2010), Advances Environmental Exercise Physiology, Human Kinetics, Champaign, IL. M. Collins (Ed.) (2009), Genetics and Sport, Karger, Basel, Switzerland. Samuel R. Bakere, (2008), Hot Topics in Sports and Atheletics, Nova Science Publishers Inc. New York. 189 GTS405/3-Sports Management This course explores the basics of sports organisation, hierarchy of sports organisation and their role in the development of sports. Basic management of physical education and sports plus the detailed explaination of management and running of various physical education and sports programs will be covered. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bucher C.A. Krotee M.L., Management of Physical Education and Sports, 12th Ed., McGraw-Hill, 2002. Appenzeller H., Risk Management in Sport: Issues and Strategies, Durham, N.C.: Carolina Academic Press 1998. Horine L., Administration of Physical Education and Sport Programs, 4th Ed., New York: McGraw-Hill, 1999. GTS406/3-Adapted Physical Activity The course aims to provide knowledge and understanding to the students on the recent concepts, trends and information regarding adapted physical activity and sports. The students will also learn the different types of disability that affect physical and motor performance as well as the physical adaptation adopted by the special groups. This course is developed to raise awareness and understanding for adapted physical activity and sports that will further benefit the special community. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Claudine, S. Adapted physical activity, recreation, and sport: Crossdisciplinary and lifespan, 6th Ed., Boston, MA: McGraw-Hill, 2004. DePauw, K.P. & Gavron, S.J., Disability Sport, 2nd Ed., Champaign, IL: Human Kinetics, 2005. Lewis V., Development and Disability, 2nd Ed., Oxford: Blackwell Publishing, 2003. GTS407/3-Therapeutic Exercises The course covers the study of the causes, prevalence and incidence of diseases in the human population and the effects of physical activity on them. Students will be exposed to how exercise is used in the prevention and treatment of chronic diseases. 190 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Saltin B. (ed), Exercise and Circulation in Health and Disease, Champaign, Illinois: Human Kinetics, 2000. American College of Sports Medicine, ACSM's Exercise Management for Person's with Chronic Diseases and Disabilities, 2nd Ed., Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003. Ehrman J.K., Gordon P.M., Visich P.S. and Keteyian S.J., Clinical Exercise Physiology, Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003. GTX402/2-Brachytherapy This course discusses physics and dosimetry aspects of brachytherapy. It covers sources commonly used in brachytherapy and types of brachytherapy. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee, W.R., Ibbott, G.S. and Hendee, E.G., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., Wiley-Liss, 2005. Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H., Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller's Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. GTX405/2-Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I This course provides students with theoretical and practical knowledge in the QA of equipments for diagnostic imaging like general radiography, fluoroscopy radiography and mammography imaging. Students will carry out QA tests based on recent standards and protocols to ensure that proper functioning of diagnostic equipment for patient service. Students are trained to practise the ethical and responsibillities of work in the imaging and diagnostic department. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Stevens, A.T., Quality Management for Radiographic Imaging: A Guide for Technologists, 1st Ed., Mc Graw-Hill, 2001. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. Carlton, R.R. and Adler, A.M., Principles of Radiographic Imaging: An Art and A Science, 4th Ed., Thomson Delmar Learning, 2006. 191 GTX406/6–Research Project This course gives the students the opportunities to perform research projects by selecting a particular topic either radiology, nuclear medicine, radiotherapy or radiation protection as the initial exposure to life long learning in research. At the same time, students can write their research findings scientifically as disertation that to be submitted at the end of the second semester in Year 4. This course trains the students to complete projects and dissertation submission. List of text/reference books: Journals and other references based on areas of research being chosen. GTX407/3–Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II This course consists of two parts, quality assurance in radiotherapy and nuclear medicine. For radiotherapy, students will be trained to perform calibration of linear accelerator according to IAEA TRS 398:2000 protocols for photon and electron beam as well as other quality assurance tests such as gantry and isocenter test, and beam alignment test. Students also will be trained to perform calibration of Ir-192 source for brachytherapy. For nuclear medicine, students will be trained to perform routine quality assurance test for gamma camera such as uniformity test, spatial resolution test and center of rotation test for SPECT imaging. Students are also trained to perform calibration of radiopharmaceuticals such as chi-square test for radionuclide. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Springer, 2005. Bomford C.K., Kunkler I.H., Sheriff S.B., Walter and Miller's Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2002. Khan F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2003. GTX408/3–Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy This course introduces the students to the methods for dose calculation manually for radiotherapy and procedures, and techniques for treatment planning including simulation. Students will be taught to use computer for generating treatment plans for patient cases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. Jayaramans, S and Lanzl, L.H., Clinical Radiotherapy Physics, 2nd Ed., SpringerVerlag, 2004. 192 3. Khan, F.M., Treatment Planning in Radiation Oncology, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2006. GTX410/4–Imaging Techniques II In this course, students will be attached to the department of radiology and nuclear medicine under supervision of clinical instructors. Students will be trained on medical imaging especially special techniques in medical imaging including CT scan, DSA and MRI. Students also will be trained in nuclear medicine imaging including preparation of radiopharmaceuticals, imaging techniques and quality assurance in nuclear medicine. Students need to perform patient management and preparation for imaging techniques, inlude practising good communication skills. Students will be trained to practise the ethical and responsibillities of work in the imaging and diagnostic department List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Greathouse, J.S., Radiographic Positioning and Procedures: A Comprehensive Approach, Delmar Learning, 2006. Bontrager, K.L. and Lampignano, J.P., Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy, Elsevier Mosby, 2005. Ballinger, P.W. and Frank, E.D., Merrill’s Atlas of Radiographic Positions and Radiological Procedures, 10th Ed., Elsevier Mosby, 1999. GTX411/4–Radiotherapy Techniques In this course, students will be attached to radiotherapy unit under minimum supervision. Students are trained to handle processes in radiotherapy such as treatment planning, dose calculations, simulation, patient positioning, and handling of therapy modalities. Students will also be trained special techniques in radiotherapy such as SRT radiotherapy and brachytherapy. Students will be trained to work in a team at radiotherapy unit and display good leadership, responsibilties and ethical values throughtout their training. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Washington, C.M. and Leaver, D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. Khan, F.M., The Physics of Radiation Therapy, 3rd Ed., William and Wilkins, 2003. Bomford, C.K. and Sheriff, S.B., Walter and Miller’s Textbook of Radiotherapy, 6th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, 2003. 193 GTX412/3-Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques In this course, students will be attached to nuclear medicine unit. Students are trained to handle nuclear medicine imaging procedures such as 2-dimensional imaging and SPECT (single photon emission computed tomography). Students will be trained to work in a team at nuclear medicine unit and display good leadership, responsibilties and ethical values throughtout their training. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Shackett, P., Nuclear Medicine Technology: Procedures and Quick Reference, 2nd Ed., Lippincott William and Wilkins, 2009, Baltimore. Sharp, P.F., Gemmell, H.G. and Murray, A.D., Practical Nuclear Medicine, 3rd Ed., Springer, 2005, London. Christian, P.E., Nuclear Medicine and PET: Technology and Techniques, Waterstram-Rich, K.M., 6th Ed., Mosby, 2007, St Louis. GTX413/3–Professional Training This course provides opportunities to students to learn the applications of radiation in a working environment clearly included diagnostic and therapeutic procedures, research and application of radiation protection. Students will be able to observe the installation and commissioning of radiation equipments in hospitals or medical centers by suppliers. Students will be trained to present case study verbally and to manage case taking and report writing systematically. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hendee W.R. and Ibbott G.S., Radiation Therapy Physics, 3rd Ed., John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2003. Bushberg, J.T., Seibert, J.A., Leidholdt, Boone, J., E.M., Essential Physics of Medical Imaging, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2002. Washington C.M. and Leaver D.T., Principles and Practice of Radiation Therapy, 2nd Ed., Mosby, 2004. 194 6.0 Elective Courses 195 GEG103/3-Fitness and Health This course provides knowledge on theory, principle and method in fitness activities for health and fitness. Students will learn various methods in evaluating individual’s fitness level related to their health. Other components such as nutrition, body composition and mental health are also emphasised. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Shakey, B.O., Brian, J. Fitness and Health, 5th Ed. Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2002. Edward T.H., Franks, B.D. Health and Fitness Instructor’s Handbook, 4th Ed, Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2003. Jackson, A.W. Physical Activity for Health and Fitness. Champaign: Human Kinetics, 2004. ACMS’s Health Related Physical Fitness Assessment Manual, 3rd Ed., Philadelphia: Walters Kluwer Health/Lippincot Willims & Wilkings Health, 2010. GEG109/2-History of Health Sciences This course exposes the history and development of science and medicine. It covers historical aspects of Greek philosophy, modern medicine and history of medicine from the earlier years to the present. Aspects of social sciences, religion, philosophy of physical sciences, behavioral sciences, biological sciences and medicine outside of Europe including the impact of Islam in the field of medicine and health will also be explored. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Spector, R.E., Cultural Diversity In Health And Illness, New Jersey : Prentice Hall, 2010. Weiss, G.L. & Lonnquist, L.E., The Sociology Of Health, Healing And Illness, New Jersey : Prentice Hall, 2009. Osman Bakar, Tawhid And Science, Shah Alam : Arah Publication, 2008. GEG114/2-Oral Health This course provides an introduction to anatomy and physiology of teeth and related structures. Further discussion will cover the etiology, pathogenesis and pathology of the teeth and gum disease and prevention methods at the individual and community levels. 196 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bhaskar, S.N., Orban’s Oral Histology and Embryology, 12th Ed., Mosby 1990. Daniel, SJ. Mosby’s Dental Hygiene. St. Louis: Mosby, 2004. Scully, C. ABC of Oral Health. London: BMJ Books, 2002. Wilkins, EM. Clinical Practice of the Dental Hygienist. 9th Ed., Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005. GTK103/3-Biodiversity The course introduces the students to major phyllums of organisms in earth. Emphasis is given to differentiate the organisms based on their distinct characteristics. The importance of interspecific interactions and its surroundings will be briefed. At end of this course, students will be able to identify various organisms living in their neighbourhood and be more conscious on activities that destroys earth biodiversity. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Levin S. A., Encyclopedia Of Biodiversity, (E-Book), 2007. Mader S. S., Inquiry Into Life, 10th edition. McGraw-Hill, 2003. Shiva V., Tomorrow's Biodiversity, London: Thames and Hudson, 2000. Andesirk T & Andesirk G., Biology: Life On Earth, Prentice-Hall, 1999. GEG201/2-Women’s Health This course introduces the students to the new definition and paradigm of women’s health. Students wil be exposed to a more holistic approach to women’s health not limited to maternal and child are. Several factors that influence the status of women’s health such as economic, politics, religion and social cultural practices will be examined. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Women's Health and Social Change, Ellen Anandale, London: Routledge, 2009. Women's Health Encyclopedia: An Integrated Approach to Wellness for Every Season of A Women's Life New York: The Reader's Digest Association, 2010. Botanical Medicine for Women's Health Aviva Romm ; Forewords by Mary L. Hardy, Simon Mills St. Louis, Mo.: Churchill Livingstone/Elsevier, 2010. Women's Health in Physical Therapy Editor : Jean M. Irion, Glenn L. Irion Philadelphia: Wolters Kluwer Health/Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2010. Diversity and Women's Health, Sue V. Rosser. Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2009. 197 GEG203/2-Health Economics The course covers both the microeconomic and utilization of healthcare services as well as its association with issues within the health organization and its deliverable to the community. Economic evaluation as a basis of healthcare policy making will be discussed focusing on both; individual and community and supply and demand in health care services. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Clewar, A & Perkins, D. Economics for Health Care Management. New York: Prentice Hall, 1998. Drummond, M.F. Method for the Economy Evaluation of Health Care Programmes. 2nd. Ed, Oxford: Oxford Medical Publication, 1997. Getzen, T.E. Health Economics: Fundamentals and Flow of Funds. New York: Prentice Hall, 1996. Mooney, G. Economics, Medicine and Health Care, 2nd. Ed., London: Harvester Wheatsheaf Publications, 1995 GEG204/3-Gender Perspectives In Health This course introduces students to a framework of analysis to understand the reason for gender to be an important determinant factor in health. Students will examine the interaction between gender and other factors in determining health standard, risks and illness among men and women. The course will also discuss the importance of gender perspective in forming health policy as well as in the development of health education. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Gillian Bendelow, ed., Gender Health and Healing: The Public and Private Divide, London, Roulledge 2002. Amy J Schultz, Leith Mullings (eds), Gender, Race, Class and Health; Intersectional Approaches, San Francisco, Josey Bass, 2006. Chloe, E.Bird, Patricia P. Rieker(eds), Gender and Health: the Effects of Constrained Choices and Social Policies, Cambridge, Cambridge University press, 2008. Women Health Organization Western Pacific Region; Integrating Poverty and Gender Into Health Programmes, A source Book for Healthcare Professionals, Manila Philippines, 2008. 198 GTS207/2 – Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports This course introduces the students to basic skills and game play for some sports including badminton, soccer , volleyball and archery, by relating with the principles in kinesiology, physiology, biomechanic and socio-psychology. This course will also emphasize on skills acquisition, performance, competition and analysis of the games. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Haywood K.M and Lewis C.F. Archery: Steps to success Champaign IL: Human Kinetic, 2006. Lennox, James, W. Soccer Skills and Drills Champaign IL: Human Kinetics, 2006. Pearson D. Squash: The Skills of The Game Marlborough: Crowood Press, 2001. Zartman, S. Youth Volleyball : The Guide for Coaches, Parents, and Athletes Betterway Books, 2006. GEG208/2-Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations The course covers both the theory and practice as regard to estimate and controlling of human resource within health organization. It covers the basic principles of managing, planning, problem solving, staffing and achievement evaluation within the said organization. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Burrows, M. Management for Doctors. London: Butterworth Heineman Publications, 1994 Longest, B.B. Health Professionals in Management. New York: Appleton and Lange Publications, 1993. Rakiah, J.S. Managing Health Services Organization. New York: Health Professional Publishers, 1992. Pena, J.J. & Valerie, A. Hospital Management: Winning Strategies for The 80s. Maryland: Aspen Publication, 1985. GEG213/3-Stress Management This course exposes students to a holistic approach for stress management. It treats both cognitive (coping) skills and relaxation techniques with the intention of preventing and/or alleviating the physical symptoms of stress. 199 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Blonna, R. Coping With Stress in a Changing World, 4th Ed., N.Y.: McGraw-Hill, 2007. Greenburg, J.S. Comprehensive Stress Management 9th Ed. N.Y.: McGraw-Hill, 2005. Olpin, M. & Hesson, M. Stress Management for Life: A Research-Based Experiential Approach. Minnesota: Brooks Cole Pub., 2007. Palmer, S. & Puri, A. Coping with Stress at University: A Survival Guide. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Pub. Inc., 2006. Linden, W. Stress Management: From Basic Science to Better Practice. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Pub. Inc., 2005. Lovallo, W.R. Stress & Health: Biological and Psychological Interactions 2nd Ed., Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage Pub., 2005. GEG214/2-Personality and Health This course enables the students to describe how the study of psychological principles applies to personality, the Assessment, Measurement, and Research Design used in personality psychology, the six domains of knowledge, the core theorists involved in the exploration of personality and the development of personality and its interaction to one’s health in order to understand themselves and others. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Cloniger, S., Theories of Personality: Understanding Persons, 5th Ed., New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 2007. Larsen, R.J., & Burn, D.M., Personality Psychology: Domains of Knowledge about Human Nature, 4th Ed., New York, NY: McGraw-Hill, 2010. Mischel, W., Shoda, Y., & Smith, R. E.. Introduction to Personality: Toward an Integration, 7th Ed., New Jersey: Wiley & Sons, 2004. GEG302/3-Violence and Society This course introduces the students to the concept and theory of violence in a society. An interactive discussion on the interpersonal violence such as violence in family, towards children and elderly will be included. Students will also be exposed to theory and intervention to overcome violence. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Holmes, S.T. & Holmes R.M, Violence A Contemporary Reader, Pearson, New Jersey, 2004. Burns, Ronald, Culture and Determinants of Crimes, Environment Behaviour, Vo.32, Issue 3, p347, 2000. 200 3. 4. Van Crevel Martin, A Women’s Place: Refelction of the Origin of Violence, Social Research, vol 67, issue 3, p285, 2000. Itzin, Catherine (ed), Home truths About Child Sexual Abuse, Routledge, London, 2000. GEG303/2-Tissue Banking This course introduces the students to the principles of tissue banking. Specific topics to be discussed include the history, terminology, basic anatomy and immunological identification of organ and tissue transplants, legal and ethical organ and tissue act, Quality Assurance, the principles of sterilization, radiation sterilization and validation, bioburden determination, the importance of organ and tissue donation in health care, infectious disease through transplantation and clinical application of tissue. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. G.O. Phillips, R. Von Versen, D.M Strong, Advances in Tissue Banking Vol. 5, Nather, S'pore, 2001. Julia M Polak, Larry L Hench, P Kemp, Future Strategies for Tissue and Organ Replacement, Imperial College Press, 2002. Aziz Nather, Norimah Yusof, Nazly Hilmy, Radiation in Tissue Banking - Basic Science and Clinical Applications of Irradiated Tissue Allografts, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd., 2007. Aziz Nather, Norimah Yusof, Nazly Hilmy, Allograft Procurement, Processing & Transplantation - A Comprehensive Guide for Tissue Banks, World Scientific Publishing Co. Pte. Ltd., 2010. GEG304/2-Communication and Self Development This course introduces the students to various topics on basic knowledge of communication skills in order to develop their self image and generate self development. The course will also emphasise on public speaking, handling of interview, presentation of working paper as well as developing self confidence and assertiveness. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Paul Nelson, Scott Titsworth, Judy Pearson, iSpeak: Public Speaking for Contemporary Life, International Edition, Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2010. Charles J. Stewards, William B. Cash. Jr, Interviewing: Principles and Practices, 12th Ed., Mc Graw Hill Companies, Inc., 2008. Charles S. Carver, Michael F. Scheier, Perspectives on Personality, 6th Ed. Pearson Education, Inc., 2008. DeVito, Joseph A., 10th Ed., The Interpersonal Communication Book: Pearson Education Inc., 2004. 201 GEG305/2 Forensic Science The course introduces the students to the fundamental concept of Forensic Sciences. It provides information on crime scene, collection and preservation of evidence and various types of impression evidence such as finger prints, foot prints, tool marks, and tyre prints used in identification of individuals and objects. A brief account on trace evidence materials like dust, glass, soil, fibres and hairs too is included. Introductory topics on DNA evidence, firearm identification, explosives, and questioned documents also form part of the syllabus. The students are also taught photographic techniques and digital cameras in criminal investigation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. M. M. Houck and J. A. Siegel, Fundamentals of Forensic Sciences, Elsevier Academic Press, 2006. R. Saferstein, Criminalistics: An introduction to Forensic Sciences, 8th Ed., Prentice-Hall,2004. S. H. James and J. J. Nordby, Forensic Sciences: An Introduction to Scientific and Investigative Techniques, CRC Press, 2003. P. R. De Forest, R. E. Gaensslen and H. C. Lee, Forensic Sciences An Introduction to Criminalistics. NY: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1983. GEG308/2-Tropical Natural Resource Management The course focuses on basic component of environmental sources with emphasis on environmental problems such as pollution and extinction of the natural resources. It covers the on concepts necessary to formulate and achieve specific management goals and objectives; comprehensive natural resource planning processes; and social and institutional dimensions of management. This course will highlight the integration of development, health and environmental issues. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Bruce Mitchell, Managing Our Natural Resources, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education, 2001. Daniel D. Chiras, John P. Reganold & Oliver S Owen, Natural Resource Conservation: Management for Sustainable Future, 9th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2004. Peter F. Ffolliot, Luis A. Bojorquez-Topia, Mariano Hernendez Natural Resources Management: A Primer, Blackwell Publisher, 2003. Tim, W. Clark. Andrew R. Willard, Christina, M. Cromleys, Foundations of Natural Resources Policy and Management, Yale University, 2000. 202 GEG309/2-Principles of Forensic Dentistry This course details the application of dental science knowledge for forensic work such as human identification and bitemark investigation. It covers the theory and some practices in forensic dental work such as bitemark analyses and identification process using dental records. Students will also be introduced to disaster victim identification and record management. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Nanci A., Ten Cate's Oral Histology, USA: Mosby, 2003. Scott GR, Turner II CG, The Anthropology of Modern Human Health. Cambridge: Cambdridge University Press, 1997. Fuller JL, Denehy GE, Concise Dental Anatomy and Morphology. St Louis: Mosby Yearbock, 1984. GEG311/2 Botany And Health This course introduces the students to the associations between plants and health. The topics will discuss history of plant usage in health, plant morphology and taxonomy, basic plant biochemistry, plant secondary metabolites, plant biotechnology, conservation and preservation of plant resources, ethnobotany and how a health botanical product is derived. Skills of information gathering will be absorbed through essay writing and seminar presented by inviting lecturer from related agencies/bodies. Management of botany and health project will trigger communication skills and team work among the students. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. Lewis, W, Walter, H and Memory, R. F.Elvin-Lewis. Medical Botany: Plants Affecting Human Health. 2nd ed. John Wiley & Sons. Inc., Hoboken, NJ., 2003. Sneader, W. Drug Discovery: A History. John Wiley & Sons. England, 2005. Chooi, O. H. Tumbuhan Liar: Khasiat Ubatan dan Kegunaan Lain. Utusan Publication & Distributors Sdn. Bhd., 2004. Hasmah Abdullah. Kepelbagaian Spesies Tumbuhan dan Pemeliharaannya di Malaysia. Dlm.Haliza A. R. Dan Rohasliney Hashim. Pnyt). Pemeliharaan dan pemuliharaan alam sekitar di Malaysia. Penerbit Universiti Sains Malaysia. Pulau Pinang. Pp 68-113, 2010. 203 LAA100/2–Arabic Language I This course introduces Arabic letters to the students, pronounce and write it correctly. The students practice to communicate about themselves, family and friends by using the language properly and using the vocabulary accurately with the application in basic grammar in communication. The students also learn to make simple sentences by using the elementary in vocabulary in a good manner and in a positive way which is included in the course. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007. Kershul, K.K, Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004. Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A.. Al-Arabiah Baina Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004. Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah, Kaherah, 2001. Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu , Seri Kota Publications, 2001. Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha (1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia. LAJ100/2–Japanese Language I This course enambles students to apply the basic grammar in writing and speaking, recognize the hiragana’s letter, pronounce it nicely and write it correctly, interact in daily conversation based on certain situation and discuss about 3 elements on culture, lifestyle and matter which are related with Japan. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004. Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004. Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now You’re Talking. Japan:3A Corporation, 2003. LAA200/2–Arabic Language II This course is a continuation of Arabic Language I. The brief description about the basic script of Arabic are given as a revision. In this course, students were taught the appropriate skill of communication. The students will learn the nouns, verbs, and conjuctions in Arabic as well additional vocabulary. 204 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Haroon Shirwani. Build your Arabic Vocabulary. New York, McGraw-Hill, 2007. Kershul, K.K.. Arabic in 10 Minutes A Day. Seattle Bilingual Books, Inc., 2004. Al-Fauzan, A.E., Husain, M.T. & Muhammad Fadl, M.A., Al-Arabiah Baina Yadaik, Student’s Book 1. Riyadh, Arabic for all, 2004. Hamdi Mahmud Abd Mutholib, An-Nahu Al-Muyassar, Darul Afaq Al-Arabiah, Kaherah, 2001. Haji Ishak Abbas, Kamus Al-Jadidi Arab-Melayu, Seri Kota Publications, 2001. Dr. Fa Abd. Rahim, Durus Al-Lughah Al-Arabiyah Li Ghsiri Nathiqin Biha (1410H), Madinah Islamic University, Saudi Arabia LAJ200/2–Japanese Language II This is a continuation of Japanes Language I. In this course, the students will apply the verbs broadly especially in using the conjunction, use more in basic sentence for speaking exercise, read and write in katakana’s letter and apply the basic sentences in daily conversation. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Makino, Akiko. Minna no Nihongo Shokyu Choukai Tasuku 25 (Listening Comprehension Tasks), Japan: 3A Corporation, 2004 Haruhara Kenichiro. Nihongo Takarabune, Japan: ASK, 2004. Miyazaki Michiko, Goshi Sachiko, Now You’re Talking. Japan : 3A Corporation 2003. 205 7.0 FACILITIES The buildings of School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres, tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia equipments. IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the Multi-Media Laboratories of the School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11.30 pm. All laboratory requirements are provided, complete with instruments and equipments within a new modern building. Library, hostels and the sports complex with their respective ancillary facilities are provided for students at the USM Health Campus. 206 8.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 8.1 CAREER GUIDANCE 8.1.1 Biomedicine Career prospects for the Biomedicine programme include: 1. Science or research officers at research institutes, institutions of higher learning, hospitals, public and private medical laboratories. 2. Production and administrative officers in related industries including Quality Control officers, sales personnel and advisors in the pharmaceutical, food and beverage industries, suppliers of medical products and instrumentations and as environmental officers. 3. Tutors/Lecturers at institutions of higher learning at both private and public sectors. Graduates can also register as graduate students or join the academic staff training programmes at any of the institutions of higher learning. The examples given above are not restrictive and graduates can also involve themselves in many areas of scientific or commercial ventures that is available now or in development particularly in the biotechnology field. 8.1.2 Dietetics Career opportunities for graduates of the Dietetic programme are ample in Malaysia and as well as in other countries. These include: 1. Dietetians, food services officers, dietetic counsellors in Government and Private hospitals, and Institutions of Higher Learning. 2. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and research. 3. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher learning. 207 4. Diet consultants and nutritionist in the public and private sectors. 8.1.3 Nursing Career opportunities in nursing are wide in Malaysia and overseas; these include: 1. Clinical nurses and nurse administrators at the government and private hospitals including community health centres. 2. Clinical nurses, nurse administrators or counselors at special institutions or organizations such as Hospice, Nursing Homes, Rehabilitation Centres and various manufacturing industries. 3. Officers or administrators in research institutions, hospital, pharmaceutical, diagnostic laboratories and other health related industries of both public and private sectors. 4. Nurse educators at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher learning. 8.1.4 Forensic Science Career prospects for the Forensic Science graduates include: 1. Officers at the forensic services of the Royal Malaysian Police, Department of Chemistry, Fire and Rescue Department, government hospitals and forensic private agencies. 2. Science or research officers at research institutes or institutions of higher learning, private and public hospitals and diagnostic laboratories. 3. Production, administrative or sales personnels of industries such as pharmaceuticals, food and beverages, reagent suppliers and biomedical instrument suppliers as well as environmental officers. 4. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher learning. 208 It must be emphasised that the examples of jobs given are not limited to those mentioned. The curricula which are offered by the School are flexible enough to provide graduates with skills and abilities which will enable them to prospects jobs in a wider domain including Private Investigation, Insurance Investigation and other forensic related areas. Opportunities are wide for high achieving students to pursue postgraduate courses and become teaching staffs of the future at institutions of higher learning. 8.1.5 Medical Radiation Career prospects for graduates of the Medical Radiation programme are wide in Malaysia and overseas. These include: 1. Radiation protection officers at government and private hospitals, research institutions and public and private health organisations. 2. Personnel involved in commercial activities within the production industries related to the field and also in the health care industries. 3. Science or research officers at institutions of higher education. 4. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher education. Graduates can also register as graduate students and join the academic staff training programmes of institutions of higher education. 8.1.6 Audiology The graduates from the Audiology programme may provide services or work at various settings: 1. As audiologists at medical settings (e.g. government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centres); educational settings (e.g. special education schools, early intervention centers); or private practice offices. 2. As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private institutes of higher learning. 3. As researchers at the institutes of higher learning, research laboratories or centres. 209 8.1.7 Speech Pathology Qualified professionals in Speech Pathology are known as Pegawai Pemulihan Perubatan (Pertututran) in the government sector or Speech Pathologist in the private sector. 1. - 2. - Job opportunities in this profession are immense, including in the: Health sectors (government hospital, private hospital or private practice) Education sectors (special school or normal school) Non-government sectors (intervention center or rehabilitation center) Community and welfare sectors (community based rehabilitation center) - Additionally, they also can become academic staffs at the university as clinical supervisors or lecturers (after completing postgraduate degrees at masters/doctor of philosophy levels) conduct research and development as researchers manage related institutions as the managing officers. 8.1.8 Exercise and Sports Science The graduates from the Exercise and Sports Science programme may provide services or work at various settings: 1. As science/research/sports officers in medical institutions (e.g. government and public hospitals, rehabilitation centers, Youth and Sports Departments); educational settings (e.g. special education schools, sport schools, early intervention centers, universities); sports institutions and associations (National Sports Institute, BAM, FAM) or private practising organisations. 2. As academicians (e.g. tutors, lecturers) at public and private institutes of higher learning. 3. As coaches, sports science consultants, sports administrators and managers, sports physiotherapists, health coordinators, health club managers in both government and private sectors. 210 8.1.9 Nutrition Career opportunities for graduate of the Nutrition programme are wide in Malaysia and overseas. These include: 1. Nutritionists in the public and private sectors. 2. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and research. 3. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution. 8.1.10 Environmental and Occupational Health Career opportunities for graduates of the Environmental and Occupational Health programme are wide (public and private sectors, industries and NGO’s) in Malaysia and overseas. These include: 8.2 1. Occupational Safety and Health Officer, environmental health officers and safety supervisors. 2. EMS engineers, EHS executives, health promotion officers and operation officers. 3. Training officers and marketing executives 4. Science or research officers at institutions of higher learning and research. 5. Tutors/Lecturers at public and private institutions of higher learning. Graduates can also register as graduate students and possibly join as teaching staff in Higher Education institution. PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST The School is continually soliciting funds for the setting up of gold medal awards to be awarded to the best final year students in all programmes as well as funds for other prizes and awards. Students obtaining a CGP of 3.67 and above in any semester will receive a Deans' List Certificate. 211 8.3 SOCIETY Students of the School of Health Sciences automatically become the members of the Health Science Society of the University. 8.4 POSTGRADUATE PROGRAMMES The School of Health Sciences offers Masters (M.Sc.) and Doctrate (Ph.D.) courses via research mode in many disciplines such as Biomedicine (e.g. Diagnostics, neurocognitive science, natural health products, vacinnology, cancer biology, immune regulations, gene regulations and protein-protein interaction), Forensic Science (e.g. DNA fingerprinting, Forensic Chemistry, Environmental Forensics and Forensic Toxicology), Dietetics and Nutrition (e.g. community nutrition, clinical nutrition and human nutrition) and many others. Candidates shall have graduated with a Bachelors degree from recognised universities and obtained a CGPA of at least 2.75 for the Masters programme and 3.67 or graduate with a Masters for the Ph.D. programme. However students with a CGPA of less than 2.75 may be considered if they possess appropriate and relevant working experience or experience in research. Interested candidates can contact the Deputy Dean (Research) Post Graduate Studies or the USM Post Graduate Institute for further information. 8.5 OVERSEAS TRAINING SCHEME Universiti Sains Malaysia offers limited and highly competitive overseas training schemes to students of levels 100 and 200 who are interested to pursue courses of one semester duration at any foreign university. This scheme is devised with the purpose of exposing students to experience studying at the international level with the possibility of credit transfers. Further details of this scheme can be obtained from the office of International Relations, Division of Academic and International Affairs, USM. 212 9.0 DIPLOMA OF NURSING 213 ACADEMIC STAFF OF DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME LECTURERS/TUTORS NO. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME NAME POSITION TELEPHONE EMAIL Ms. Noor Aini Hussain Programme 7531 [email protected] Chairman/ Lecturer Ms. Anisah Mat Desa Tutor 7744 [email protected] Ms. Azlida Abd Kadir Tutor 7733 [email protected] Ms. Fazdillah Husin Tutor 7743 [email protected] Ms. Hasni Embong Tutor 7741 [email protected] Ms. Low Kim Lian Tutor 7747 [email protected] Ms. Mas Nor Saloni Tutor 7732 [email protected] Ibrahim Ms. Noor Jasmani Tutor 7746 [email protected] Hassan Ms. Nor Rahan Tutor 7780 [email protected] Mohamad Ms. Norizam Tutor 7734 [email protected] Muhammad Yusof (Study Leave) Ms. Norliza Hussin Tutor 7745 [email protected] Ms. Nurhayati Tutor 7742 [email protected] Mohamad Nor Ms.Tuan Ruasmani Tutor 7750 [email protected] Tuan Daud Ms. Zaihan Abd. Tutor 7749 [email protected] Rahman Ms. Zuraida Yusoff Tutor 7748 [email protected] Ms. Chu Be Lai Clinical 6672 [email protected] Instructor Ms. Halizan Yusoff Clinical 6672 [email protected] Instructor (Study Leave) Ms. Masturah Hamzah Clinical 6672 [email protected] Instructor Ms. Norizan Che Clinical 6672 [email protected] Mohd Yusoff Instructor (Study Leave) Ms. Zaharah Clinical 6672 [email protected] Muhamad Instructor 214 INTRODUCTION The Diploma in Nursing Programme is one of the programmes offered by the School of Health Sciences since the 2007/2008 session in response to the rapid development in medical technology and increasing number of government and private hospitals, where the demand for nurses has escalated to a critical level. The shortage of nurses has affected the quality of health services. The structuring of the Diploma in Nursing Programme is based on the criteria set by the Malaysian Nursing Board that a nursing programme must have sufficient nursing skill training components to enable the students to register with the Malaysian Nursing Board. It also fits the aim of the university to produce nursing graduates who possess excellent academic knowledge as well as competent clinical skills in order to achieve the nation’s aspiration in producing a healthy society. This programme covers six (6) semesters of three (3) years. The programme encompasses the following aspects:(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Biological Science Behavioural Science Nursing Science Technical Skills Co-Curriculum These aspects are incorporated in the nursing curriculum to strengthen the basic knowledge in nursing practice as well as scientific knowledge with the hope to produce nurses who are competent, of calibre, innovative, proactive, critical in thinking and independent. This will assist in enhancing professionalism and the image of nursing for the benefit of clients, society and the country. AIM OF THE PROGRAMME To produce trained nurses who are caring, practice safe nursing, competent and able to analyse critically in problem solving at any health institution. OBJECTIVES OF THE PROGRAMME • To fulfill demand of nurses needed by hospitals and clinics in the future. • To produce trained nurses who are able to deliver efficient services to individual and community. • To provide basic nursing education which enable students to proceed to degree level. 215 LEARNING OUTCOME At the completion of the programme, graduates will be able to: PO1: Apply nursing theory and practice comprehensively in nursing care. PO2: Demonstrate technical skills in analysis and problem solving related to nursing diagnosis. PO3: Apply critical thinking skills in assessment of patient for effective nursing care and interventions. PO4: Apply communication skills in the assessment and problem solving in nursing care and practices. PO5: Organize and execute nursing tasks as a team of healthcare professionals in caring for patients. PO6: Display ethics and professional values in nursing practice. PO7: Apply nursing knowledge and manipulate resources for effective nursing care and interventions. PO8: Explore and identify opportunities of enterpreneurship to enhance social functions and responsibilities. PO9: Exhibit values of leadership as a group in nursing practice. 216 COURSE DURATION Three (3) years for full time course include both theory and practical. ENTRY QUALIFICATION SPM QUALIFIED UNIVERSITY GENERAL REQUIREMENT Pass SPM / equivalent examination Pass with credit in Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia for SPM / equivalent examination SPECIAL PROGRAMME REQUIREMENT Pass SPM / equivalent with at least grade C6 / 6C / C in these five (5) subjects: 1. Bahasa Melayu / Bahasa Malaysia 2. Rampaian Sains / Biology 3. Mathematic 4. Bahasa Inggeris 5. One (1) other subject And pass in interview ENTRY APPLICATION Online application at https://pohon.usm.my/jururawat. Processing fee of RM60.00 is to be paid cash at CIMB counter or through E-Payment / credit card / cash transfer (FPX). Complete application form is to be printed and sent with copies of academic certificate to the address below: SEKSYEN PENGAMBILAN PELAJAR BAHAGIAN PENGURUSAN AKADEMIK PEJABAT PENDAFTAR, ARAS 2, CANSELORI UNIVERSITI SAINS MALAYSIA 11800 USM, PULAU PINANG 217 ACADEMIC SYSTEM DEFINITION Unit All courses will be assigned a value called UNIT. The unit is given value based on the scope of the curriculum, and the demand made of student in the courses; in general the unit is defined as follows: Type of Course Theory Courses Practical or Laboratory Courses Language Skill Courses Industrial or Teacher Training Courses Definition One unit is equivalent to one hour of contact time per week for the semester of between 13 - 14 weeks. One unit is equivalent to one and a half hours of contact time per semester of between 13 – 14 weeks. One unit is equivalent to one and a half hours of contact time per semester of between 13 – 14 weeks. One unit is equivalent to two weeks of training. Type of Contact Students or group of students will usually come in contact with lecturers via lectures, tutorials, seminars and laboratory or field study sessions. Cumulative Credit Unit A unit that has been registered and passed called a Credit Unit. REGISTRATION OF COURSES (a) Online Course Registration Activities The online registration system requires that students register for courses every semester. Registration will be carried out on Friday or Saturday prior to the commencement of each semester. This is to ensure that teaching sessions can start on the first day of the semester. Time of registration is finalised by each School. Students must check on dates of registration activities on the respective School's notice board. Prior to registration, students are requested to obtain the following items from their respective Schools:(i) (ii) (iii) Course Registration Form Statement of Cumulative Grade (CANGRED) Time Table of Academic Sessions 218 (iv) List of Courses Students are reminded that registration of courses is official and final. Due care should therefore be exercised in filling in details to avoid unnecessary complications. Extra care should be given to the following: (b) Course Code Value of Course Unit Type of Course Code Time Table for Academic Sessions Prerequisite Requirements of Courses Requirements of the School The minimum or maximum units which students are allowed to register. Academic Advisor (i) Students must plan their entire course schedule to ensure that their choice of courses for any semester can be undertaken without undue problems. (ii) Prior to registration of courses, students are advised to meet with their academic advisors regarding choice of course for each semester. (iii) Students must obtain the signatures of their Academic Advisors for all courses to be registered. (c) Time Table and Course Lists Time table for the academic sessions and list of courses on offer for each semester can be obtained via the Schools web page at http://www.ppsk.usm.my. The time table is subject to change by lecturers concerned. Student must refer to this list when choosing and obtaining information about a particular course. Students are not allowed to register for courses if there are clashes in the time table. (d) Registration of Language and Co-curricular Courses (i) All affairs related to the registration, dropping and addition of language courses will be handled by The School of Language, Literacies & Translation. Co-curricular courses will be handled by the Student Affairs & Development Division of the University. (ii) Early registration of the Malay and English language courses will be at the School of Language, Literacies & Translation while Co-curricular (sports & cultural) courses will be done at the Student Affairs & Development Division. 219 (iii) Online registration activities will only start after the process of choosing the courses and the course codes have been entered into the computer systems. (iv) Dropping of courses, if deemed necessary, must be done within the first week of the academic session. A fee of RM50.00 will be imposed if this is done after the first week. Regisration of Courses for Students designated as active Students must register the total number of units offered in every semester. Registration of Courses for Students on "Provisional" Status Registrable units for students on probationary status are limited to the following: (e) Academic Status Maximum Unit Active 21 Provisional I (P1) 12 unit Provisional II (P2) 10 unit Status of Students and Level of Study Students are designated as equivalent to first, second or third year according to the total credit points accumulated as follows:- Course of Study Year Equivalent Based on Cumulative Credit Acquired (Total Credit Unit Required for Graduation) First Second Third 98 0 – 37 38 – 66 67 – 98 220 (f) Course Confirmation Slip The confirmation slip given after registration of a course must be checked thoroughly to ensure that there are no errors. Any errors regarding courses must be corrected immediately at the respective school during the registration period. (g) Updating of Academic Records The latest academic records and information will be printed in the document designated as 'CANGRED' and in the course registration forms. Students are advised to check the information and details therein and make corrections, if necessary. Corrections can be made using appropriate forms obtainable from the respective schools/centre or the Records and Data Processing Unit, Aras 5, Chancellory Building. Students are responsible for updating their addresses in the event that they have changed their terms address, emergency address and/or permanent address. (h) Courses During the Long Semester Break (KSCP) These courses are only offered during the long break. They are offered only to students who obtained grade ‘C-’, ‘D+’, ‘D’, ‘D-’, ‘F’ and ‘DK’ in a course or courses that they have taken. Students given grade ‘X’ and ‘F*’ are not allowed to take the KSCP course examination. The objectives of the KSCP: To allow students who face time constraints in order to graduate. i) To help students who require only a few more units to graduate. ii) To help students on provisional status to redeem themselves. iii) The assist students who are required to repeat prerequisite courses which will not be offered in the following semester. Formal lectures are not usually carried out. Teachings of courses are often done through tutorials. Long break courses are usually carried out over 4-3 weeks of tutorials and 1 week of examination during the long vacation break. The dates of these courses can be obtained from the Academic Calendar. 221 COURSE CODE Every course possesses a unique course code that consists of three (3) letters and three (3) numbers. The definition of the code is as follows:DGN nnn Serial Number Serial Number Level: 1 = Level 100 course 2 = Level 200 course 3 = Level 300 course Field of specialisation: N = Nursing G = School of Health Sciences D = Diploma 222 EXAMINATION Examination is conducted at the end of each semester. Student must sit for the examination of all courses that they have registered during the course registration period. All students must first settle all fees due and have fulfilled teaching requirements such as attending lecture/tutorial/practicals and have fulfilled other conditions deemed necessary for that particular course before they are allowed to take the examination. The complete assessment of each course is based on the grades obtained for the continuous assessment (course work) and the final examination. The weightage given for these two components may differ from course to course. The course work can include various aspects such as students' participation in tutorials, tests, essay writing, project work and other assignments. (a) Type of Examination (i) Cognitive Component • • • • • (ii) Psychomotor Component • • (iii) Objective Test (multiple choice) Essay Short Essay Seminar Paper Case Study OSCE and Practicum Clinical Skill Log Book Affective Component Will be assessed with (i) and (ii) through progress report from Clinical Instructor. The aim is to evaluate students’ initiative and interpersonal relationship in practicum. This assessment is critical in molding the professional attitude of a student. 223 (b) Duration of Examination Evaluated Course (c) Examination Duration 2 units 1 hour for coursework of more 40% 2 units 2 hours for coursework of 40% and below 3 units or more 2 hours for coursework of more than 40% 3 units or more 3 hours for coursework of 40% and below Barring of Students from Sitting for Examination Students who do not satisfy the requirements of a course may be barred from sitting for the Final Examination of that particular course. These requirements may include attendance of lectures or tutorials and completion of all course work assignments. They can also be barred from sitting for the examination if the fees due are not paid up. Courses whereby students have been barred from are conferred grade ‘X’. (d) Average Grade Point System The following scale is used to grade student's performance:- Alphabetic Grade A A- B+ B B- C+ C C- D+ D D- F Grade Points 4.00 3.67 3.33 3.00 2.67 2.33 2.00 1.67 1.33 1.00 0.67 0 Students awarded with grade 'C-' and below for a particular course would be given a chance to improve their grades by repeating the course during the KSCP or normal semester. Students awarded with grade 'C' and above for a particular course will not be allowed to repeat the course whether during KSCP or normal semester. The achievements of students in any semester are based on Grade Point Average (GPA) achieved from all the registered courses in a particular semester. GPA is the indicator to determine the academic performance of students in any semester. CGPA is the Cumulative Grade Point Average accumulated by a student from one semester to another during the years of study. 224 The formula to compute GPA and CGPA is as follows: Grade Point Average = ∑ U iM i ∑ Ui where Ui = Course units for course i Mi = Grade point for course i Example of calculation for GPA and CGPA: Semester I: Course Unit Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP ABC XX1 4 3.00 B 12.00 ABC XX2 4 2.33 C+ 9.32 BCDXX3 3 1.67 C- 5.01 CDEXX4 4 2.00 C 8.00 EFGXX5 3 1.33 D+ 3.99 EFGXX6 2 2.67 B- 5.34 20 43.66 GPA = 43.66 = 2.18 20 Semester II: Course Unit Grade Point (GP) Grade (G ) Total GP ABC XX7 3 1.00 D 3.00 ABB XX8 4 2.33 C+ 9.32 BBC XX9 4 2.00 C 8.00 BCB X10 4 2.67 B- 10.68 XYZ XX1 3 3.33 B+ 9.99 18 40.99 GPA = 40.99 = 2.28 18 CGPA = Total Accumulated GP Total Accumulated Unit = 43.66 + 40.99 20 + 18 225 = 84.65 = 2.23 38 As shown in the above example the CGPA is calculated as the total grade point ccumulated for all courses taken, divided by the total units that has been registered. ACADEMIC STATUS Active Status - Students obtaining GPA 2.00 and above in the examination of a semester will be categorised as ACTIVE and will be allowed to continue their studies in the next semester. Provisional Status - A Provisional status is given to students obtaining GPA of 1.99 or less. A student designated as provisional for 3 semesters consecutively (P1, P2, FO) will not be allowed to continue in the academic programme of this University. However, if the CGPA is 2.00 and above, the student maybe given a P2 status and will be allowed to continue with his/her studies. Without prejudice to these requirements and other standing rules of examination, it should be noted that the University Examination Council has the absolute power to terminate any students from continuing their studies if their performance and grade is deemed unsatisfactory based on the minimum total credit units that must be accumulated by the student. Example:- Number of Semesters Total Accumulated Minimum Credit Units Pure Applied Professional nd 15 15 16 th End of 4 semester 35 35 38 th End of 6 semester 55 55 60 th 75 75 80 End of 2 semester End of 8 semester The Examination Council of the University can also terminate students based on other specific reasons (Did not register courses, Did not obtain Examination Cards, Did not attend Examination without valid reasons), including medical reasons which can result in these students being no longer suitable to continue with their studies at this University. 226 Examination Results a) Provisional (pass/fail) results via the Teleakademik system (9600-83-7899) are usually announced after the Schools' board of examination meeting which is usually one month after the examination. b) Full results (grade) via the Teleakademik system (9600-83-7899) will be announced after the University Examination board meeting and is usually 2 weeks after the privisional results have been announced. c) Official results (Semgrade) will be given to students during the 2nd week of the following semester. NURSING SKILL PRACTICE a) Every student is compulsory to undergo practice and practicum in the nursing skills laboratory and clinical area stated for each semester. Students have to wear uniform during their practicum. Students have to refer to Clinical Skill Log Book for regulation in the Nursing Skill Laboratory and clinical area. b) Students are to practice in Nursing Skill Laboratory with tutor or on their own as scheduled. c) Nursing skills practice will be observed using Clinical Skill Log Book. PRIZES, AWARDS AND DEAN'S LIST Students obtaining a GPA of 3.67 and above in any semester may receive the Dean’s List Certificate. GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS Students must fulfill all requirements in order to graduate (provided the minimum residence has been fulfilled): (a) Satisfy all credit requirements for the Academic Programme i.e total credits and the required number of credits for each component in the programme [Core, Elective, University and Optional (if appropriate) courses]. (b) Obtain a grade point of 2.00 and above for total Core courses. (c) Obtain a final CGPA of 2.00 and above for the whole programme. (d) Obtain a minimum grade C or grade point of 2.00 for the language courses (Bahasa Malaysia and English), Core Entrepreneurship, Ethnics Relation, Thinking Technique and TITAS courses. 227 PROGRAMME STRUCTURE The Programme was designed by taking the following into account: (i) The Malaysian Nursing Board has maintained that any nursing educational programme must have sufficient nursing skills training component for the purpose of registration with the Board. To meet these requirements the Diploma in Nursing Programme is structured as follows: Student must complete 98 credit units in 3 years (semester 1-6) which include core courses (83 units) and university courses (15 units) plus other requirements of the School. Programme Structure Synopsis for Diploma in Nursing Programme Unit Requirements for Graduation PROGRAMME Diploma in Nursing CORE UNIVERSITY TOTAL 83 15 98 228 LIST OF CORE COURSES No. Course Code Course Title Unit Level 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 DGN 101 Professional Nursing I DGN 102 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) DGN 103 Professional Nursing II DGN 104 Health Communication DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing DGN 106 Biology for Nursing DGN 107 Nursing Practicum 1 DGN 108 Health Assessment DGN 109 Therapeutic Intervention DGN 110 Medical - Surgical Nursing I DGN 111 Human Biology I DGN 112 Nursing Practicum II Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 100 = 30 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 2 2 3 Level 200 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DGN 201 Human Biology II DGN 202 Medical - Surgical Nursing II DGN 203 Nursing Practicum III DGN 204 Medical - Surgical Nursing III DGN 205 Psychology for Nursing DGN 206 Mental Health for Nursing DGN 207 Nursing Practicum IV Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 200 = 21 4 3 3 3 3 2 3 Level 300 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DGN 301 Professional Nursing III DGN 302 Obstetric Nursing DGN 303 Gynecology Nursing DGN 304 Medical - Surgical Nursing IV DGN 305 Nursing Practicum V DGN 306 Nursing Practicum VI DGN 307 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing DGN 308 Community Nursing DGN 309 Nursing Practicum VII Total Unit of Core Courses for Level 300 = 32 Total Unit of Core Courses 229 4 3 2 3 2 5 3 3 7 83 LIST OF UNIVERSITY COURSES No. Course Code Course Title Unit Level 100 1 LKM 400 Malay Language lV 2 2 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 1 3 LDN 101 English Language for Nursing 1 2 4 WUS 101 Core Entrepreneurship 2 Total Unit of University Courses for Level 100 = 7 Level 200 5 HTU 223 TITAS 2 6 SHE 101 Ethnics Relation 2 7 LDN 201 English Language for Nursing ll 2 8 HTV 201 Thinking Techniques 2 Total Unit of University Courses for Level 200 = 8 Level 300 - - - - Total Unit of University Courses for Level 300 = 0 Total Unit of University Courses 230 15 Registration Guidelines for Diploma in Nursing Programme Level 100 Code Core Course DGN 101 Professional Nursing I DGN 102 Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) DGN 103 Professional Nursing II DGN 104 Health Communication DGN 105 Sociology in Nursing DGN 106 Biology for Nursing DGN 107 Nursing Practicum 1 DGN 108 DGN 109 DGN 110 DGN 111 DGN 112 Unit Code University Course Semester 1 2 LKM 400 Malay Language lV 3 Wxx xxx Co-Curriculum 2 2 3 2 3 17 Semester II Health Assessment 3 LDN 101 Therapeutic Intervention 3 Medical - Surgical Nursing I 2 WUS 101 Human Biology I 2 Nursing Practicum II 3 13 Unit 2 1 3 English Languange for Nursing l Core Entrepreneurship Total Unit 20 2 2 4 17 Level 200 Code Core Course Unit University Course Semester 1 4 HTU 223 TITAS 3 SHE 101 Ethnics Relation 3 LDN 201 English Language for Nursing ll 10 Semester II Medical -Surgical Nursing III 3 HTV 201 Thinking Psychology for Nursing 3 Techniques Mental Health for Nursing 2 Nursing Practicum IV 3 11 DGN 201 Human Biology II DGN 202 Medical - Surgical Nursing II DGN 203 Nursing Practicum III DGN 204 DGN 205 DGN 206 DGN 207 Code 231 Unit Total Unit 2 2 2 6 16 2 2 13 Level 300 Code Core Course Unit Code University Course Semester 1 4 3 2 3 2 5 19 Semester II DGN 307 Neonate and Pediatric Nursing 3 DGN 308 Community Nursing 3 DGN 309 Nursing Practicum Vll 7 13 Total Unit of Core Courses Total Unit of University 83 Courses DGN 301 DGN 302 DGN 303 DGN 304 DGN 305 DGN 306 Unit Total Unit Professional Nursing lll Obstetric Nursing Gynecology Nursing Medical - Surgical Nursing lV Nursing Practicum V Nursing Practicum Vl Core Courses University Courses TOTAL = 83 = 15 = 98 232 19 13 15 98 SEMESTER STRUCTURE DIPLOMA IN NURSING PROGRAMME Year 1 Semester ll Year 1 Semester l WEEK ACTIVITY WEEK 1 24 2 25 3 26 4 5 27 LECTURE 29 7 30 8 31 9 32 MID SEMESTER BREAK 33 11 34 12 35 13 14 36 PRACTICUM 37 15 38 16 39 17 18 19 STUDY WEEK 40 41 FINAL EXAM 42 20 21 22 LECTURE 28 6 10 ACTIVITY MID SEMESTER BREAK LECTURE PRACTICUM STUDY WEEK FINAL EXAM 43 44 SEMESTER BREAK 45 23 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 233 LONG SEMESTER BREAK Year 2 Semester l WEEK Year 2 Semester ll ACTIVITY WEEK 1 24 2 25 3 26 4 27 5 LECTURE 29 7 30 8 31 9 32 MID SEMESTER BREAK 33 11 34 12 35 13 14 36 PRACTICUM 37 15 38 16 39 17 18 19 STUDY WEEK 40 41 FINAL EXAM 42 20 21 22 LECTURE 28 6 10 ACTIVITY MID SEMESTER BREAK LECTURE PRACTICUM STUDY WEEK FINAL EXAM 43 44 SEMESTER BREAK 45 23 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 234 LONG SEMESTER BREAK Year 3 Semester l WEEK Year 3 Semester ll ACTIVITY WEEK 1 24 2 25 3 4 26 LECTURE 28 6 29 7 30 31 PRACTICUM 9 10 MID SEMESTER BREAK 12 35 13 36 38 39 17 40 18 STUDY WEEK / FINAL EXAM 20 21 41 STUDY WEEK 42 FINAL EXAM 43 44 PRACTICUM 22 23 PRACTICUM 37 PRACTICUM 16 19 MID SEMESTER BREAK 33 34 15 PRACTICUM 32 11 14 LECTURE 27 5 8 ACTIVITY PRACTICUM 45 SEMESTER BREAK 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 235 LONG SEMESTER BREAK COURSES SYNOPSIS 236 Core Courses Level 100 237 DGN101/2-Professional Nursing I This course introduces the students to the history and the development of nursing profession in Malaysia and at the international level, health care system in Malaysia and alternative insurance delivery systems. Basic nursing concept and focus including the role of nurse and nursing practice will also be discussed. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Alligood, M. R. & Torney, A. M., Nursing Theory: Utilization & Application, 3rd Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2005. Herdman, T. H., Eds, NANDA International Nursing Diagnoses: Definitions & Classification 2009 – 2011, Wiley-Blackwell: Oxfrod, 2009. Wilkinson, J. M. & Van Leuven, K., Fundamentals of Nursing: Theory, Concepts & Applications, F.A. Davis Company: Philadelphia, 2007. DGN102/3-Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) This course introduces the students to basic nursing skills related to human basic need based on the Virginia Henderson theory. Students will practice the skills taught in the nursing skill laboratory and implement the skills in clinical area. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Altman, G. B. Fundamental and Advanced Nursing Skills, 3rd Ed., Delmar Cengage Learning: New York, 2010. DeLaune, S. C. & Ladner, P. K. Fundamentals of Nursing Standards and Practice, 3rd Ed., Delmar Learning: United States, 2006. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Eds, Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to Advanced Skills, 7th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. DGN103/2-Professional Nursing II This course aims to provide an understanding for ethics and laws in nursing practice. The main focus is knowledge on principles of ethics and legal issues related to nursing practice. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Bosek, M. S. D. & Savage, T. A., The Ethical Component of Nursing Education: Integrating Ethics Into Clinical Experience, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2007. Holmes, H. N., Evidence-based Nursing Guide to: Legal and Professional Issues, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2009. Westrick, A. J. & Dempski, K., Essentials of Nursing Law and Ethics, Jones & Bartlett Publishers: Sudbury, 2009. 238 DGN104/2-Health Communication This course introduces the students to basic communication from effective communication perspective. The main focus is on communication technique in nursing practice. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Burnard, P. & Gill, P., Culture, Communication and Nursing, Pearson/Education: Harlow, 2008. Crawford, P., Brown, B. & Bonham, P., Communication in Clinical Setting, Nelson Thornes: Cheltenham, 2006. Singh, S., Communication for Nurses, Anmol Publications: New Delhi, 2006. DGN105/3-Sociology in Nursing This course introduces the students to roles of sociology in health care and its effect on behaviour and response to health alteration and diseases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Giddens, A. Sociology, 6th Ed., Polity Press: Cambridge, 2009. Giger, J. N. & Davidhizar, R. E., Eds, Transcultural Nursing: Assessment and Intervention, 5th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2008. Weiss, G. L. The Sociology Of Health, Healing and Illness, Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2009. DGN106/2-Biology for Nursing This course introduces the students to the importance of basic biochemistry, microbiology, parasitology and their effect on human health. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Campbell, M. K. & Farrell, S. O., Biochemistry, 5th Ed., Thomson Brook: USA, 2006. Elaine, M. N., Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson: San Francisco, 2006. Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B., Introduction to the Human Body: The Essentials of Anatomy and Physiology, 7th Ed., John Wiley & Sons: New York, 2007. DGN107/3-Nursing Practicum I This practicum is the application of basic nursing sciences’ theory related to nursing process, activities of daily living, biology for nursing, sociology, communication technique and ethic and law in nursing practice. 239 List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Lewis, S. L. et al. Medical-Surgical Nursing: Assessment and Management of Clinical Problems, 7th Ed., Mosby: New York, 2007. Potter, P. A. & Perry, A. G., Fundamentals of Nursing, 7th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2009. Rusnah, A. R. & Saliza M. L., Prosedur Kejururawatan, Prentice Hall: Malaysia, 2006. DGN108/3-Health Assessment This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skills of health assessment such as health history taking and health examination technique in nursing practice. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 4. Elkin, M. K., Perry, A. G. & Potter, P. A., Nursing Interventions & Clinical Skills, 4th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2007. Estes. M. E. Z. Health Assessment & Physical Examination, 4th Ed., Delmar: New York, 2010. Wilson, S. F. & Giddens, J. F., Health Assessment for Nursing Practice, 4th Ed., Mosby Elsevier: St. Louis, 2009. DGN109/3-Therapeutic Intervention This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of therapeutic intervention such as aseptic concept and technique, wound management, pharmacokinetic, pharmacodynamic, and importance of therapeutic diet, pain management, counseling technique and introduction to alternative technique in nursing practice. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. DeLaune, S. C. & Ladner, P. K. Fundamentals of Nursing: Standards & Practice, 5th Ed., Delmar Thomson Learning: USA, 2009. Perry, A. G. & Potter, P. A. Clinical Nursing Skill & Techniques, 7th Ed., Mosby: USA, 2009. Smith, S. F., Duell, D. J. & Martin, B. C., Eds, Clinical Nursing Skills: Basic to Advanced Skills, 7th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. 240 DGN110/2-Medical-Surgical Nursing I This course introduces the students to the basic concepts of knowledge and skills of nursing management related to component, method and importance of medical-surgical nursing. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006. Linton, A. D., Introduction to Medical Surgical Nursing, 4th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2007. Timby, B. K. & Smith, N. E., Introductory Medical-Surgical Nursing, 9th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2007. DGN111/2-Human Biology I This course explains the importance of structure and physiology of respiratory, cardiovascular, hematology, lymphatic and immunity systems in nursing practice. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Clancy, J. & McVicar, A. J., Physiology and Anatomy for Nurses and Healthcare Practitioners: A Homeostatic Approach, 3rd Ed., Hodder Arnold: London, 2009. Haton, et.al. Human Biology and Health, Prentice Hall: Englewood Cliffs, 2009. Saladin, K. S., Anatomy and Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 5th Ed., McGraw-Hill: New York, 2010. DGN112/3-Nursing Practicum II This practicum includes the concepts of skills, medical and surgical nursing theory focusing on health assessment and therapeutic intervention. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Castillo, S. L. M., Strategies, Techniques and Approaches to Thinking: Critical Thinking Cases in Nursing, 4th Ed., Saunders: Edinburgh, 2010. Harkreader, H. C., Hogan, M. A. & Thobaden, M., Fundamentals of Nursing: Caring and Clinical Judgement, 3rd Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2007. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. 241 Core Courses Level 200 242 DGN201/4-Human Biology II This course introduces the students to the structure and physiology of gastrointestinal, urinary, endocrine, nervous, special senses, integumentary and musculosceletal system in nursing practice. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Martini, F., Fundamentals of Anatomy and Physiology, 8th Ed., Pearson Benjamin Cummings: San Francisco, 2009. Saladin, K. S. Anatomy & Physiology: The Unity of Form and Function, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill: New York, 2007. Tortora, G. J. & Derrickson, B. H., Principles of Anatomy and Physiology, 12th Ed., John Wiley: New Jersey, 2009. DGN202/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing II This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for patient with impaired hematology, respiratory, and cardiovascular system such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigation and medical treatment. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Black, J. M. & Hawks, J. H., Medical Surgical Nursing: Clinical Management for Positive Outcome, 8th Ed., Saunders: Philadelphia, 2009. Burke, K. M., LeMone, P. & Moha-Brown, E. L., Medical-Surgical Nursing Care, 2nd Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2007. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. DGN203/3-Nursing Practicum III This practicum courses includes the concepts of skills, medical and surgical nursing theory focusing on problems of cardiovascular, respiratory and hematology system. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ankner, G. M. Medical-Surgical Nursing, Thomson Delmar Learning: New York, 2008. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Hausman, K. A., Clinical Companion for Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: St. Louis, 2006. 243 DGN204/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing III This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skill of nursing care for patient with impaired gastrointestinal, urinary, endocrine, immunology and oncology system such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigation and medical treatment. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ignatavicius, D. D. & Workman M. L., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking for Collaborative Care, 5th Ed., Elsevier Saunders: Philadelphia, 2006. Sholtis, B. L., Smith, S. D. & Connell, S. S., Brunner & Suddath’s Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. Smeltzer, S. C. et al, Eds, Brunner & Suddath’s Textbook of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 11th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. DGN205/3-Psychology for Nursing This course introduces the students to the roles of psychology in health care and its effect on behaviour and response to health alteration and diseases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Andrews, M. & Boyle, J., Eds, Transcultural Concepts in Nursing Care, 5th Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. Gleithman, H., Fridlund. A. & Reisberg, D. Basic Psychology, 5th Ed., WB Saunders: USA, 2006. Low, W. Y. Psikologi Untuk Jururawat, 3rd Ed., Longman: Selangor, 2008. DGN206/2-Mental Health for Nursing This course introduces the students to basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for patient with mental health problems and diseases. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ankner, G. M., Clinical Decision Making: Case Studies in Medical-Surgical Pharmacologic and Psychiatric Nursing, Delmar Cengage Learning: New York, 2009. Keltner, N. L., Schwecke, L. H. & Bostrom, C. E. Psychiatric Nursing, 9th Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2007. Varcolis, E. M. & Jordan, M., Eds, Foundations of Psychiatric Mental Health Nursing: A Clinical Approach, 6th Ed., Saunders/Elsevier: St. Louis, 2010. 244 DGN207/3-Nursing Practicum IV This course is the application of medical and surgical nursing skills according to gastrointestinal, endocrine, urology, immunology, oncology, mental health and psychiatric problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Anne, P. & Patricia, P. Clinical Nursing Skills and Techniques, Mosby: New York, 2009. LeMone, P. & Burke, K. Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Lewis, S. L. et al., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Assessment and Management of Clinical Problems, 7th Ed., Mosby: New York, 2007. 245 Core Courses Level 300 246 DGN301/4-Professional Nursing lll This course introduces the students to the knowledge and skills to students on management and leadership, method of teaching and learning, the importance of research and health informatic in nursing practices. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. 4. DeYoung, S., Teaching Strategies for Nurse Educators, Prentice-Hall: New Jersey, 2007. Finkelman, A. W., Leadership and Management in Nursing, Pearson: New Jersey, 2008. Hannah, K. J., Ball, M. J. & Edwards, M. J. A., Introduction to Nursing Informatics, 3rd Ed., Springer: New York, 2006. LoBiondo-Wood, G. & Haber, J., Nursing Research: Methods and Critical Appraisal for Evidence-based Practice, 6th Ed., Mosby: Missouri, 2006. DGN302/3-Obstetric Nursing This course introduces the students to various topics on basic knowledge of obstetric nursing. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Areson, J. Drake, P. Quick Look Nursing: Maternal and Newborn Health, Jones and Barlet: U.S.A., 2007. Davidson, M., London, M. L. & Ladewig, P. Maternal–Newborn Nursing & Women’s Health Across the Lifespan, 8th Ed., Julie Levin Lexander: New Jersey, 2008. Klossner, N. J., Introductory Maternity Nursing, Lippincott William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2006. DGN303/2-Gynecology Nursing This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for patient with gynecological problems such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigations and medical treatments. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. Fortner, K. B., Szymenski, L., Fox, H. E. & Wallach, E. E. John Hopkins Manual of Gynaecology and Obstetrics, 3rd Ed., Lippincott Williams Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2007. Katz, V. L., Lentz, G., Lobo, R. A. & Gershenson, D. Comprehensive Gynaecology, 5th Ed., Mosby: U.S.A., 2007. 247 3. Sokol, A. I. & Sokol, E. R., General Gynaecology: The Requisites in Obstetric and Gynaecology, Mosby: New York, 2007. DGN304/3-Medical-Surgical Nursing lV This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for patient with impaired neurology, integumentary, special sences and musculoskeletal system such as pathophysiology, clinical manifestation, complications, diagnostic investigations and medical treatments. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Smeltzer, S. C. et al., Eds, Brunner & Suddath’s Text Book of Medical-Surgical Nursing, 11th Ed., Lippincott William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2008. Vijayalaksmi, V. G., Medical-Surgical Nursing, Jaypee Brothers: New Delhi, 2007. DGN305/2-Practicum Nursing V This course is the application of nursing theory and skill related to nursing management in family health, medical, surgical, obstetric, gynaecology, orthopaedic, ophtalmology, psychiatry, oncology, ear, nose and throat including community services in nursing practices. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coltrell, R. R., Girran, J. T. & McKeezie, J. F., Principles and Foundations of Health Promotion and Education, 3rd Ed., Pearson Benjamin: USA, 2006. Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008. Sweet, H. M. & Dougall, R., Community Nursing and Primary Healthcare in Twentieth-century Britain, Routledge: New York, 2008. DGN306/5-Practicum Nursing VI This practicum course is the application of nursing theory and skill related to medicalsurgical nursing, obstetric, gynaecology, orthopaedic, neurology, ophtalmology, ear, nose and throat problems in nursing practices. List of text/reference books: 1. Bull, P. D., Lecture Notes: Disease of The Ear, Nose and Throat, Blackwell: Maiden, 2007. 248 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Galloway, N. R., Amoaku, W. M. K., Galloway, P. H. & Browing, A. C., Common Eye Diseases and Their Management, 3rd Ed., Springer: London, 2006. Pope, N. A., Musculoskeletal Disorders in the Workplace: Principles and Practice, 2nd Ed., Mosby Elsevier: Philadelphia, 2007. Pourmand, R., Practicing Neurology: What you need to know, what you need to do, Humana Press: USA, 2008. Sokol, A. I. & Sokol, E. R., General Gynaecology: The Requisites in Obstetric and Gynaecology, Mosby: New York, 2007. DGN307/3-Neonate and Pediatric Nursing This course introduces the students to the basic knowledge and skills of nursing care for neonate and pediatric patient with medical and surgical problems. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Ball, J. W. & Bindler, R. C., Pediatric Nursing: Caring for Children, Pearson Prentice Hall: USA, 2008. Bowden, V. R. & Greenberg, C. S., Pediatric Nursing Procedure, 2nd Ed., Lippincott Williams & Wilkins: USA, 2008. Leifer, G., Introduction to Maternity and Pediatric Nursing, 5th Ed., Elsevier: St Louis, 2007. DGN308/3-Community Nursing This course introduces the students to the concept of community and public health nursing. The nursing knowledge and skills from nursing and public health sciences will be used by the students to apply during community practicum. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Gauwitz, D. F., Community Health Nursing, Thomson Delmar Learning: New York, 2007. Hunt, R. Introduction to Community-Based Nursing, Wolters Kluwer/Lippincott William & Wilkins: Philadelphia, 2009. Stanhope, M. & Lancaster, J. Foundations of Nursing in the Community: Community-Oriented Practice, 2nd Ed., Mosby: St. Louis, 2008. 249 DGN309/7-Nursing Practicum VlI This practicum is the application of nursing theory and skills related to medical-surgical nursing, operation theatre, community, neonatal, pediatric, oncology, haematology and critical in nursing practices. List of text/reference books: 1. 2. 3. Coltrell, R. R., Girran, J. T. & McKeezie, J. F., Principles and Foundations of Health Promotion and Education, 3rd Ed., Pearson Benjamin: USA, 2006. LeMone, P. & Burke, K., Eds, Medical-Surgical Nursing: Critical Thinking in Client Care, 4th Ed., Pearson/Prentice Hall: Upper Saddle River, 2008. Marry, J. C., Community Health Nursing: Advocacy for Population Health, 5th Ed., Pearson Prentice Hall: New Jersey, 2008. 250 FACILITIES AVAILABLE AT THE SCHOOL Hospital Universiti Sains Malaysia (HUSM) HUSM has 747 beds from 33 wards of various disciplines including medical, surgical, orthopedic, critical, obstetric and gynecology, psychiatric, cardiology, cardiothorasic, oncology and pediatric. Services available include: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Medical Specialist Clinic Surgery Clinic Obstetric And Gynecology Clinic Orthopedic Clinic Psychiatric Clinic Ophthalmology Clinic Otorhinolaryngology Clinic Oncology Clinic Outpatient Clinic (Klinik Rawatan Keluarga) Staff Clinic Klinik Sejahtera (for USM students) Dental Clinic Radiology Services Diagnostic Laboratory Services Clinical Laboratory Services Blood Bank Services Pharmacy Services Library Facilities include: • Open rack books, reference books, magazine including permanent subscription, serial monography, special collection, fiction collection and gift books • Media materials The School of Health Sciences' building The buildings of the School of Health Sciences have facilities such as lecture theatres, tutorial and seminar rooms together with the latest audio-visual and multimedia equipments. 251 IT facilities and MultiMedia IT facilities are provided for the use of students at the MultiMedia Laboratories of the School. It is open for students during office hours and after office hours until 11:30 pm. SOCIETY School of Health Sciences students automatically become the members of the Health Science Society of the University. 252 10.0 INDEXS AUDIOLOGY GTA101/2 - Anatomy and Physiology of Hearing and Speech (94) GTA306/3 - Auditory Rehabilitation (138-139) GTA102/3 - Physics for Audiologist (94) GTA401/6 - Research Project (172) GTA103/2 - Anatomy and Physiology for Hearing and Speech (Ear & Throat) (94-95) GTA402/3 - Noise and Hearing (172) GTA403/5 - Audiology Clinic III (172-173) GTA201/2 - Audiology Instrumentation (108) GTA404/2 - Ethics and Law for Health Professionals (173) GTA202/3 - Introduction to Psychoacoustic and Audiology Techniques (108) GTA405/5 - Audiology Clinic IV (173-174) GTA203/3 - Advanced Audiology Technique (108-109) GTA204/2 - Basic Clinical Management and Hearing Screening (109) GTA205/2 - Neurology for Hearing and Speech (109) GTA206/2 - Otology (110) GTA207/2 - Electrophysiology Test for Auditory System (110) GTA301/3 - Basic Hearing Amplification Technology (137) GTA302/3 - Audiology Clinic I (137) GTA303/3 - Paediatric Audiology (137-138) GTA304/4 - Audiology Clinic II (138) GTA305/3 - Advanced Hearing Amplification Technology (138) 253 BIOMEDICINE GTB105/3 - Human Biochemistry (95) GTB409/4 - Research Project (175) GTB106/3 - Laboratory Science (95-96) GTB410/3 - Laboratory Management (175-176) GTB107/3 - Epidemiology (96) GTB204/3 - Molecular Biology Techniques (110-111) GTU101/3 - Structure and Function of Humans I (103) GTB212/3 - Basic Microbiology (111) GTU103/3 - Fundamentals of Health Informatics (104) GTB217/2 - Immunology I (112) GTU104/3 - GTB218/3 - Immunology II (112-113) Structure and Function of Humans II (104) GTB219/3 - Pharmacology I (113) GTU105/3 - Psychology and Behavioural Science (105) GTB220/3 - Medical Bacteriology (113-114) GTU106/3 - Biochemistry and Basic Genetics (105) GTB221/3 - Basic Haematology (114) GTU302/3 - Biostatistics (166-167) GTB222/4 - Pathology (114-115) GTU303/2 - GTB224/2 - Laboratory Animal Sciences (115) Research Methodology (167-168) GTB307/3 - Medical Parasitology (139) GTB310/3 - Clinical Biochemistry (139-140) GTB315/2 - Medical Virology and Micology (140) GTB316/3 - Transfusion Science and Blood Banking (140-141) GTB317/3 - Advanced Haematology (141) GTB318/3 - Pharmacology II (141-142) GTB404/3 - Toxicology (174) GTB407/4 - Industrial Training (174) GTB408/9 - Biomedical Practicum (175) 254 DIETETICS GTD211/2 - Dietetics Skills and Communication (115-116) GTD310/4 - Dietetics Practicum in the Ward I (142) GTD311/3 - Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy I (142-143) GTD315/2 - Principles of Medical Nutrition Therapy II (143) GTD317/4 - Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit I (143-144) GTD318/4 - Outpatient Dietetics Practicum I (144) GTD321/3 - Therapeutic Diet Preparation (144) GTD406/3 - Outpatient Dietetics Practicum II (176) GTD407/3 - Dietetics Practicum in the Ward II (177) GTD408/3 - Dietetics Practicum in Special Unit II (177) 255 ENVIRONMENTAL AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH GTK101/3 GTK102/3 - - Introduction to Environmental and Occupational Health (99-100) Environmental and Occupational Health : Ecological Perspectives (100) GTK103/3 - Biodiversity (100 & 197) GTK201/3 - Occupational Health (123) GTK202/3 - Pollution and Health (123 - 124) GTK203/3 - Occupational Health (124) GTK301/4 - Environmental and Occupational Toxicology (153-154) GTK302/3 - Environmental and Occupational Health from Engineering Perspectives (154) GTK303/3 - Domestic, Laboratory and Industrial Waste Management (154-155) GTK304/3 Measurement and Monitoring of Contaminants (155) - GTK305/3 - Environmental and Occupational Health Related Diseases (155-156) GTK306/3 - Environmental and Occupational Emergency (156) 256 GTK307/3 - Occupational Rehabilitation (156) GTK401/8 - Environmental and Occupational Health Practicum (182) GTK402/8 - Research Project (182) GTK403/4 - Environmental and Occupational Laws (183) GTK44/3 - Environmental Management (183) GTK405/3 - Management of Occupational Safety and Health (184) EXERCISE AND SPORTS SCIENCE GTS101/2 - Introduction to Exercise and Sports Science (102-103) GTS307/3 - Physical Activity, Growth and Development (166) GTS102/3 - Sociology and Philosophy of Sports (103) GTS401/3 - Fitness Testing and Exercise Prescription (188-189) GTS201/3 - Exercise Physiology (131) GTS402/6 - Research Project (189) GTS202/2 - First Aid and Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) (131-132) GTS403/4 - Industrial Training (189) GTS404/2 - Contemporary Issues in Sports Science Practices (189) GTS203/2 - Kinanthropometry (132) GTS405/3 - Sports Management (190) GTS204/2 - Tests and Measurements for Sports Science (132) GTS406/3 - Adapted Physical Activity (190) GTS205/3 - Sports Psychology (132-133) GTS407/3 - Therapeutic Exercises (190-191) GTS206/3 - Sports Training Methodology (133) GTS207/3 - Principles and Training in Individual and Team Sports (133 & 199) GTS301/3 - Sports Nutrition (164) GTS302/2 - Motor Learning (164) GTS303/3 - Sports Injuries and Rehabilition (164-165) GTS304/3 - Sports Biomechanics and Kinesiology (165) GTS305/2 - Applied Sports Physiology (165) GTS306/3 - Coaching Science and Performance Analysis (166) 257 MEDICAL RADIATION GTX101/3 - Introduction to Medical Radiation (105-106) GTX406/6 - Research Project (192) GTX102/3 - Mathematics of Radiation Science (106) GTX407/3 - Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation II (192) GTX103/3 - Medical Radiation Physics I (106) GTX408/3 - Dose Calculations and Treatment Planning in Radiotherapy (192) GTX210/3 - Medical Radiation Physics II (134) GTX410/4 - Imaging Techniques II (193) GTX212/3 - Introduction to Medical Imaging Mathematics (134) GTX411/4 - Radiotherapy Techniques (193) GTX213/3 - Basic Science of Nuclear Medicine (135) GTX412/3 - Nuclear Medicine Imaging Techniques (194) GTX214/3 - Basic Science of Diagnostic Radiology (135) GTX413/3 - Professional Training (194) GTX302/2 - Radiation Protection and Safety I (168) GTX307/3 - Radiation Protection and Safety II (168) GTX314/2 - Introduction to Radiation Dosimetry (169) GTX316/3 - Diagnostic Radiology Imaging (169) GTX317/3 - Nuclear Medicine Imaging (169-170) GTX320/3 - Principles of Radiotherapy (170) GTX321/4 - Imaging Techniques I (170) GTX402/2 - Brachytherapy (191) GTX405/2 - Quality Assurance in Medical Radiation I (191) 258 NURSING GTJ101/4 - Nursing Foundation I (98-99) GTJ315/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing V (Dermatology, Immunology, Hematology and Oncology) (152) GTJ108/2 - Health Communication and Education (99) GTJ205/4 - Nursing Foundation III (121) GTJ316/2 - Gerontology Nursing (152) GTJ207/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing II (Gastrointestinal and Renal/Urology) (121) GTJ317/2 - Principles of Health Management (153) GTJ318/2 - GTJ209/3 - Nursing Foundation II (121-122) Neonatal and Pediatric Nursing (153) GTJ405/5 - Medical Nursing Practicum (180) GTJ406/4 - Surgical Nursing Practicum (180-181) GTJ210/3 - Primary Health Care, Family and Community Nursing (122) GTJ211/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing I (Cardiovascular and Respiratory) (122) GTJ407/4 - Critical Care and Community Nursing Practicum (181) GTJ212/2 - Obstetrics and Gynecology Nursing (123) GTJ408/4 - Maternal, Child and Women Health Nursing Practicum (181-182) GTJ309/2 - Critical Care Nursing (149) GTU201/2 - Health and Society (134) GTJ310/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing III (Endocrine and Musculoskeletal) (149-150) GTJ311/2 - Mental Health and Psychiatric Nursing (150) GTJ312/6 - Research Project (150) GTJ313/2 - Medical-Surgical Nursing IV (Neurology, Otorhinolaryngology and Ophthalmology) (151) GTJ314/2 - Nursing Education (151) 259 NUTRITION GTN101/3 - Food Science (100-101) GTN405/3 - Current Issues in Nutrition (185) GTN202/3 - Principle of Food Preparation (125) GTN407/3 - Nutrition and Dietetic Seminars (186) GTN207/3 - Principle of Nutrition (125) GTN208/3 - Nutrition Biochemistry (126) GTN209/3 - Nutrition in a Life Cycle (126) GTN210/2 - Nutrition for Health and Fitness (126-127) GTN211/3 - Food Analysis (127) GTN212/3 - Assessment of Nutritional Status (127-128) GTN301/3 - Community Nutrition and Dietetics Services Practicum (157) GTN309/3 - Nutrition and Diseases (157) GTN310/2 - Food and Nutrition Toxicology (158) GTN311/3 - Food Service Management (158) GTN312/3 - Food Microbiology (158-159) GTN314/2 - Nutrition Anthropology (159) GTN401/3 - Food Services and Industry Practicum (184) GTN403/6 - Research Project in Nutrition (185) 260 SPEECH PATHOLOGY GTP101/2 - Child Language Development (101) GTP305/2 - Counselling for Special Population (161) GTP102/2 - Basic Linguistics (101) GTP306/3 - Voice and Resonance Disorders (161-162) GTP103/2 - Introduction to Clinical Audiology and SpeechLanguage Pathology (102) GTP307/3 - Acquired Communication Disorders (162) GTP308/4 - Speech Pathology Clinic IV (162-163) Developmental Psychology for Speech and Hearing (102) GTP309/3 - Hearing Impairment (163) GTP310/2 - Speech Pathology Clinical Placement (163) GTP401/2 - Augmentative and Alternative Communication (186) GTP104/3 GTP201/2 - - Linguistics for Speech Pathology (128) GTP202/3 - Introduction to Speech and Language Disorders (128) GTP402/6 - Research Project (186-187) GTP203/2 - Speech Pathology Clinic I (129) GTP403/6 - Speech Pathology Clinic V (187) Paediatrics for Audiology and Speech Pathology (129) GTP404/2 - Swallowing Problems (187) GTP204/2 - GTP205/2 - Speech Acoustic and Phonetics (129-130) GTP406/6 - Speech Pathology Clinic VI (188) GTP206/1 - Practical Phonetics for Speech Pathology (130) GTP407/2 - Learning Disabilities (188) GTP207/2 - Speech Pathology Clinic II (130) GTP208/3 - Speech Disorders (131) GTP301/2 - Psycholinguistics (159-160) GTP302/2 - Language Disorders (160) GTP303/2 - Neuropsychology (160) GTP304/3 - Speech Pathology Clinic III (161) 261 FORENSIC SCIENCE GTF103/3 - Physical Chemistry (96) GTF306/3 - Fire Investigation (146) GTF104/3 - Inorganic Chemistry (96-97) GTF309/3 - Forensic DNA Analysis (146-147) GTF105/2 - General Chemistry Practical I (97) GTF311/3 - Forensic Anthropology (147) GTF106/3 - Analytical Chemistry I (97) GTF312/3 - Organic Chemistry III (148) GTF107/3 - Organic Chemistry I (98) GTF313/3 - Food Chemistry (148) GTF108/2 - General Chemistry Practical II (98) GTF314/2 - Forensic Serology (148-149) GTF200/3 - Criminalistic (116) GTF203/2 - Introduction to Criminology (116-117) GTF204/3 - Forensic Psychology (117) GTF205/3 - Analytical Chemistry II (117) GTF400/3 - Forensic Medicine (177-178) GTF402/4 - Ballistic and Chemistry of Explosives (178) GTF406/6 - Research Project (178-179) GTF407/8 - Forensic Practicum (179) GTF408/2 - Forensic Documents Examination (179-180) GTF206/3 - Organic Chemistry II (118) GTF207/2 - Analytical Chemistry Practical (118-119) GTF208/2 - Organic Chemistry Practical (119) GTF209/2 - Pollutions and Environment Chemistry (119-120) GTF210/3 - Material Chemistry (120) GTF211/2 - Natural Products Chemistry (120) GTF300/2 - Biological Evidence (145) GTF301/3 - Physical Evidence (145) GTF305/4 - Forensic Toxicology and Chemistry of Drug (146) 262 DIPLOMA OF NURSING DGN101/2 - Professional Nursing I (238) DGN204/3 - DGN102/3 - Nursing Skills (Activities of Daily Living) (238) DGN205/3 - Psychology for Nursing (244) DGN103/2 - Professional Nursing II (238) DGN206/2 - Mental Health for Nursing (244) DGN104/2 - Health Communication (239) DGN207/3 - DGN105/3 - Sociology in Nursing (239) DGN301/4 - Professional Nursing III (247) DGN106/2 - Biology for Nursing (239) DGN302/3 - Obstetric Nursing (247) DGN303/2 - Gynecology Nursing (247) DGN107/3 - Nursing Practicum 1 (239-240) DGN108/3 - Health Assessment (240) DGN304/3 - Medical - Surgical Nursing IV (248) DGN109/3 - Therapeutic Intervention (240) DGN305/2 - Nursing Practicum V (248) DGN306/5 - Nursing Practicum VI (248-249) DGN307/3 - DGN308/3 - Community Nursing (249) DGN309/7 - DGN110/2 - Medical - Surgical Nursing I (241) DGN111/2 - Human Biology I (241) DGN112/3 - Nursing Practicum II (241) DGN201/4 - Human Biology II (243) DGN202/3 - Medical - Surgical Nursing II (243) DGN203/3 - Nursing Practicum III (243) 263 Medical - Surgical Nursing III (244) Nursing Practicum IV (245) Neonate and Pediatric Nursing (249) Nursing Practicum VII (250) ELECTIVE GEG103/3 - Fitness and Health (196) GEG109/2 - History of Health Sciences (196) GEG114/2 - Oral Health (196-197) GEG201/2 - Women’s Health (197) GEG203/2 - Health Economic (198) GEG204/3 - Gender Perspectives in Health (198) GEG208/2 - Human Resource Management in Healthcare Organizations (199) GEG213/3 - Stress Management (199-200) GEG214/2 - Personality and Health (200) GEG302/3 - Violence & Society (200-201) GEG303/2 - Tissue Banking (201) GEG304/2 - Communication & Self Development (201) GEG305/2 - Forensic Sciences (202) GEG308/2 - Tropical Natural Resource Management (202) GEG309/2 - Principles of Forensic Dentistry (203) GEG311/2 - Botany and Health (203) LAA100/2 - Arabic Language I (204) LAA200/2 - Arabic Language II (204-205) LAJ100/2 - Japanese Language I (204) LAJ200/2 - Japanese Language II (205) 264 11.0 STUDENTS’ FEEDBACK The aim of this feedback form is to obtain students’ response regarding the content of this guidebook. The information obtained will be useful in improving it. Please respond to items 1 - 5 below based on the following 4-point scale. 1 - Strongly Disagree 2 - Disagree 3 - Agree 4 - Strongly Agree Please circle the number. 1. This guidebook is very useful. 1 2. 2 3 4 The information provided in this guidebook is accurate. 1 2 3 4 If you chose 1 or 2 for question no. 2, please provide the number of the pages(s) that contain the inaccurate information. 3. The information provided in this guidebook is clear and easy to understand. 1 4. 4 2 3 4 I prefer to use the CD that is provided compared to this guidebook. 1 6. 3 Overall, I would rate the quality of this guidebook as good. 1 5. 2 2 3 4 If there is any other information that you think should be included in the guidebook, please suggest in the space below. Please send this feedback form to School’s General Office in the 4th week of Semester I, Academic Session 2012/2013 265